Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Innovation
from
ABB
Document ID: 1MRK505132-UEN Issued: December 2007 Revision: D IED product version: 1.B
COPYRIGHT
WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS TO THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENT THAT A PATENT IS ISSUED AND A DIFFERENT COMMERCIAL PROPRIETARY RIGHT IS REGISTERED. IMPROPER USE, IN PARTICULAR REPRODUCTION AND DISSEMINATION TO THIRD PARTIES, IS NOT PERMITTED. THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY CHECKED. HOWEVER, IN CASE ANY ERRORS ARE DETECTED, THE READER IS KINDLY REQUESTED TO NOTIFY THE MANUFACTURER AT THE ADDRESS BELOW. THE DATA CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE CONCEPT OR PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND IS NOT TO BE DEEMED TO BE A STATEMENT OF GUARANTEED PROPERTIES. IN THE INTEREST OF OUR CUSTOMERS, WE CONSTANTLY SEEK TO ENSURE THAT OUR PRODUCTS ARE DEVELOPED TO THE LATEST TECHNOLOGICAL STANDARDS. AS A RESULT, IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THERE MAY BE SOME DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE HW/SW PRODUCT AND THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT. Manufacturer:
ABB AB Substation Automation Products SE-721 59 Vsters Sweden Telephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00 Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18 www.abb.com/substationautomation
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................21
Introduction to the technical reference manual.................................21 About the complete set of manuals for an IED............................21 About the technical reference manual.........................................22 Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM).......................23 Introduction.............................................................................23 Principle of operation..............................................................23 Input and output signals.........................................................26 Function block........................................................................26 Setting parameters.................................................................26 Technical data........................................................................26 Intended audience.......................................................................27 Related documents......................................................................27 Revision notes.............................................................................28
Section 2
RED 670
Table of contents
Section 3
RED 670
Table of contents
Introduction..................................................................................77 Principle of operation...................................................................77 Function block.............................................................................77 Input and output signals..............................................................77 Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)..........................................78 Introduction..................................................................................78 Principle of operation...................................................................78 Function block.............................................................................79 Input and output signals..............................................................79 Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)..................................................80 Introduction..................................................................................80 Principle of operation...................................................................80 Function block.............................................................................80 Input and output signals..............................................................80 Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI).............................................81 Introduction..................................................................................81 Principle of operation...................................................................81 Function block.............................................................................81 Input and output signals..............................................................82 Setting parameters......................................................................83 Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)..............................................85 Introduction..................................................................................85 Principle of operation...................................................................85 Function block.............................................................................86 Input and output signals..............................................................86 Setting parameters......................................................................86
Section 4
Differential protection.....................................................89
Line differential protection................................................................89 Introduction..................................................................................90 Line differential protection, 3 or 6 CT sets (PDIF, 87L)..........90 Line differential protection 3 or 6 CT sets, with in-zone transformers (PDIF, 87LT).....................................................91 Analog signal transfer for line differential protection (MDIF)....................................................................................91 Principle of operation...................................................................92 Algorithm and logic.................................................................92 Time synchronization.............................................................98 Analog signal communication for line differential protection..............................................................................100 Binary signal transfer............................................................103 Function block...........................................................................103 Input and output signals............................................................106 Setting parameters....................................................................111
RED 670
Table of contents
Technical data...........................................................................124 High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)..........................125 Introduction................................................................................125 Principle of operation.................................................................125 Logic diagram.......................................................................125 Function block...........................................................................126 Input and output signals............................................................126 Setting parameters....................................................................127 Technical data...........................................................................127
Section 5
RED 670
Table of contents
Operating and inhibit conditions...........................................167 Function block...........................................................................168 Input and output signals............................................................168 Setting parameters....................................................................169 Technical data...........................................................................170 Automatic switch onto fault logic (PSOF).......................................170 Introduction................................................................................171 Principle of operation.................................................................171 Function block...........................................................................172 Input and output signals............................................................172 Setting parameters....................................................................173 Technical data...........................................................................173
Section 6
Current protection.........................................................175
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)................175 Introduction................................................................................175 Principle of operation.................................................................175 Function block...........................................................................176 Input and output signals............................................................176 Setting parameters....................................................................176 Technical data...........................................................................177 Four step phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51_67)................177 Introduction................................................................................178 Principle of operation.................................................................178 Function block...........................................................................182 Input and output signals............................................................182 Setting parameters....................................................................184 Technical data...........................................................................190 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)...........191 Introduction................................................................................191 Principle of operation.................................................................191 Function block...........................................................................192 Input and output signals............................................................192 Setting parameters....................................................................192 Technical data...........................................................................193 Four step residual overcurrent protection (PEFM, 51N/67N).........193 Introduction................................................................................193 Principle of operation.................................................................194 Switch onto fault logic...........................................................197 Function block...........................................................................198 Input and output signals............................................................198 Setting parameters....................................................................199 Technical data...........................................................................206 Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)..........206
RED 670
Table of contents
Introduction................................................................................207 Principle of operation.................................................................207 Function block...........................................................................210 Input and output signals............................................................210 Setting parameters....................................................................210 Technical data...........................................................................211 Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)........................................211 Introduction................................................................................212 Principle of operation.................................................................212 Function block...........................................................................215 Input and output signals............................................................215 Setting parameters....................................................................216 Technical data...........................................................................217 Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB).....................................................217 Introduction................................................................................218 Principle of operation.................................................................218 Function block...........................................................................219 Input and output signals............................................................219 Setting parameters....................................................................219 Technical data...........................................................................219 Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)...................................220 Introduction................................................................................220 Principle of operation.................................................................220 Pole discordance signalling from circuit breaker..................223 Unsymmetrical current detection..........................................223 Function block...........................................................................224 Input and output signals............................................................224 Setting parameters....................................................................224 Technical data...........................................................................225
Section 7
Voltage protection........................................................227
Two step undervoltage protection (PUVM, 27)...............................227 Introduction................................................................................227 Principle of operation.................................................................227 Measurement principle.........................................................228 Time delay............................................................................228 Blocking................................................................................231 Design..................................................................................233 Function block...........................................................................234 Input and output signals............................................................234 Setting parameters....................................................................235 Technical data...........................................................................237 Two step overvoltage protection (POVM, 59).................................238 Introduction................................................................................238
RED 670
Table of contents
Principle of operation.................................................................238 Measurement principle.........................................................239 Time delay............................................................................239 Blocking................................................................................243 Design..................................................................................244 Function block...........................................................................246 Input and output signals............................................................246 Setting parameters....................................................................247 Technical data...........................................................................249 Two step residual overvoltage protection (POVM, 59N)................250 Introduction................................................................................250 Principle of operation.................................................................250 Measurement principle.........................................................250 Time delay............................................................................251 Blocking................................................................................253 Design..................................................................................254 Function block...........................................................................255 Input and output signals............................................................255 Setting parameters....................................................................255 Technical data...........................................................................257 Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24).............................................258 Introduction................................................................................258 Principle of operation.................................................................258 Measured voltage.................................................................261 Operate time of the overexcitation protection.......................262 Cooling.................................................................................265 OEX protection function measurands...................................265 Overexcitation alarm............................................................266 Logic diagram.......................................................................266 Function block...........................................................................267 Input and output signals............................................................267 Setting parameters....................................................................267 Technical data...........................................................................268
Section 8
Frequency protection....................................................271
Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)..........................................271 Introduction................................................................................271 Principle of operation.................................................................271 Measurement principle.........................................................272 Time delay............................................................................272 Voltage dependent time delay..............................................274 Blocking................................................................................275 Design..................................................................................276 Function block...........................................................................276
RED 670
Table of contents
Input and output signals............................................................277 Setting parameters....................................................................277 Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)............................................278 Introduction................................................................................278 Principle of operation.................................................................278 Measurement principle.........................................................279 Time delay............................................................................279 Blocking................................................................................281 Design..................................................................................281 Function block...........................................................................282 Input and output signals............................................................282 Setting parameters....................................................................283 Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)..........................283 Introduction................................................................................283 Principle of operation.................................................................284 Measurement principle.........................................................284 Time delay............................................................................284 Blocking................................................................................289 Design..................................................................................290 Function block...........................................................................291 Input and output signals............................................................291 Setting parameters....................................................................291 Technical data...........................................................................292
Section 9
Multipurpose protection................................................293
General current and voltage protection (GAPC).............................293 Introduction................................................................................293 Principle of operation.................................................................294 Measured quantities within the function...............................294 Base quantities for GF function............................................296 Built-in overcurrent protection steps.....................................296 Built-in undercurrent protection steps...................................301 Built-in overvoltage protection steps....................................302 Built-in undervoltage protection steps..................................302 Logic diagram.......................................................................302 Function block...........................................................................307 Input and output signals............................................................307 Setting parameters....................................................................309 Technical data...........................................................................319
RED 670
Table of contents
Function block...........................................................................323 Input and output signals............................................................323 Setting parameters....................................................................323 Technical data...........................................................................324 Fuse failure supervision (RFUF).....................................................324 Introduction................................................................................324 Principle of operation.................................................................325 Zero sequence ....................................................................325 Negative sequence...............................................................328 du/dt and di/dt.......................................................................328 Operation modes..................................................................329 Dead line detection...............................................................330 Function block...........................................................................330 Input and output signals............................................................330 Setting parameters....................................................................331 Technical data...........................................................................332
Section 11 Control..........................................................................333
Synchrocheck and energizing check (RSYN, 25)...........................333 Introduction................................................................................333 Principle of operation.................................................................333 Basic functionality.................................................................333 Logic diagrams.....................................................................334 Function block...........................................................................340 Input and output signals............................................................341 Setting parameters....................................................................342 Technical data...........................................................................344 Autorecloser (RREC, 79)................................................................345 Introduction................................................................................345 Principle of operation.................................................................346 Logic Diagrams....................................................................346 Auto-reclosing operation Off and On....................................346 Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle ....................................................................................346 Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1...............347 Long trip signal.....................................................................348 Time sequence diagrams.....................................................353 Function block...........................................................................356 Input and output signals............................................................356 Setting parameters....................................................................357 Technical data...........................................................................359 Apparatus control (APC).................................................................360 Introduction................................................................................360 Principle of operation.................................................................360
RED 670
Table of contents
Bay control (QCBAY).................................................................361 Introduction...........................................................................361 Principle of operation............................................................361 Function block......................................................................363 Input and output signals.......................................................363 Setting parameters...............................................................364 Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl)..............364 Introduction...........................................................................364 Principle of operation............................................................364 Function block......................................................................365 Input and output signals.......................................................366 Setting parameters...............................................................367 Switch controller (SCSWI).........................................................367 Introduction...........................................................................367 Principle of operation............................................................367 Function block......................................................................373 Input and output signals.......................................................373 Setting parameters...............................................................374 Circuit breaker (SXCBR)...........................................................375 Introduction...........................................................................375 Principle of operation............................................................375 Function block......................................................................379 Input and output signals.......................................................379 Setting parameters...............................................................380 Circuit switch (SXSWI)..............................................................381 Introduction...........................................................................381 Principle of operation............................................................381 Function block......................................................................385 Input and output signals.......................................................385 Setting parameters...............................................................386 Bay reserve (QCRSV)...............................................................386 Introduction...........................................................................386 Principle of operation............................................................387 Function block......................................................................389 Input and output signals.......................................................389 Setting parameters...............................................................390 Reservation input (RESIN)........................................................391 Introduction...........................................................................391 Principle of operation............................................................391 Function block......................................................................392 Input and output signals.......................................................392 Setting parameters...............................................................393 Interlocking.....................................................................................393
10
RED 670
Table of contents
Introduction................................................................................393 Principle of operation.................................................................393 Logical node for interlocking (SCILO)........................................396 Introduction...........................................................................396 Principle of operation............................................................396 Function block......................................................................397 Input and output signals.......................................................397 Interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE).........................................398 Introduction...........................................................................398 Function block......................................................................399 Logic diagram.......................................................................400 Input and output signals.......................................................405 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC)...............................407 Introduction...........................................................................407 Function block......................................................................408 Logic diagram.......................................................................409 Input and output signals.......................................................413 Interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO)...........................416 Introduction...........................................................................416 Function block......................................................................417 Logic diagram.......................................................................418 Input and output signals.......................................................421 Interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS)........................423 Introduction...........................................................................423 Function block......................................................................423 Logic diagram.......................................................................424 Input and output signals.......................................................425 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC)...............427 Introduction...........................................................................427 Function block......................................................................427 Logic diagram.......................................................................428 Input and output signals.......................................................429 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch (BB_ES).......................430 Introduction...........................................................................430 Function block......................................................................430 Logic diagram.......................................................................431 Input and output signals.......................................................431 Interlocking for double CB bay (DB)..........................................431 Introduction...........................................................................431 Function block......................................................................432 Logic diagrams.....................................................................433 Input and output signals ......................................................440 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB diameter (BH).....................................443
RED 670
11
Table of contents
Introduction...........................................................................443 Function blocks....................................................................444 Logic diagrams.....................................................................446 Input and output signals.......................................................453 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (GGIO).......................................................................458 Introduction................................................................................458 Principle of operation.................................................................458 Function block...........................................................................460 Input and output signals............................................................461 Setting parameters....................................................................462 Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)..............................463 Introduction................................................................................463 Principle of operation.................................................................463 Function block...........................................................................463 Input and output signals............................................................464 Setting parameters....................................................................464
12
RED 670
Table of contents
Introduction................................................................................476 Principle of operation.................................................................476 Zone extension.....................................................................476 Loss-of-load acceleration.....................................................477 Function block...........................................................................478 Input and output signals............................................................478 Setting parameters....................................................................479 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85).....................................................................................479 Introduction................................................................................480 Principle of operation.................................................................480 Blocking scheme..................................................................480 Permissive under/overreach scheme...................................481 Unblocking scheme..............................................................482 Function block...........................................................................483 Input and output signals............................................................484 Setting parameters....................................................................484 Technical data...........................................................................485 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85).................................................485 Introduction................................................................................485 Principle of operation.................................................................486 Directional comparison logic function...................................486 Fault current reversal logic...................................................486 Weak and infeed logic..........................................................486 Function block...........................................................................488 Input and output signals............................................................488 Setting parameters....................................................................488 Technical data...........................................................................489
Section 13 Logic.............................................................................491
Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)...............................................................491 Introduction................................................................................491 Principle of operation.................................................................491 Logic diagram.......................................................................493 Function block...........................................................................496 Input and output signals............................................................496 Setting parameters....................................................................497 Technical data...........................................................................497 Trip matrix logic (GGIO, 94X).........................................................497 Introduction................................................................................497 Principle of operation.................................................................498 Function block...........................................................................500 Input and output signals............................................................500
RED 670
13
Table of contents
Setting parameters....................................................................501 Configurable logic blocks (LLD)......................................................502 Introduction................................................................................502 Inverter function block (INV)......................................................502 OR function block (OR).............................................................502 AND function block (AND).........................................................503 Timer function block (Timer)......................................................504 Pulse timer function block (PULSE)..........................................505 Exclusive OR function block (XOR)...........................................505 Set-reset with memory function block (SRM)............................506 Controllable gate function block (GT)........................................506 Settable timer function block (TS).............................................507 Technical data...........................................................................508 Fixed signal function block (FIXD)..................................................508 Introduction................................................................................508 Principle of operation.................................................................508 Function block...........................................................................509 Input and output signals............................................................509 Setting parameters....................................................................509
Section 14 Monitoring.....................................................................511
Measurements (MMXU).................................................................511 Introduction................................................................................512 Principle of operation.................................................................513 Measurement supervision....................................................513 Service values (MMXU, SVR)..............................................517 Current Phasors (MMXU, CP)..............................................521 Voltage phasors (MMXU, VP)..............................................522 Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ).......................522 Function block...........................................................................522 Input and output signals............................................................523 Setting parameters....................................................................526 Technical data...........................................................................540 Event counter (GGIO).....................................................................540 Introduction................................................................................541 Principle of operation.................................................................541 Reporting..............................................................................541 Design..................................................................................541 Function block...........................................................................542 Input signals..............................................................................542 Setting parameters....................................................................542 Technical data...........................................................................542 Event function (EV).........................................................................543 Introduction................................................................................543
14
RED 670
Table of contents
Principle of operation.................................................................543 Function block...........................................................................545 Input and output signals............................................................545 Setting parameters....................................................................546 Fault locator (RFLO).......................................................................548 Introduction................................................................................549 Principle of operation.................................................................549 Measuring Principle..............................................................550 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault.....551 The non-compensated impedance model............................554 IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................554 Function block...........................................................................555 Input and output signals............................................................555 Setting parameters....................................................................555 Technical data...........................................................................556 Measured value expander block.....................................................557 Introduction................................................................................557 Principle of operation.................................................................557 Function block...........................................................................558 Input and output signals............................................................558 Disturbance report (RDRE)............................................................558 Introduction................................................................................559 Principle of operation.................................................................559 Function block...........................................................................566 Input and output signals............................................................568 Setting parameters....................................................................570 Technical data...........................................................................585 Event list (RDRE)...........................................................................586 Introduction................................................................................586 Principle of operation.................................................................586 Function block...........................................................................587 Input signals..............................................................................587 Technical data...........................................................................587 Indications (RDRE).........................................................................587 Introduction................................................................................587 Principle of operation.................................................................588 Function block...........................................................................589 Input signals..............................................................................589 Technical data...........................................................................589 Event recorder (RDRE)..................................................................589 Introduction................................................................................589 Principle of operation.................................................................590 Function block...........................................................................590
RED 670
15
Table of contents
Input signals..............................................................................590 Technical data...........................................................................590 Trip value recorder (RDRE)............................................................591 Introduction................................................................................591 Principle of operation.................................................................591 Function block...........................................................................592 Input signals..............................................................................592 Technical data...........................................................................592 Disturbance recorder (RDRE)........................................................592 Introduction................................................................................592 Principle of operation.................................................................593 Memory and storage............................................................593 IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................594 Function block...........................................................................595 Input and output signals............................................................595 Setting parameters....................................................................595 Technical data...........................................................................595
Section 15 Metering.......................................................................597
Pulse counter logic (GGIO)............................................................597 Introduction................................................................................597 Principle of operation.................................................................597 Function block...........................................................................599 Input and output signals............................................................599 Setting parameters....................................................................600 Technical data...........................................................................601
16
RED 670
Table of contents
LON communication protocol.........................................................607 Introduction................................................................................607 Principle of operation.................................................................608 Setting parameters....................................................................625 Technical data...........................................................................626 SPA communication protocol.........................................................626 Introduction................................................................................626 Principle of operation.................................................................626 Communication ports...........................................................636 Design.......................................................................................636 Setting parameters....................................................................636 Technical data...........................................................................637 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol.....................................637 Introduction................................................................................637 Principle of operation.................................................................637 General.................................................................................637 Communication ports...........................................................647 Function block...........................................................................647 Input and output signals............................................................650 Setting parameters....................................................................654 Technical data...........................................................................658 Single command, 16 signals (CD)..................................................659 Introduction................................................................................659 Principle of operation.................................................................659 Function block...........................................................................660 Input and output signals............................................................660 Setting parameters....................................................................661 Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT).......................662 Introduction................................................................................662 Principle of operation.................................................................662 Design.......................................................................................662 General.................................................................................662 Function block...........................................................................663 Input and output signals............................................................663 Setting parameters....................................................................665
RED 670
17
Table of contents
Section 18 Hardware......................................................................675
Overview.........................................................................................675 Variants of case- and HMI display size.....................................675 Case from the rear side.............................................................677 Hardware modules.........................................................................680 Overview....................................................................................680 Combined backplane module (CBM).........................................681 Introduction...........................................................................681 Functionality.........................................................................681 Design..................................................................................681 Universal backplane module (UBM)..........................................683 Introduction...........................................................................683 Functionality.........................................................................683 Design..................................................................................683 Power supply module (PSM).....................................................685 Introduction...........................................................................685 Design..................................................................................686 Technical data......................................................................686 Numeric processing module (NUM)..........................................686 Introduction...........................................................................686 Functionality.........................................................................687 Block diagram.......................................................................688 Local human-machine interface (LHMI)....................................688 Transformer input module (TRM)..............................................688 Introduction...........................................................................688 Design..................................................................................689 Technical data......................................................................689 Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization (ADM) .......................................................................................689 Introduction...........................................................................689 Design..................................................................................690 Binary input module (BIM).........................................................692 Introduction...........................................................................692 Design..................................................................................692 Technical data......................................................................695 Binary output modules (BOM)...................................................696 Introduction...........................................................................696 Design..................................................................................696 Technical data......................................................................698 Binary input/output module (IOM)..............................................699 Introduction...........................................................................699 Design..................................................................................699 Technical data......................................................................700
18
RED 670
Table of contents
Line data communication module (LDCM)................................701 Introduction...........................................................................701 Design..................................................................................702 Technical data......................................................................703 Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication module (SLM) ...........................................................................703 Introduction...........................................................................703 Design..................................................................................703 Technical data......................................................................705 Optical ethernet module (OEM).................................................705 Introduction...........................................................................705 Functionality.........................................................................705 Design..................................................................................705 Technical data......................................................................706 mA input module (MIM).............................................................707 Introduction...........................................................................707 Design..................................................................................707 Technical data......................................................................708 GPS time synchronization module (GSM).................................709 Introduction...........................................................................709 Design..................................................................................709 Technical data......................................................................710 GPS antenna.............................................................................711 Introduction...........................................................................711 Design..................................................................................711 Technical data......................................................................712 Case dimensions............................................................................713 Case without rear cover.............................................................713 Case with rear cover..................................................................713 Flush mounting dimensions.......................................................715 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions...................................716 Wall mounting dimensions.........................................................717 External resistor unit..................................................................718 Mounting alternatives.....................................................................719 Flush mounting..........................................................................719 Overview..............................................................................719 Mounting procedure for flush mounting................................720 19 panel rack mounting............................................................720 Overview..............................................................................720 Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting.................721 Wall mounting............................................................................722 Overview..............................................................................722 Mounting procedure for wall mounting.................................722
RED 670
19
Table of contents
How to reach the rear side of the IED..................................723 Side-by-side 19 rack mounting.................................................724 Overview..............................................................................724 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting............724 IED 670 mounted with a RHGS6 case.................................724 Side-by-side flush mounting......................................................725 Overview..............................................................................725 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting...........726 Technical data................................................................................726 Enclosure...................................................................................726 Connection system....................................................................727 Influencing factors.....................................................................727 Type tests according to standard..............................................728
Section 19 Labels...........................................................................731
Different labels................................................................................731
Section 22 Glossary.......................................................................771
Glossary.........................................................................................771
20
RED 670
Section 1 Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
About this chapter
This chapter explains concepts and conventions used in this manual and provides information necessary to understand the contents of the manual.
1.1
1.1.1
en06000097.vsd
The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting guidelines and setting parameters sorted per function. The application manual should be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection function could be used. The manual should also be used when calculating settings. The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains application and functionality descriptions and it lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The technical reference manual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service. The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on how to install and commission the protection IED. The manual can also be used as a reference during periodic testing. The manual covers procedures for mechanical and electrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and configuration as well as verifying settings and performing directional tests. The chapters are organized in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/section numbers) in which the protection IED should be installed and commissioned. The Operators Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protection IED during normal service once it has been commissioned. The operators manual
RED 670
21
Section 1 Introduction
can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated and measured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault. The IED 670 engineering guide (EG) contains instructions on how to engineer the IED 670 products. The manual guides to use the different tool components for IED 670 engineering. It also guides how to handle the tool component available to read disturbance files from the IEDs on the basis of the IEC 61850 definitions. The third part is an introduction about the diagnostic tool components available for IED 670 products and the PCM 600 tool.
1.1.2
22
RED 670
Section 1 Introduction
The chapter Remote communication describes binary and analog signal transfer, and the associated hardware. The chapter Hardware provides descriptions of the IED and its components. The chapter Connection diagrams provides terminal wiring diagrams and information regarding connections to and from the IED. The chapter Time inverse characteristics describes and explains inverse time delay, inverse time curves and their effects. The chapter Glossary is a list of terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical documentation.
1.1.3
1.1.3.1
Introduction
Outlines the implementation of a particular protection function.
1.1.3.2
Principle of operation
Describes how the function works, presents a general background to algorithms and measurement techniques. Logic diagrams are used to illustrate functionality.
Logic diagrams
Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are bordered by dashed lines. Signal names Input and output logic signals consist of two groups of letters separated by two dashes. The first group consists of up to four letters and presents the abbreviated name for the corresponding function. The second group presents the functionality of the particular signal. According to this explanation, the meaning of the signal BLKTR in figure 4 is as follows: BLKTR informs the user that the signal will BLOCK the TRIP command from the under-voltage function, when its value is a logical one (1).
Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand side. Settings are not displayed. Input and output signals In a logic diagram, input and output signal paths are shown as a lines that touch the outer border of the diagram. Input and output signals can be configured using the CAP531 tool. They can be connected to the inputs and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and outputs.
RED 670
23
Section 1 Introduction
Examples of input signals are BLKTR, BLOCK and VTSU. Examples output signals are TRIP, START, STL1, STL2, STL3. Setting parameters Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent setting parameter signals. These parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Their values are high (1) only when the corresponding setting parameter is set to the symbolic value specified within the frame. Example is the signal Block TUV=Yes. Their logical values correspond automatically to the selected setting value. Internal signals Internal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately. 2 mm from the frame edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the suffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and continues, see figure 3.
BLKTR TEST TEST Block TUV=Yes BLOCK VTSU BLOCK-int. STUL1N BLOCK-int. STUL2N BLOCK-int. STUL3N & & >1 & t & TRIP START STL1 STL2 STL3 & >1
BLOCK-int.
xx04000375.vsd
Figure 1:
External signals Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagram have the suffix -cont., see figure 2 and figure 3.
24
RED 670
Section 1 Introduction
>1
STZMPP-cont.
Figure 2:
>1 & >1 & & & 15 ms t 15 ms t 15 ms t 15 ms t STL1 STL2 STL3 START
>1 >1
BLK-cont.
xx04000377.vsd
Figure 3:
RED 670
25
Section 1 Introduction
1.1.3.3 Input and output signals
Input and output signals are presented in two separate tables. Each table consists of two columns. The first column contains the name of the signal and the second column contains the description of the signal.
1.1.3.4
Function block
Each function block is illustrated graphically. Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand side. Settings are not displayed. Special kinds of settings are sometimes available. These are supposed to be connected to constants in the configuration scheme, and are therefore depicted as inputs. Such signals will be found in the signal list but described in the settings table.
CAP531 Name Inputs
U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2 TUV1PH2PUVM TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 START ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 en05000330.vsd
Outputs
Diagram Number
Figure 4:
1.1.3.5
Setting parameters
These are presented in tables and include all parameters associated with the function in question.
1.1.3.6
Technical data
The technical data section provides specific technical information about the function or hardware described.
26
RED 670
Requirements
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in the protective devices. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in the handling electronic equipment.
1.1.5
Related documents
Documents related to RED 670 Operators manual Installation and commissioning manual Technical reference manual Application manual Buyers guide Connection diagram, Single breaker arr. Three phase tripping arr. Connection diagram, Single breaker arr. Single phase tripping arr. Connection diagram, Multi breaker arr. Three phase tripping arr. Connection diagram, Multi breaker arr. Single phase tripping arr. Configuration diagram A, Single breaker with single or double busbars Configuration diagram B, Single breakers with single or double busbars Configuration diagram C, Multi breakers such as 1 1/2 or ring busbar arr. Configuration diagram D, Multi breakers such as 1 1/2 or ring busbar arr. Setting example 1, 230 kV Short cable line with 1 1/2 CB arr. Identity number 1MRK 505 133-UEN 1MRK 505 134-UEN 1MRK 505 132-UEN 1MRK 505 135-UEN 1MRK 505 164-BEN 1MRK 002 801-BA 1MRK 002 801-CA 1MRK 002 801-DA 1MRK 002 801-EA 1MRK 004 500-82 1MRK 004 500-83 1MRK 004 500-84 1MRK 004 500-85 1MRK 505 175-WEN
Connection and Installation components Test system, COMBITEST Accessories for IED 670 Getting started guide IED 670 SPA and LON signal list for IED 670 IEC 61850 Data objects list for IED 670 Generic IEC 61850 IED Connectivity package Protection and Control IED Manager PCM 600 Installation sheet Engineering guide IED 670 products
1MRK 013 003-BEN 1MRK 512 001-BEN 1MRK 514 012-BEN 1MRK 500 065-UEN 1MRK 500 075-WEN 1MRK 500 077-WEN 1KHA001027UEN 1MRS755552 1MRK 511 179UEN
RED 670
27
28
RED 670
Section 2
2.1
RED 670
29
Figure 5:
Figure 6:
30
RED 670
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
Design
The LHMI is identical for both the 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 cases. The different parts of the small LHMI is shown in figure 7
1 2 3
en05000055.eps
Figure 7:
RED 670
31
3 Indication LEDs 4 Label 5 Local/Remote LEDs 6 RJ 45 port 7 Communication indication LED 8 Keypad
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
Design
The different parts of the medium size LHMI is shown in figure 8
32
RED 670
en05000056.eps
Figure 8:
1 Status indication LEDs 2 LCD 3 Indication LEDs 4 Label 5 Local/Remote LEDs 6 RJ45 port 7 Communication indication LED 8 Keypad
2.4
Keypad
RED 670
33
The keypad is used to monitor and operate the IED. The keypad has the same look and feel in all IEDs in the IED 670 series. LCD screens and other details may differ but the way the keys function is identical. The keypad is illustrated in figure 9.
Figure 9:
The keys used to operate the IED are described below in table 1.
Table 1:
Key
The help key brings up two submenus. Key operation and IED information.
Opens the main menu, and used to move to the default screen.
The Local/Remote key is used to set the IED in local or remote control mode.
The E key starts editing mode and confirms setting changes when in editing mode.
The right arrow key navigates forward between screens and moves right in editing mode. Table continued on next page
34
RED 670
The up arrow key is used to move up in the single line diagram and in menu tree.
The down arrow key is used to move down in the single line diagram and in menu tree.
2.5
2.5.1
LED
Introduction
The LED module is a unidirectional means of communicating. This means that events may occur that activate a LED in order to draw the operators attention to something that has occurred and needs some sort of action.
2.5.2
2.5.3
Indication LEDs
The LED indication module comprising 15 LEDs is standard in IED 670s. Its main purpose is to present an immediate visual information for protection indications or alarm signals. There are alarm indication LEDs and hardware associated LEDs on the right hand side of the front panel. The alarm LEDs are found to the right of the LCD screen. They can show steady or flashing light. Flashing would normally indicate an alarm.
RED 670
35
The alarm LEDs are configurable using the PCM 600 tool. This is because they are dependent on the binary input logic and can therefore not be configured locally on the HMI. Some typical alarm examples follow: Bay controller failure CB close blocked Interlocking bypassed Differential protection trip SF6 Gas refill Position error CB spring charge alarm Oil temperature alarm Thermal overload trip
The RJ45 port has a yellow LED indicating that communication has been established between the IED and a computer. The Local/Remote key on the front panel has two LEDs indicating whether local or remote control of the IED is active.
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
ContrastLevel
36
RED 670
2.6.3
2.6.3.1
2.6.3.2
Function block
LHMILocalHMI CLRLEDS HMI-ON RED-S YELLOW-S YELLOW-F CLRPULSE LEDSCLRD en05000773.vsd
Figure 10:
2.6.3.3
Table 4:
Signal HMI-ON RED-S YELLOW-S YELLOW-F CLRPULSE LEDSCLRD
RED 670
37
Indication LEDs
Introduction
The function block HLED (LEDMonitor) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of HLED are configured with the PCM 600 tool. The input signal for each LED is selected individually with the PCM 600 Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). LEDs (number 16) for trip indications are red and LEDs (number 715) for start indications are yellow. Each indication LED on the LHMI can be set individually to operate in six different sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as signalling system in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality. The light from the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flickering (-F).
2.6.4.2
Design
The information on the LEDs is stored at loss of the auxiliary power to the IED. The latest LED picture appears immediately after the IED is successfully restarted.
Operating modes
Collecting mode LEDs which are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.
Re-starting mode In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum time limit has been elapsed.
Acknowledgment/reset
From local HMI The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is
38
RED 670
performed via the Reset-button and menus on the LHMI. For details, refer to the Operators manual. From function input The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input, RESET, to the function. This input can for example be configured to a binary input operated from an external push button. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications active at the moment when the button is first pressed.
Automatic reset The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for restarting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications will be indicated with a steady light.
Operating sequences
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follow the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the corresponding input signal until it is reset. The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED separately. For sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type), the acknowledgment/reset function is not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode while sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and restarting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F = Flash. At the activation of the input signal, the indication operates according to the selected sequence diagrams below. In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the characteristics shown in figure 11.
= No indication = Steady light = Flash
en05000506.vsd
Figure 11:
Sequence 1 (Follow-S) This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
RED 670
39
Activating signal
LED
en01000228.vsd
Figure 12:
Sequence 2 (Follow-F) This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of showing steady light. Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light.
Activating signal
LED
Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
Figure 13:
Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F) This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have been alternated. Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset i.e. immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
40
RED 670
Activating signal
LED
Reset
en01000235.vsd
Figure 14:
Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S) In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be affected by manual reset, i.e. immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences. Definition of a disturbance A disturbance is defined to last from the first LED set as LatchedReset-S is activated until a settable time, tRestart, has elapsed after that all activating signals for the LEDs set as LatchedReset-S have reset. However if all activating signals have reset and some signal again becomes active before tRestart has elapsed, the tRestart timer does not restart the timing sequence. A new disturbance start will be issued first when all signals have reset after tRestart has elapsed. A diagram of this functionality is shown in figure 15.
RED 670
41
New disturbance
&
tRestart t
& 1 &
en01000237.vsd
Figure 15:
In order not to have a lock-up of the indications in the case of a persisting signal each LED is provided with a timer, tMax, after which time the influence on the definition of a disturbance of that specific LED is inhibited. This functionality is shown i diagram in figure 16.
Activating signal To LED
AND tMax t
en05000507.vsd
Figure 16:
Timing diagram for sequence 6 Figure 17 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.
42
RED 670
LED 1
en01000239.vsd
Figure 17:
Figure 18 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.
Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2 Disturbance t Restart
LED 1
en01000240.vsd
Figure 18:
RED 670
43
Figure 19 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2
LED 1
Figure 19:
Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between
LED 1
Figure 20:
44
RED 670
en05000508.vsd
Figure 21:
2.6.4.4
Table 6:
Signal NEWIND ACK
2.6.4.5
Setting parameters
Table 7:
Parameter Operation tRestart tMax
SeqTypeLED1
Follow-S
RED 670
45
SeqTypeLED3
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED4
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED5
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED6
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED7
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED8
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED9
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED10
Follow-S
46
RED 670
SeqTypeLED12
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED13
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED14
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED15
Follow-S
RED 670
47
48
Section 3
3.1
3.1.1
Analog inputs
Introduction
In order to get correct measurement results as well as correct protection operations the analog input channels must be configured and properly set. It is necessary to define a reference PhaseAngleRef for correct calculation of phase angles. For power measuring and all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be properly defined. The measuring and protection algorithms in IED 670 are using primary system quantities and the set values are done in primary quantities as well. Therefore it is extremely important to properly set the data about the connected current and voltage transformers. VT inputs are sometimes not available depending on ordered type of Transformer Input Module (TRM).
3.1.2
Principle of operation
The direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are always supposed to be star connected and can be connected with the star point to the object or from the object. This information must be set to the IED. The convention of the directionality is defined as follows: A positive value of current, power etc. means that the quantity has the direction into the object and a negative value means direction out from the object. For directional functions the direction into the object is defined as Forward and the direction out from the object is defined as Reverse, see figure 22
RED 670
49
Figure 22:
With correct setting of the primary CT direction, CTStarPoint set to FromObject or ToObject, a positive quantities always flowing towards the object and a direction defined as Forward always is looking towards the object. To be able to use primary system quantities for settings and calculation in the IED the ration of the main CTs and VTs must be known. This information is given to the IED by setting of the rated secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs.
3.1.3
Function block
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED670 and used internally in the configuration.
3.1.4
Setting parameters
Dependent on ordered IED 670 type.
Table 8:
Parameter PhaseAngleRef
50
RED 670
Table 9:
Parameter CTStarPoint1
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
CTsec6 CTprim6
1 - 10 1 - 99999
1 1
1 3000
A A
RED 670
51
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
CTsec12 CTprim12
1 - 10 1 - 99999
1 1
1 3000
A A
52
RED 670
Table 10:
Parameter CTStarPoint1
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
CTsec6 CTprim6
1 - 10 1 - 99999
1 1
1 3000
A A
RED 670
53
Table 11:
Parameter CTStarPoint1
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
CTsec6 CTprim6
1 - 10 1 - 99999
1 1
1 3000
A A
54
RED 670
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00
A A V kV V kV V kV
Table 12:
Parameter CTStarPoint1
CTsec1 CTprim1
1 - 10 1 - 99999
1 1
1 3000
A A
RED 670
55
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00
A A V kV V kV V kV
56
RED 670
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
Principle of operation
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes: Normal micro-processor watchdog function. Checking of digitized measuring signals. Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.
The self-supervision status can be monitored from the local HMI or a SMS/SCS system. Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the selfsupervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Diagnostics\Internal Events or Diagnostics\IED Status\General. Refer to the Installation and Commissioning manual for a detailed list of supervision signals that can be generated and displayed in the local HMI. A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function of this output relay is an OR-function between the INTFAIL signal see figure 24 and a couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 23
RED 670
57
Figure 23:
Figure 24:
Some signals are available from the IES (IntErrorSign) function block. The signals from this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. 58 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670
The signals from the IES function block can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions if required/desired. Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in the Signal Matrix Tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the time synchronization block TIME.
3.2.2.1
Internal signals
Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the IED. As they provide information about the internal life of the IED, they are also called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups. One group handles signals that are always present in the IED; standard signals. Another group handles signals that are collected depending on the hardware configuration. The standard signals are listed in table 13. The hardware dependent internal signals are listed in table 14. Explanations of internal signals are listed in table 15.
Table 13:
Name of signal FAIL WARNING NUMFAIL NUMWARNING RTCERROR TIMESYNCHERROR RTEERROR IEC61850ERROR WATCHDOG LMDERROR APPERROR SETCHGD SETGRPCHGD FTFERROR
Table 14:
Card ADxx BIM BOM IOM MIM LDCM
RED 670
59
Table 15:
Name of signal FAIL
WARNING
NUMFAIL
RTEERROR
IEC61850ERROR WATCHDOG
LMDERROR APPERROR
3.2.2.2
Run-time model
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see figure 25.
60
RED 670
Figure 25:
The technique to split the analogue input signal into two converters with different amplification makes it possible to supervise the incoming signals under normal conditions where the signals from the two converters should be identical. An alarm is given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it improves the dynamic performance of the A/D conversion. The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller function. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input signals. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is the validation part, i.e. checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected. Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU, i.e. the signal that has the most suitable level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times higherADx_HI. When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of the two channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed and an alarm will be given. The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.
3.2.3
Function block
IS--InternalSignal FAIL WARNING CPUFAIL CPUWARN T SYNCERR RT CERR en04000392.vsd
Figure 26:
IS function block
RED 670
61
3.2.5
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
3.2.6
Technical data
Table 17:
Data Recording manner List size
3.3
3.3.1
Time synchronization
Introduction
Use the time synchronization source selector to select a common source of absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes comparison of events and disturbance data between all IEDs in a SA system possible.
3.3.2
3.3.2.1
Principle of operation
General concepts Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time the clock is intended to have. The rate accuracy of a clock is normally called the clock accuracy and means how much the error increases, i.e. how much the clock 62 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670
gains or loses time. A disciplined clock is a clock that knows its own faults and tries to compensate for them, i.e. a trained clock.
Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A module is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.
Module
en05000206.vsd
Figure 27:
Synchronization principle
A module is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the synchronization decreases as well. A module can have several potential sources of synchronization, with different maximum errors, which gives the module the possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as a function of: The maximum error of the last used synchronization message The time since the last used synchronization message The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the module.
3.3.2.2
During power off, the time in the IED time is kept by a capacitor backed RTC that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time the time will be lost completely.
RED 670
63
At IED startup, the internal time is free running. If the RTC is still alive since the last up time, the time in the IED will be quite accurate (may drift 35 ppm), but if the RTC power has been lost during power off (will happen after 5 days), the IED time will start at 1970-01-01. For more information, please refer to section "Time synchronization startup procedure" and section "Example, binary synchronization".
The first message that contains full time (as for instance LON, SNTP, GPS etc.) will give an accurate time to the IED. The IED is brought into a safe state and the time is thereafter set to the correct value. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three things will happen with each of the coming synchronization messages, configured as fine: If the synchronization message, that is similar to the other messages from its origin has an offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly for synchronization, that is for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero offset at the next coming time message. If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other messages, a spike-filter in the IED will remove this time-message. If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following message also has a large offset, the spike filter will not act and the offset in the synchronization message will be compared to a threshold that defaults to 100 milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into a safe state and the clock is thereafter set to the correct time. If the offset is lower than the threshold, the clock will be adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset is removed. With an adjustment of 1000 ppm, it will take 100 seconds or 1.7 minutes to remove an offset of 100 milliseconds.
Synchronization messages configured as coarse will only be used for initial setting of the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and only an offset of more than 10 seconds will reset the time.
Rate accuracy
In the REx670 IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is about 100 ppm, but if the IED is synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy will be approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is constant. Normally it will take 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.
All synchronization interfaces has a time-out, and a configured interface must receive time-messages regularly, in order not to give a TSYNCERR. Normally, the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR will be given.
64
RED 670
SNTP provides a Ping-Pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an IED to an SNTP-server, and the SNTP-server returns the message after filling in a reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet network that connects IEDs together in an IEC61850 network. For SNTP to operate properly, there must be a SNTP-server present, preferably in the same station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that will give 1 ms accuracy for binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as a SNTP-time server.
The SNTP server to be used shall be connected to the local network, i.e. not more than 4-5 switches/routers away from the IED. The SNTP server shall be dedicated for its task, or at least equipped with at real-time operating system, i.e. not a PC with SNTP server software. The SNTP server shall be stable, i.e. either synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or local i.e. without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server i.e. without synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not recommended.
On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages are sent. Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, i.e. year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds. Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.
IEC60870-5-103 is not used to synchronize the relay, but instead the offset between the local time in the relay and the time received from 103 is added to all times (in events and so on) sent via 103. In this way the relay acts as it is synchronized from various 103 sessions at the same time. Actually, there is a local time for each 103 session. The SLM module is located on the AD conversion Module (ADM).
The built in GPS clock modules receives and decodes time information from the global positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time synchronization Module (GSM).
RED 670
65
The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be generated from e.g. station master clock. If the station master clock is not synchronized from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the substation. Both positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This signal is also considered as a fine signal. The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED. The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input. If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation and if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minute pulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minute pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in the IED. The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As only the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after the last flank. Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency. Pulse data: Period time (a) should be 60 seconds. Pulse length (b): Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms. Maximum pulse length is optional.
a b
c
en05000251.vsd
Figure 28:
The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.
66
RED 670
If contact bounces occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce. If the minute pulses are perfect, e.g. it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses, contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effecting the system. If contact bounces occurs more than 50 ms, e.g. it is less than 59950 ms between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse will not be accepted. Example, binary synchronization A IED is configured to use only binary input, and a valid binary input is applied to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time and the minute pulse is used to synchronize the IED thereafter. The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the previous minute pulse, so the first minute pulse is not used at all. The second minute pulse will probably be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time and will reset the time so that the fourth minute pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three minutes, the time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or the RTC backup still keeps the time since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed for instance for an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum the error rate in the internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse automatically is rejected. The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will either synchronize the time, if the time offset is more than 100 ms, or adjust the time, if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought to a safe state before the time is set. If the time is adjusted, the time will reach its destination within 1.7 minutes.
3.3.3
Function block
TIMETIME TSYNCERR RTCERR en05000425.vsd
Figure 29:
3.3.4
Output signals
Table 18:
Signal TSYNCERR RTCERR
3.3.5
RED 670
Setting parameters
Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 67
FineSyncSource
Off
SyncMaster
Off
TimeAdjustRate
Fast
Table 20:
Parameter CoarseSyncSrc
FineSyncSource
Off
SyncMaster
Off
TimeAdjustRate
Slow
68
RED 670
Table 21:
Parameter ModulePosition
BinaryInput
1 - 16
BinDetection
PositiveEdge NegativeEdge
PositiveEdge
Table 22:
Parameter ServerIP-Add RedServIP-Add
Table 23:
Parameter MonthInYear
DayInWeek
Sunday
WeekInMonth
Last
UTCTimeOfDay
3600
RED 670
69
Table 24:
Parameter MonthInYear
DayInWeek
Sunday
WeekInMonth
Last
UTCTimeOfDay
3600
Table 25:
Parameter NoHalfHourUTC
3.3.6
Technical data
Table 26:
Function Time tagging resolution, Events and Sampled Measurement Values Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse synchronization), Events and Sampled Measurement Values Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, Sampled Measurement Values
1.0 ms typically
70
RED 670
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
Principle of operation
The ACGR function block has six functional inputs, each corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these inputs changes the active setting group. Seven functional output signals are available for configuration purposes, so that up to date information on the active setting group is always available. A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating the corresponding input to the ACGR function block. Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary inputs in the IED. To do this the PCM 600 configuration tool must be used. The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms. More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group two are set to activate, group two will be the one activated. Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a pulse with the length according to parameter t, which is set from PCM 600 or in the local HMI. The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to switch between.
RED 670
71
Figure 30:
The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which group that is active. The SGC function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will be shown on the PST setting tool.
3.4.3
Function block
ACGRActiveGroup ACTGRP1 GRP1 ACTGRP2 GRP2 ACTGRP3 GRP3 ACTGRP4 GRP4 ACTGRP5 GRP5 ACTGRP6 GRP6 SETCHGD en05000433.vsd
Figure 31:
3.4.4
72
Table 27:
Signal ACTGRP1 ACTGRP2 ACTGRP3 ACTGRP4 ACTGRP5 ACTGRP6
Table 28:
Signal GRP1 GRP2 GRP3 GRP4 GRP5 GRP6 SETCHGD
3.4.5
Setting parameters
Table 29:
Parameter t
Table 30:
Parameter ActiveSetGrp
MAXSETGR
No
RED 670
73
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
Principle of operation
To be able to test the functions in the IED, you must set the terminal in the TEST mode. There are two ways of setting the terminal in the TEST mode: By configuration, activating the input of the function block TEST. By setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under the menu: TEST/IED test mode.
While the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE output of the function block TEST is activated. The other two outputs of the function block TEST are showing which is the generator of the Test mode: On state input from configuration (OUTPUT output activated) or setting from LHMI (SETTING output activated). While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions are blocked. Any function can be de-blocked individually regarding functionality and event signalling. Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (the output ACTIVE in function block TEST is set to true), see example in figure 32. When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes are possible. The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the blockings were not reset. The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no outputs will be activated. The TEST function block might be used to automatically block functions when a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30) can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TEST function block.
74
RED 670
Each of the protection functions includes the blocking from TEST function block. A typical example from the undervoltage function is shown in figure 32.
Disconnection
tBlkUV1 < t1,t1Min IntBlkStVal1 IntBlkStVal2 Time Block step 1 Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
Figure 32:
3.5.3
Function block
TESTTest INPUT ACTIVE OUTPUT SETTING en05000443.vsd
Figure 33:
3.5.4
RED 670
75
Table 32:
Signal ACTIVE OUTPUT SETTING
3.5.5
Setting parameters
Table 33:
Parameter TestMode
3.6
3.6.1
IED identifiers
Introduction
There are two functions that allow you to identify each IED individually: ProductInformation function has only three pre-set, unchangeable but nevertheless very important settings: SerialNo., Ordering No., and ProductDate, that you can see on the local HMI, under Diagnostics/IED Status/Identifiers. They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance). Identifiers function is actually allowing you to identify the individual IED in your system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
3.6.2
Setting parameters
Table 34:
Parameter StationName StationNumber ObjectName ObjectNumber UnitName UnitNumber
76
RED 670
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
Principle of operation
The SMBI function block, see figure 34, receives its inputs from the real (hardware) binary inputs via the SMT, and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, named BI1 to BI10. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be tag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT.
3.7.3
Function block
SI01SMBI INSTNAME BI1NAME BI2NAME BI3NAME BI4NAME BI5NAME BI6NAME BI7NAME BI8NAME BI9NAME BI10NAME BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10
en05000434.vsd
Figure 34:
SI function block
3.7.4
RED 670
77
Table 36:
Signal BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
Principle of operation
The SMBO function block, see figure 35, receives logical signal from the IED configuration, which it is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via the SMT. The inputs in the SMBO are named BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the whole function block, can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT.
78
RED 670
Figure 35:
SO function block
3.8.4
Table 38:
Signal INSTNAME BO1NAME BO2NAME BO3NAME BO4NAME BO5NAME BO6NAME BO7NAME
RED 670
79
3.9
3.9.1
3.9.2
Principle of operation
The SMMI function block, see figure 36, receives its inputs from the real (hardware) mA inputs via the SMT, and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its analog outputs, named AI1 to AI6. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be tag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT. The outputs on the SMMI are normally connected to the SPGGIO MVGGIO function block for further use of the mA signals.
3.9.3
Function block
SMI1SMMI INSTNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME AI5NAME AI6NAME AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6
en05000440.vsd
Figure 36:
3.9.4
80
RED 670
Table 39:
Signal INSTNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME AI5NAME AI6NAME
Table 40:
Signal AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6
3.10
3.10.1
3.10.2
Principle of operation
Every SMAI function block can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value), either voltage or current, see figure 37 and figure 38. The outputs of the SMAI are giving information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. 244 values in total). The BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the analog inputs of the function block.
3.10.3
Function block
RED 670
81
PR01SMAI BLOCK DFTSPFC GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME TYPE SYNCOUT SPFCOUT AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN NOSMPLCY en05000705.vsd
Figure 37:
PR02SMAI BLOCK GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME TYPE
Figure 38:
3.10.4
Table 42:
Signal SYNCOUT SPFCOUT AI3P AI1
82
RED 670
Table 43:
Signal BLOCK GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME
Table 44:
Signal AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN
3.10.5
Setting parameters
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.
RED 670
83
Table 45:
Parameter DFTRefExtOut
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType Negation
Ph-N Off
MinValFreqMeas
10
UBase TYPE
0.05 1
400.00 1
kV Ch
84
RED 670
Table 46:
Parameter DFTReference
ConnectionType Negation
Ph-N Off
MinValFreqMeas
10
UBase TYPE
0.05 1
400.00 1
kV Ch
3.11
3.11.1
3.11.2
Principle of operation
The summation block receives the 3ph signals from the SMAI blocks, see figure 39. In the same way, the BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the analog inputs of the function block.
RED 670
85
Figure 39:
SU function block
3.11.4
Table 48:
Signal AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4
3.11.5
Setting parameters
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.
86
RED 670
Table 49:
Parameter SummationType
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
FreqMeasMinVal
10
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
RED 670
87
88
Section 4
Differential protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes the measuring principles, functions and parameters used in differential protection.
4.1
3Id/I>
Function block name: L6D-ANSI number: 87L IEC 61850 logical node name: L6CPDIF
3Id/I>
Function block name: LT3D-ANSI number: 87LT IEC 61850 logical node name: LT3CPDIF
3Id/I>
RED 670
89
Function block name: LT6D-ANSI number: 87LT IEC 61850 logical node name: LT6CPDIF
3Id/I>
4.1.1
4.1.1.1
Introduction
Line differential protection, 3 or 6 CT sets (PDIF, 87L)
The line differential function compares the currents entering and leaving the protected overhead line or cable. It offers phase-segregated true current differential protection with high sensitivity and provides phase selection information for single-pole tripping. The three terminal version is used for conventional two-terminal lines with or without 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement in one end, as well as three terminal lines with single breaker arrangements at all terminals.
Protected zone
RED 670
Comm. Channel
Figure 40:
The six terminal version is used for conventional two-terminal lines with 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangements in both ends, as well as multi terminal lines with up to five terminals.
Protected zone
RED 670
RED 670
Comm. Channel
RED 670
en05000040.vsd
Figure 41:
90
RED 670
The current differential algorithm in RED 670 provides high sensitivity for internal faults, at the same time as it has excellent stability for external faults. Current samples from all CTs are exchanged between the IEDs in the line ends (master-master mode) or sent to one IED (master-slave mode) for evaluation. A restrained dual biased slope evaluation is made where the bias current is the highest phase current in any line end giving a secure through fault stability even with heavily saturated CTs. In addition to the restrained evaluation, an unrestrained high differential current setting can be used for fast tripping of internal faults with very high currents. A special feature with RED 670 is that applications with small power transformers (rated current less than 50% of differential current setting) connected as line taps without measurement in the tap can be handled. The normal load current is here considered to be negligible, and special measures need only to be taken in the event of a short circuit on the LV side of the transformer. In this application, the tripping of the differential protection can be time delayed for low differential currents in order to achieve coordination with down stream over current relays. A line charging current compensation provides increased sensitivity of the differential function.
4.1.1.2
RED 670
Comm. Channel
RED 670
Comm. Channel
RED 670
Comm. Channel
en05000042.vsd
Figure 42:
Example of application on a three-terminal line with a power transformer in the protection zone
4.1.1.3
RED 670
91
64 kbit/s communication channel is needed between every IED included in the same line differential protection zone. In the latter, current samples are sent from all slave IEDs to one master IED where the evaluation is made, and trip signals are sent to the remote ends when needed. In this system, a 64 kbit/s communication channel is only needed between the master, and each one of the slave terminals.
Protected zone
RED 670
RED 670
Comm. Channels
RED 670
RED 670
Figure 43:
RED 670
RED 670
Comm. Channels
RED 670 RED 670 RED 670 en05000044.vsd
Figure 44:
Current samples from IEDs located geographically apart from each other, must be time coordinated so that the current differential algorithm can be executed correctly. In RED 670 it is possible to make this coordination in two different ways. The echo method of time synchronizing is normally used whereas for applications where transmit and receive times can differ, the optional built in GPS receivers shall be used. The communication link is continuously monitored, and an automatic switchover to a standby link is possible after a preset time.
4.1.2
4.1.2.1
Principle of operation
Algorithm and logic
In the line differential function, measured current values from local and remote line ends are evaluated in order to distinguish between internal or external faults, or undisturbed conditions.
92
RED 670
The local currents are fed to the IED via the Analogue Input Modules and thereafter they pass the Analog to Digital Converter, see figure 45.
Figure 45:
RED 670
93
The remote currents are received to the IED as samples via a communication link. When entering the IED, they are processed in the Line Differential Communication Module (LDCM) where they are time coordinated with the local current samples, and interpolated in order to be comparable with the local samples. In the Pre-Processing Block, the real and imaginary parts of the fundamental frequency phase currents and negative sequence currents are derived. Together with the current samples, they are then forwarded to the differential function block where three different analyses are carried out. The first analysis is the classical differential and bias current evaluation with the characteristic as seen in figure 46. The line differential function is phase segregated where the differential current is the vectorial sum of all measured currents taken separately for each phase. The bias current, on the other hand, is considered as the greatest phase current in any line end and it is common for all three phases. The two slopes (SlopeSection1, SlopeSection2) and breakpoints (EndSection1, EndSection2) can be set in the PCM 600 tool or via the HMI. Current values plotted above the characteristic formed by IdMin and the dual slope will give a start in that phase. The level IdMinHigh is a setting value that is used to temporarily decrease the sensitivity in situations when: the line is energized when a fault is classified as external when a tap transformer is switched in
There is also an unrestrained high differential current setting that can be used for fast tripping of internal faults with very high currents.
94
RED 670
3 A 2 Section 1
Operate conditionally
IdMinHigh B
Section 2
Section 3 SlopeSection3
Restrain 4 5
en05000300.vsd
Figure 46:
where:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
The second analysis is the 2nd and 5th harmonic analysis on the differential current. Occurrence of these harmonics over a level that is set separately for each one will block tripping action from the biased slope evaluation. The third analysis is the negative sequence current analysis. Effectively this is a fault discriminator that distinguishes between internal and external faults. It works such RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 95
that the phase angle of the negative sequence current from the local end is compared with the phase angle of the sum of the negative sequence currents from the remote ends. The characteristic for this fault discriminator is shown in figure 47, where the directional characteristic is defined by the two setting parameters IminNegSeq and NegSeqRoa.
90 deg 120 deg If one or the other of currents is too low, then no measurement is done, and 120 degrees is mapped Internal/external fault boundary
180 deg
0 deg
IMinNegSeq
270 deg
en05000188.vsd
Figure 47:
Reference direction of currents is considered to be towards the line. Thus, when both currents to be compared have this direction, the phase difference between them will ideally be zero. In the opposite case, when one current is entering and the other is leaving the protected object, the phase difference will ideally be 180 degree. In case either the local or the sum of the remote negative sequence currents or both is below the set level, the fault discriminator will not make any fault classification and the value 120 degree is set. This value is then an indication that negative sequence directional comparison has not been possible to make, and it does not mean classification as external fault. When a fault is classified as internal by the negative sequence fault discriminator, a trip is issued under the condition that the dual slope restrained function has started, whilst a classification as external fault results in an increase of the restrained characteristic trip values IdMinHigh. With reference to figure 45, the outputs from the three analysis blocks are fed to the output logic. Figure 48 shows a simplified block diagram of this output logic where only trip commands and no alarm signals are shown for simplicity.
96
RED 670
Figure 48:
Remembering that current values plotted above the characteristic formed by IdMin and the dual slope in figure 47 are said to give a start, the output logic can be summarized as follows: A start in one phase, gives a trip under the condition that the content of 2nd and 5th harmonic is below the set level for these harmonics. Otherwise it is blocked as long as the harmonic is above the set level. However, when a line is energized
RED 670
97
the current setting value IdMinHigh is used. Effectively this means that the line A-B-C in figure 46 forms the characteristic. Current values above the unrestrained limit gives a trip irrespective of any presence of harmonics. Classification of a fault as internal by the negative sequence fault discriminator, will give a trip under the condition that a start has occurred in that phase. This means that any harmonic blocking is then overridden. However, occurrence of harmonics at the same time as the differential current is below the level IdMinHigh, will block a trip even though the fault is classified as internal. This latter condition is to prevent unwanted trips when energizing a line tap transformer. Classification of a fault as external by the negative sequence fault discriminator will cause IdMinHigh to be used as the lower limit for the restrained characteristic according to figure 46. Cross blocking will also be activated in this situation.
Compensation for charging currents can be selected active or not by setting ChargCurEnableYes or No. The compensation works such that the fundamental frequency differential current that is measured under steady state undisturbed conditions, is identified and then subtracted making the resulting differential current zero (or close to zero). This action is made separately for each phase. The magnitude of the subtracted pre-fault currents in Amperes can be read at any time as the service value ICHARGE. Values of the pre-fault differential currents are not updated under disturbance conditions. The updating process is resumed 50 ms after normal conditions have been restored. Normal conditions are only considered if there are no start signals, neither internal nor external fault is declared, the power system is symmetrical, etc. It is thus obvious that the change in charging current that the fault causes by decreasing the system voltage is not considered in the algorithm, a matter that is further discussed in the Application Manual for RED670. It shall be noted that all small pre-fault differential currents are subtracted, no matter what their origin. Besides the true charging currents, the following currents are eliminated: Small differential currents due to small errors (inequalities) of current transformers. Small differential currents because of off-nominal On-Load-Tap-Changer positions when a power transformer is included in the protected zone. Load currents of tap loads included in the protected zone.
4.1.2.2
Time synchronization
In a numerical line differential protection, current samples from protections located geographically apart from each other, must be time coordinated so that the currents from the different line ends can be compared without introducing irrelevant errors. Accuracy requirements on this time coordination are extremely high.
98
RED 670
As an example, an inaccuracy of 0.1 ms in a 50 Hz system gives a maximum amplitude error approximately around 3% whilst an inaccuracy of 1 ms gives a maximum amplitude error of approximately 31%. The corresponding figures for a 60 Hz system are 4% and 38% respectively. In RED670 the time coordination is made with the so-called echo method, which can be complemented with GPS synchronization as an option. Each IED has an accurate local clock with a very small time drift. This clock makes time tagging of telegrams, and the echo method is then used to find out the time difference between the clocks in two ends of a power line. Referring to figure 49, it works such that the transmission time to send a message from station B to station A (T1 T2) and receive a message from A to B (T3 T4) is measured. The time instances T2 and T3 are taken with the local clock reference of station A, and the time instances T1 and T4 are taken with the local clock reference of station B.
A B T1
T2
T3
T4
en05000293.vsd
Figure 49:
Calculation of the delay time one-way Td and the time difference t between the clocks in A and B is then possible to do with equation 2 and equation 3, which are only valid under the condition that the send and receive times are equal.
Td = (T2 - T1 ) + (T4 - T3 ) 2 (T1 + T4 ) - (T2 + T3 ) 2
(Equation 2)
Dt =
(Equation 3)
In RED 670 t is calculated every time a telegram is received, and the time difference is then used to adjust and interpolate the current measurements from the remote end before the current differential algorithm is executed. The echo method without GPS, can be used in telecommunications transmission networks with varying signal propagation delay as long as there is delay symmetry i.e. the send and receive delays are equal. The delay variation can depend on the signal going different routes in the network from time to other.
RED 670
99
When the delay symmetry is lost, the expression for t given above is no longer valid, and GPS synchronization of the local IED clocks must be used. Including the optional GPS, means that there will be one GPS receiver module in each IED, synchronizing its local IED clock. As GPS synchronization is very accurate, in the order of 1 s, all IEDs in the same line differential scheme will have the same clock reference. It is then possible to detect asymmetric transmission time delay and compensate for it. When the IED is equipped with GPS, this hardware is integrated in the IED. Besides the GPS receiver itself, it also consists of filters and regulators for post processing of the GPS time synch pulse, which is necessary to achieve a reliable GPS synchronization. Especially short interruptions and spurious out of synch GPS signals are handled securely in this way. When GPS synchronization is used, an interruption in the GPS signal leads to freewheeling during 8 seconds i.e. during this time the synchronization benefits from the stability in the local clocks. If the interruption persists more than 8 seconds, either fall back to the echo synchronization method or blocking of the line differential function is made, as selected through setting parameter GPSSyncErr. For a description of the time synchronization function, refer to section "Time synchronization".
4.1.2.3
100
RED 670
Protected zone
RED 670
RED 670
RED 670
RED 670
en05000292.vsd
Figure 50:
In the master-slave system, current samples are sent from all slave IEDs to one master IED where the evaluation is made and trip signals are sent to the remote ends when needed. In this system, a 64 kbit/s communication channel is only needed between the master, and each one of the slave terminals as shown in figure 51.
Protected zone
RED 670
RED 670
en05000291.vsd
Figure 51:
The master-slave configuration is achieved by setting parameter Operation in the slaves to Off for the line differential function, and setting parameter ChannelMode to On for the LDCMs in the slaves.
Test mode
The line differential function in one IED can be set in test mode. This will block the trip outputs on that IED, and set the remote IEDs in a remote test mode, such that injected currents will be echoed back phase shifted and with a settable amplitude. The trip outputs in the remote terminals will also be blocked automatically. For further information on this, refer to the Installation and Commissioning manual for RED670.
The currents are sampled twenty times per power system cycle in the protection terminals, but the communication exchange is made only once every 5 ms. This means that at in each telegram sent, 5 consecutive current samples in a 50 Hz system and 6 RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 101
consecutive current samples in a 60 Hz system (three phases each sampling instant) are included. Figure 52 shows the principle.
Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent
10
15
20
25
30
35
Time (ms)
en05000290.vsd
Figure 52:
where: x
With redundant communication channels, as shown in figure 53, both channels are in operation continuously but with one of them favoured as a primary channel.
Telecom. Network
LD CM LD CM LD CM LD CM
Telecom. Network
en05000289.vsd
Direct fibre optical connection between two terminals with LDOM over longer distances.
In case communication is lost on the primary channel, switchover to the secondary channel is made after a settable time delay RedChSwTime. Return of the primary channel will cause a switchback after another settable time delay RedChRturnTime. For a three-, four- or five terminal line in a master-master configuration, a loss of one communication channel will not cause the line differential protection to be unserviceable. Instead it will automatically revert to a partial master-slave mode with 102 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670
the two IEDs that have an unserviceable communication link between them, will serve as slaves. For more details about the remote communication see Chapter "Remote communication". See also the Application manual.
4.1.2.4
4.1.3
Function block
L3D-L3CPDIF I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 NSANGLE IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG ID2HL1 ID2HL2 ID2HL3 ID5HL1 ID5HL2 ID5HL3 IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 ICHARGE
en05000667.vsd
Figure 54:
RED 670
103
L6D-L6CPDIF I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 I3P4 I3P5 I3P6 TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 NSANGLE IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG ID2HL1 ID2HL2 ID2HL3 ID5HL1 ID5HL2 ID5HL3 IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 ICHARGE
en05000666.vsd
Figure 55:
104
RED 670
LT3DLT3CPDIF_87LT I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 ALARM OPENCT OPENCTAL IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG en06000254.vsd
Figure 56:
LT6DLT6CPDIF_87LT I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 I3P4 I3P5 I3P6 TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 ALARM OPENCT OPENCTAL IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG en06000255.vsd
Figure 57:
RED 670
105
LDL-LineDiffLogic CTFAIL OUTSERV BLOCK TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRLOCAL TRLOCL1 TRLOCL2 TRLOCL3 TRREMOTE DIFLBLKD en05000394.vsd
Figure 58:
4.1.4
Table 51:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2
106
RED 670
Table 52:
Signal I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 I3P4 I3P5 I3P6
Table 53:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START
RED 670
107
Table 54:
Signal I3P1 I3P2 I3P3
108
RED 670
Table 55:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 NSANGLE IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG ID2HL1 ID2HL2 ID2HL3 ID5HL1 ID5HL2 ID5HL3 IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 ICHARGE
RED 670
109
Table 56:
Signal I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 I3P4 I3P5 I3P6
Table 57:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 NSANGLE IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG ID2HL1 ID2HL2 ID2HL3
110
RED 670
Table 58:
Signal CTFAIL OUTSERV BLOCK
Table 59:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRLOCAL TRLOCL1 TRLOCL2 TRLOCL3 TRREMOTE DIFLBLKD
4.1.5
Setting parameters
RED 670
111
Table 60:
Parameter NoOfTerminals
Chan2IsLocal
No
IBase
0.1
3000.0
ZerSeqCurSubtr
Off On
Off
Table 61:
Parameter Operation IdMin
EndSection1
0.20 - 1.50
0.01
1.25
IB
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
0.01
3.00
IB
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0
SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0
IdMinHigh
0.20 - 10.00
0.01
1.00
IB
IntervIdMinHig
0.250 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
0.01
10.00
IB
NegSeqDiff
On
NegSeqROA
1.0
60.0
Deg
112
RED 670
CrossBlock I2/I1Ratio
1.0
No 10.0
I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
25.0
ChargCurEnable
Off
AddDelay
Off
IMaxAddDelay
0.01
1.00
IB
DefDelay
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
0.000
IDMTtMin
0.001 - 6.000
0.001
0.010
CurveType
ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.05 - 1.10
0.01
1.00
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse delays Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type.
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.02
RED 670
113
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
Table 62:
Parameter NoOfTerminals
Chan2IsLocal
No
IBase
0.1
3000.0
ZerSeqCurSubtr
Off On
Off
Table 63:
Parameter Operation
IdMin
0.01
0.50
IB
EndSection1
0.20 - 1.50
0.01
1.25
IB
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
0.01
3.00
IB
114
RED 670
SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0
IdMinHigh
0.20 - 10.00
0.01
1.00
IB
IntervIdMinHig
0.250 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
0.01
10.00
IB
NegSeqDiff
On
NegSeqROA
1.0
60.0
Deg
IMinNegSeq
0.01 - 0.20
0.01
0.04
IB
CrossBlock I2/I1Ratio
1.0
No 10.0
I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
25.0
ChargCurEnable
Off
AddDelay
Off
IMaxAddDelay
0.01
1.00
IB
DefDelay
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
0.000
IDMTtMin
0.001 - 6.000
0.001
0.010
RED 670
115
0.01
1.00
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse delays Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type.
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.02
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.14
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
Table 64:
Parameter NoOfTerminals
Chan2IsLocal
No
IBase
50.0 - 9999.9
0.1
3000.0
ZerSeqCurSubtr
Off On
Off
116
RED 670
TraAWind1Volt
0.1
130.0
kV
Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on winding 1 (HV winding) Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on winding 2 (LV winding) Transf. A phase shift in multiples of 30 deg, 5 for 150 deg
TraAWind2Volt
1.0 - 9999.9
0.1
130.0
kV
ClockNumTransA
0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg lag] 7 [210 deg lag] 8 [240 deg lag] 9 [270 deg lag] 10 [300 deg lag] 11 [330 deg lag] No Yes
0 [0 deg]
ZerSeqPassTraA
No
Yes/No for capability of transf A to transform zero seq curr Power transformer B applied on input channel X
TransfBonInpCh
No Transf B
TraBWind1Volt
0.1
130.0
kV
RED 670
117
ClockNumTransB
0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg lag] 7 [210 deg lag] 8 [240 deg lag] 9 [270 deg lag] 10 [300 deg lag] 11 [330 deg lag] No Yes
0 [0 deg]
ZerSeqPassTraB
No
Table 65:
Parameter Operation IdMin
EndSection1
0.20 - 1.50
0.01
1.25
IB
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
0.01
3.00
IB
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0
SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0
IdMinHigh
0.20 - 10.00
0.01
1.00
IB
IntervIdMinHig
0.250 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
0.01
10.00
IB
NegSeqDiff
Off On
On
118
RED 670
IMinNegSeq
0.01 - 0.20
0.01
0.04
IB
CrossBlock I2/I1Ratio
1.0
No 10.0
I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
25.0
ChargCurEnable
Off
AddDelay
Off
IMaxAddDelay
0.01
1.00
IB
DefDelay
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
0.000
IDMTtMin
0.001 - 6.000
0.001
0.010
CurveType
ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.05 - 1.10
0.01
1.00
RED 670
119
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.14
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
Table 66:
Parameter NoOfTerminals
Chan2IsLocal
No
2-nd local current connected to input channel 2, Yes/ No Base (reference) current of the differential protection Off/On for elimination of zero seq. from diff. and bias curr Power transformer A applied on input channel X
IBase
0.1
3000.0
ZerSeqCurSubtr
Off ON
Off
TraAOnInpCh
No Transf A
RatVoltW1TraA
0.1
130.0
kV
Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on winding 1 (HV winding) Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on winding 2 (LV winding)
RatVoltW2TraA
1.0 - 9999.9
0.1
130.0
kV
120
RED 670
ZerSeqPassTraA
No
Yes/No for capability of transf A to transform zero seq curr Power transformer B applied on input channel X
TraBOnInpCh
No Transf B
RatVoltW1TraB
0.1
130.0
kV
Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on winding 1 (HV winding) Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on winding 2 (LV winding) Transf. B phase shift in multiples of 30 deg, 2 for 60 deg
RatVoltW2TraB
1.0 - 9999.9
0.1
130.0
kV
ClockNumTransB
0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg lag] 7 [210 deg lag] 8 [240 deg lag] 9 [270 deg lag] 10 [300 deg lag] 11 [330 deg lag] No Yes
0 [0 deg]
ZerSeqPassTraB
No
RED 670
121
Table 67:
Parameter Operation IdMin
IdMinHigh
0.20 - 10.00
0.01
0.80
IB
tIdMinHigh
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
0.01
10.00
IB
NegSeqDiffEn
ON
NegSeqROA
1.0
60.0
Deg
IMinNegSeq
0.01 - 0.20
0.01
0.04
IB
CrossBlockEn
No
I2/I1Ratio
1.0
10.0
I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
25.0
ChargCurEnable
Off
AddDelay
Off
IMaxAddDelay
0.01
1.00
IB
tDefTime
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
0.000
tMinInv
0.001 - 6.000
0.001
0.010
122
RED 670
0.01
1.00
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse delays Sustained differential current alarm, factor of IBase Delay for alarm due to sustained differential current, in s
IdiffAlarm
0.05 - 1.00
0.01
0.15
IB
tAlarmdelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000
Table 68:
Parameter EndSection1
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
0.01
3.00
IB
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0
SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.02
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.14
RED 670
123
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
OpenCTEnable tOCTAlarmDelay
0.001
ON 1.000
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250
Table 69:
Parameter Operation testModeSet ReleaseLocal
4.1.6
Technical data
Table 70:
Function Minimum operate current SlopeSection2 SlopeSection3 EndSection 1 EndSection 2 Unrestrained limit function Second harmonic blocking Fifth harmonic blocking Table continued on next page
124
RED 670
4.2
IdN
4.2.1
Introduction
The high impedance differential protection can be used when the involved CT cores have same turn ratio and similar magnetizing characteristic. It utilizes an external summation of the phases and neutral current and a series resistor and a voltage dependent resistor externally to the relay.
4.2.2
Principle of operation
The high impedance differential function is based on one current input with external stabilizing resistors and voltage dependent resistors. Three functions can be used to provide a three phase differential protection function. The stabilizing resistor value is calculated from the relay operating value UR calculated to achieve through fault stability. The supplied stabilizing resistor has a link to allow setting of the correct resistance value.
4.2.2.1
Logic diagram
The logic diagram see figure 59 shows the operation principles for the high impedance differential protection function. It is a basically a simple one step relay with an additional lower alarm level. The function can be totally blocked totally or only tripping by activating inputs from external signals.
RED 670
125
Figure 59:
4.2.3
Function block
HZD1HZPDIF_87 ISI BLOCK BLKTR TRIP ALARM MEASVOLT en05000363.vsd
Figure 60:
4.2.4
Table 72:
Signal TRIP ALARM MEASVOLT
126
RED 670
tAlarm U>Trip
0.001 1
5.000 100
s V
SeriesResistor
10 - 20000
250
ohm
4.2.6
Technical data
Table 74:
Function Operate voltage Reset ratio Maximum continuous voltage Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time
RED 670
127
128
Section 5
Distance protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes distance protection and associated functions. It includes function blocks, logic diagrams and data tables with information about distance protection, automatic switch onto fault, weak end in-feed and other associated functions. Quadrilateral characteristics are also covered.
5.1
5.1.1
Introduction
The line distance protection is a three zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for phase to phase faults and three fault loops for phase to earth fault for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use onoverhead lines and cables of different types and lengths. The function has a functionality for load encroachment which increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines(see figure 61).
RED 670
129
X Forward operation
R Reverse operation
en05000034.vsd
Figure 61:
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in applications with single phase auto-reclosing. Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone1 at load exporting end at phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines. The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc.
5.1.2
5.1.2.1
Principle of operation
Full scheme measurement
The execution of the different fault loops within the IED670 are of full scheme type, which means that each fault loop for phase to earth faults and phase to phase faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel. Figure 62 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five, impedance-measuring zones l.
130
RED 670
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 1
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 2
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 3
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 4
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 5
en05000458.vsd
Figure 62:
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection relay with six measuring elements.
5.1.2.2
Impedance characteristic
The distance measuring zone include six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as three-phase faults. The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional impedance characteristics presented in figure 63 and figure 64. The phase-to-earth characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase characteristic presents the per-phase reach.
RED 670
131
Xn =
X1+Xn
X0 - X1 3
Rn = f N f N
R0 - R1 3
R (Ohm/loop)
RFPE
RFPE
X1+Xn
RFPE
R1+Rn
RFPE
en05000661.vsd
Figure 63:
132
RED 670
X RFPP 2R1
(Ohm/phase)
RFPP
2X1
2X1
RFPP
2R1
RFPP
en05000662.vsd
Figure 64:
The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in figure 65. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.
RED 670
133
UL1
ILn
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth element
UL1
IL1
R1 + j X1
IL2 UL2 R1 + j X1
IL1
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
IL3 R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP
en05000181.vsd
Figure 65:
where: n m
designates anyone of the three phases (1, 2 or 3) and represents the phase that is leading phase n with 120 degrees (i.e. 3, 1 or 2).
The R1 and jX1 in figure 65 represents the positive sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE and RFPP is the eventual fault resistance in the fault place. Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 65, there is of course fault current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase. The theoretical parameters p and q outline the area of operation in quadrant 1 when varied from 0 to 1.0. That is, for any combination of p and q, where both are between 0 and 1.0, the corresponding impedance is within the reach of the characteristic.
134
RED 670
The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in figure 66. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it is conform for forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.
X X X
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
en05000182.vsd
Figure 66:
5.1.2.3
RED 670
135
(Equation 4)
Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3) The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to ph-E faults (example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 6.
U L1 Z app = ----------------------------I L1 + I N KN
(Equation 5)
Where: UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED KN is defined as:
KN = X0 - X1 3X1
where X0 and X1 is zero and positive sequence reactance from the measuring point to the fault on the protected line.
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in relay point. This results in the same reach along the line for all types of faults. The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and reactance X. The formula given in equation 6 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications. When load is considered in the case of single line to earth fault, conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. REx670 has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications. Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter. The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the loop impedance according to equation 7, 136 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670
X i ----- D U = R i + ---w0 D t
(Equation 7)
X D Im ( I ) Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ ---------------w0 Dt
(Equation 9)
with
w0 = 2 p f 0
(Equation 10)
where: Re Im f0 designates the real component of current and voltage, designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and designates the rated system frequency
The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
Im ( U ) D Re ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I ) ----------------------------------R m = -----------------------------------------------D Re ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
(Equation 11)
Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )Xm = w 0 D t -----------------------------------------------------------------------------D Re ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
(Equation 12)
The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors. The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the relay point.
RED 670
137
(Equation 13)
For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.
0.8 U1L1L2 + 0.2 U1L1L2M - < ArgNegRes -ArgDir < arg ---------------------------------------------------------------------I L1L2
(Equation 14)
where: ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 115 degrees, see figure 67. U1L1 U1L1M IL1 U1L1L2 U1L1L2M IL1L2 is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1 is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1 is phase current in phase L1 is voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1) is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1) is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees respectively.(see figure 67) and it should not be changed unless system studies has shown the necessity. The ZD gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4 etc.
138
RED 670
ArgNegRes
ArgDir
en05000722.vsd
Figure 67:
The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 degrees. The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 4% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults. For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination. The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored. After 100 ms, the following occurs: If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
RED 670
139
If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures. If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
5.1.2.6
The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring loops: phaseto-earth as well as phase-to-phase. Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by LnE, where n represents the corresponding phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E). The phase-to-phase signals are designated by LnLm, where n and m represent the corresponding phase numbers (L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1). Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical signal for each separate measuring loop: Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above. Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 68.
The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. It is connected to the PHS function block output STCDZ. The internal input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals on the STDIR input depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It shall be configured to the STDIR output on the ZD block.
140
RED 670
Figure 68:
Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 69.
Figure 69:
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 70.
RED 670
141
STNDL1N DIRL1N STNDL2N DIRL2N STNDL3N DIRL3N STNDL1L2 DIRL1L2 STNDL2L3 DIRL2L3 STNDL3L1 DIRL3L1
AND
OR
&
15 ms t
STL2
15 ms t
STL3
&
STZMPP
BLK
OR
&
15 ms t
START
en05000778.vsd
Figure 70:
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in figure 71.
Figure 71:
142
RED 670
en05000695.vsd
Figure 72:
ZD01ZDRDIR I3P U3P
ZM function block
STDIR
en05000681.vsd
Figure 73:
ZD function block
5.1.4
Table 76:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3
RED 670
143
Table 77:
Signal I3P U3P
Table 78:
Signal STDIR
5.1.5
Setting parameters
Table 79:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase OperationDir
X1 R1
0.01 0.01
30.00 5.00
ohm/p ohm/p
X0 R0
0.01 0.01
100.00 15.00
ohm/p ohm/p
RFPP
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/l
144
RED 670
OperationPP
On
Timer tPP
On
tPP OperationPE
0.001 -
0.000 On
s -
Timer tPE
On
tPE IMinOpPP
0.001 1
0.000 20
s %IB
IMinOpPE
10 - 30
20
%IB
IMinOpIN
5 - 30
%IB
Table 80:
Parameter ArgNegRes
ArgDir
5 - 45
15
Deg
1 1 0.05
10 3000 400.00
%IB A kV
5.1.6
Technical data
RED 670
145
Table 81:
Function Number of zones
Minimum operate current Positive sequence reactance Positive sequence resistance Zero sequence reactance Zero sequence resistance Fault resistance, Ph-E Fault resistance, Ph-Ph Dynamic overreach Impedance zone timers Operate time Reset ratio Reset time
5.2
Z<phs
5.2.1
Introduction
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability limit. Due to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement of the power system is reduced e.g. difficulties to get permission to build new power lines. The ability to accurate and reliable classifying the different types of fault so that single pole tripping and auto-reclosing can be used plays an important roll in this matter. The PHS function is designed to accurate select the proper fault loop in the distance function dependent on the fault type. The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some cases be in opposite to the wanted fault resistance coverage. Therefore the function has an built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge
146
RED 670
the resistive setting of both the PHS and the measuring zones without interfering with the load. The extensive output signals from the PHS gives also important information about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis.
5.2.2
Principle of operation
The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase-selection measuring elements is the same as for the distance-measuring function (see section "Distance protection zones (PDIS, 21)"). The "phase selection" includes six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as for three-phase faults. The difference, compared to the zone measuring elements, is in the combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types of faults. The characteristic is basically non-directional, but the PHS function uses information from the directional function block to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or reverse. The directional lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line" in the figures below. The start condition STCNDZ is essentially based on the following criteria: 1. 2. 3. Residual current criteria, i.e. separation of faults with and without earth connection Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
The current start condition STCNDI is based on the following criteria: 1. 2. 3. Residual current criteria No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the load area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be determined by the minimum operating current limits. Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
The STCNDI-output described above is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the distance zones direction function block. There are still output from the function that indicate whether a start is in forward or reverse direction, or in between those (e.g. STFWL1 and STRVL1, and NDIR_A). These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional function and the impedance setting of the phase selection function. Their operate characteristics are illustrated in figure 74.
RED 670
147
60 R 60
60
R 60
Non-directional (ND)
Forward (FW)
Reverse (RV)
en05000668.vsd
Figure 74:
The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating characteristic, (for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment"). The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional coming from the directionality block. It shall be connected to the STDIR output on the ZD block. This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND on the distance measuring zones, i.e. the ZM block. The code built up for the directionality is as follows:
STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+ +STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+ +STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048
If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have start in forward direction in phase L1. If the binary code is 5 then we have start in forward direction in phase L1 and L2 etc. The STCND (Z or I) output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary coded information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct fault loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the STCND input on the ZM blocks. The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows: STCND = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32
5.2.2.1
Phase-to-earth fault
For a phase-to-earth fault, the measured impedance by PHS function will be according to equation 15.
148
RED 670
ZPHSn =
ULn ILn
(Equation 15)
The characteristic for the PHS function at phase to earth fault is according to figure 75. The characteristic has a fixed angle for the resistive boundary in the first quadrant of 60. The resistance RN and reactance XN is the impedance in the earth return path defined according to equation 16 and equation 17.
RN = R0 - R1 3
(Equation 16)
XN =
X 0 - X1 3
(Equation 17)
60 deg
1 tan(60 deg)
RFRvPE Kr(X1+XN)
RFFwPE
en06000396.vsd
Figure 75:
Characteristic of PHS for phase to earth fault (setting parameters in italic), ohm/loop domain
Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to equation 18 and equation 19. RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 149
3 I 0 0.5 IM in O p
(Equation 18)
(Equation 19)
where: IMinOp is the minimum operation current for forward zones, INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the ph-E fault loops (in %) and Iphmax is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.
5.2.2.2
Phase-to-phase fault
For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured by the PHS function will be according to equation 20.
ZPHS = ULm - ULn -2 ILn
(Equation 20)
ULm is the leading phase voltage, ULn the lagging phase voltage and ILn the phase current in the lagging phase n. The operation characteristic is shown in figure 76.
150
RED 670
0.5RFFwPP 60 deg
X1
Figure 76:
The operation characteristic for PHS at phase-to-phase fault (setting parameters in Italic), ohm/phase domain
In the same way as the condition for phase-to-earth fault, there are current conditions that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop. Those are according to equation 21 or equation 22.
3I 0 < IN Re leasePE
(Equation 21)
(Equation 22)
where:
INRelease Iphmax
is 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth measuring loops, is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.
5.2.2.3
RED 670
151
However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all directions. At the same time the apparent impedance is rotated 30 degrees, counterclockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 77.
X (ohm/phase) 4 X1 3 90 deg 0.5RFFwPPK3 X1K3 4 RFFwPP 6
en05000671.vsd
Figure 77:
The characteristic of PHS for three phase fault (setting parameters in italic)
5.2.2.4
Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting. The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 78. As illustrated, the resistive blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants.
152
RED 670
ARGLd
RLdRv
ARGLd
en05000196.vsd
Figure 78:
The influence of load encroachment function depending on the operation characteristic is dependent on the chosen operation mode of the PHS function. When selection mode is STCNDZ, the characteristic for the PHS (and also zone measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment characteristic (see figure 79, left illustration). When STCNDI is selected the operation characteristic will be as the right illustration in figure 79. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum operation current and the distance measuring zones.
RED 670
153
STCNDZ
STCNDI
en05000197.vsd
Figure 79:
Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation mode when load encroachment is activated
When the "phase selection" is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the resultant operate characteristic could look something like in figure 80. The figure shows a distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operate area is highlighted in black.
X "Phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone Distance measuring zone
en05000673.vsd
Figure 80:
154
RED 670
Figure 80 is valid for phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase faults. During a threephase fault, or load, when the "quadrilateral" phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation the operate area is transformed according to figure 81. Notice in particular what happens with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" characteristic. Due to the 30-degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 90 degrees instead of the original 60 degrees. The blinder that is nominally located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive reach around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to use the load encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load impedance.
X (ohm/phase) Phase selection Quadrilateral zone
R (ohm/phase)
en05000674.vsd
Figure 81:
Operation characteristic for PHS in forward direction for three-phase fault, ohm/phase domain
5.2.2.5
RED 670
155
Figure 82:
A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A STCNDI output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment characteristic and current criteria, refer to figure 82. This signal can be configured to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of the ph-ph and ph-E zone measuring elements and their phase related starting and tripping signals. Figure 83 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase selective signals PHS--STNDLn. Signals ZMLnN and ZMLmLn (m and n change between one and three according to the phase number) represent the fulfilled operating criteria for each separate loop measuring element (i.e. within the "quadrilateral" characteristic.
156
RED 670
Figure 83:
Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is presented schematically in figure 85 and figure 84. The directional criteria appears as a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase selectivity for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex network configurations. Signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the corresponding directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm. Designation FW (figure 85) represents the forward direction as well as the designation RV (figure 84) represents the reverse direction. All directional signals are derived within the corresponding digital signal processor. Figure 84 presents additionally a composition of a STCNDZ output signal, which is created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be configured to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of the ph-ph and ph-E zone measuring elements and their phase related starting and tripping signals.
RED 670
157
Figure 84:
158
RED 670
Figure 85:
RED 670
159
Figure 86:
5.2.4
Table 83:
Signal STFWL1 STFWL2 STFWL3 STFWPE STRVL1 STRVL2 STRVL3 STRVPE STNDL1 STNDL2
160
RED 670
5.2.5
Setting parameters
Table 84:
Parameter IBase INBlockPP
INReleasePE
10 - 100
20
%IPh
RLdFw
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
80.00
ohm/p
RLdRv
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
80.00
ohm/p
ArgLd
5 - 70
30
Deg
0.50 - 3000.00 0.50 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 1.00 - 9000.00
RED 670
161
IMinOpPE
5 - 30
%IB
5.2.6
Technical data
Table 85:
Function Minimum operate current Reactive reach, positive sequence, forward and reverse Resistive reach, positive sequence Reactive reach, zero sequence, forward and reverse Resistive reach, zero sequence Fault resistance, phase-earth faults, forward and reverse Fault resistance, phase-phase faults, forward and reverse Load encroachment criteria: Load resistance, forward and reverse Safety load impedance angle Reset ratio
5.3
Zpsb
162
RED 670
5.3.2
Principle of operation
The PSD function comprises an inner and an outer quadrilateral measurement characteristic with load encroachment, see figure 87 Its principle of operation is based on the measurement of the time it takes for a power swing transient impedance to pass through the impedance area between the outer and the inner characteristics. Power swings are identified by transition times longer than a transition time set on corresponding timers. The impedance measuring principle is the same as that used for the distance protection zones. The impedance and the characteristic passing times are measured in all three phases separately. One-out-ofthree or two-out-of-three operating modes can be selected according to the specific system operating conditions.
Figure 87:
RED 670
163
The impedance measurement within the PSD function is performed by solving equation 23 and equation 24 (n = 1, 2, 3 for each corresponding phase L1, L2 and L3).
U L1 Re IL1 Rset
(Equation 23)
U L1 Im IL1 Xset
(Equation 24)
The Rset and Xset are R and X boundaries which are more explained in the following sections.
5.3.2.1
(Equation 25)
The slope of the load encroachment inner and outer boundary is defined by setting the parameter ARGLd. The load encroachment in the fourth quadrant uses the same settings as in the first quadrant (same ARGLd and RLdOutFw and calculated RLdInFw). The quadrilateral characteristic in the first quadrant is tilted to get a better adaptation to the distance zones. The angle is the same as the line angle and derived from the setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the line resistance for the inner boundary R1LIn. The fault resistance coverage for the inner boundary is set by the parameter R1FInFw. From the setting parameter RLdOutFw and the calculated value RLdInFw a distance between the inner and outer boundary, DFw, is calculated. This value is valid for R direction in first and fourth quadrant and for X direction in first and second quadrant.
5.3.2.2
164
RED 670
cone. The distance to the inner resistive load boundary RLdInRv is determined by using the setting parameter kLdRRv in equation 26.
RLdInRv = kLdRRv RLdOutRv
(Equation 26)
From the setting parameter RLdOutRv and the calculated value RLdInRv a distance between the inner and outer boundary, DRv, is calculated. This value is valid for R direction in second and third quadrant and for X direction in third and fourth quadrant. The inner resistive characteristic in the second quadrant outside the load encroachment part corresponds to the setting parameter R1FInRv for the inner boundary. The outer boundary is internally calculated as the sum of DRv+R1FInRv. The inner resistive characteristic in the third quadrant outside the load encroachment zone consist of the sum of the settings R1FInRv and the line resistance R1LIn. The argument of the tilted lines outside the load encroachment is the same as the tilted lines in the first quadrant. The distance between the inner and outer boundary is the same as for the load encroachment in reverse direction i.e. DRv.
5.3.2.3
5.3.2.4
Signals ZOUTL1 (external boundary) and ZINL1 (internal boundary) in figure 88 are related to the operation of the impedance measuring elements in each phase separately (Ln represents the corresponding phase L1, L2, and L3). They are internal signals, calculated by the PSD-function.
RED 670
165
The tP1 timer in figure 88 serve as detection of initial power swings, which are usually not as fast as the later swings are. The tP2 timer become activated for the detection of the consecutive swings, if the measured impedance exit the operate area and returns within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timer. The upper part of figure 88 (input signal ZOUTL1, ZINL1, AND-gates and tP-timers etc.) are duplicated for phase L2 and L3. All tP1 and tP2 timers in the figure have the same settings.
Figure 88:
Figure 89:
166
RED 670
ZOUT
ZIN
TRSP I0CHECK
BLKI02
AND
10 ms t
OR tR1
AND -loop tR2 BLKI01 BLOCK -loop DET1of3 - int. REL1PH BLK1PH DET2of3 - int. REL2PH BLK2PH EXTERNAL AND t
OR
INHIBIT
AND
en05000114.vsd
Figure 90:
5.3.2.5
RED 670
time, which is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer. It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLKI01 functional input. The INHIBIT internal signal is activated after the time delay, set on tR1 timer, if an earth fault appears during the power swing (input IOCHECK is high) and the power swing has been detected before the earth fault (activation of the signal I0CHECK). It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLKI02 functional input. The INHIBIT logical signals becomes logical 1, if the functional input I0CHECK appears within the time delay, set on tEF timer and the impedance has been seen within the outer characteristic of the PSD operate characteristic in all three phases. This function prevents the operation of the PSD function in cases, when the circuit breaker closes onto persistent single-phase fault after single-pole autoreclosing dead time, if the initial single-phase fault and single-pole opening of the circuit breaker causes the power swing in the remaining two phases.
5.3.3
Function block
PSD1ZMRPSB I3P U3P BLOCK BLKI01 BLKI02 BLK1PH REL1PH BLK2PH REL2PH I0CHECK TRSP EXT ERNAL ST ART ZOUT ZIN
en05000383.vsd
Figure 91:
5.3.4
168
RED 670
Table 87:
Signal START ZOUT ZIN
5.3.5
Setting parameters
Table 88:
Parameter Operation X1InFw R1LIn
R1FInFw
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm
X1InRv R1FInRv
0.01 0.01
30.00 30.00
ohm ohm
OperationLdCh
On
RLdOutFw ArgLd
0.01 1
30.00 25
ohm Deg
RLdOutRv kLdRFw
0.01 0.01
30.00 0.75
ohm Mult
kLdRRv
0.50 - 0.90
0.01
0.75
Mult
RED 670
169
tW tH
0.001 0.001
0.250 0.500
s s
tEF
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
tR1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
tR2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
IMinOpPE IBase
5 - 30 1 - 99999
1 1
10 3000
%IB A
5.3.6
Technical data
Table 89:
Function Reactive reach
Resistive reach
(0.101000.00)W /loop
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
5.4
170
RED 670
5.4.2
Principle of operation
The switch-onto-fault (SOTF) function can be activated either externally or internally. The internal start is activated by using the information from a dead-linedetection (DLD) function, see figure 92, which is included in the SOTF function.
>1
&
en00000492.vsd
Figure 92:
After activation, a distance protection zone (the non-directional starting signal) is allowed to give an instantaneous trip. The functional output signal from the distance protection zone to be used, should be connected to the NDACC functional input of the SOTF function, see figure 92. The distance protection zone used together with the switch-onto-fault function shall be set to cover the entire protected line. The external activation is achieved by an input (BC), which should be set high for activation, and low when the breaker has closed. This is carried out by an NC auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker or by the closing order to the breaker. The internal automatic activation is controlled by the internal dead line detection (DLD) function. The function gives an internal output signal DLD when the current and voltage for each phase is below the setting parameter IPh< and UPh<, see figure 93. The SOTF function will be activated if the signal is present for more than 200 ms at the same time as the non-directional impedance starting signal NDACC is not activated. The SOTF function can be blocked by the activation of a SOTF-BLOCK functional input.
RED 670
171
Iph_L1 IPh<
1 1<2 2
AND
AND
AND
SOTF-DLD
AND
Uph_L3 UPh<
Figure 93:
5.4.3
Function block
SOTFZPSOF I3P U3P BLOCK BC NDACC TRIP
en05000377.vsd
Figure 94:
5.4.4
172
RED 670
Table 90:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BC NDACC
Table 91:
Signal TRIP
5.4.5
Setting parameters
Table 92:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase IPh<
UPh<
1 - 100
70
%UB
5.4.6
Technical data
Table 93:
Parameter Operate voltage, detection of dead line Operate current, detection of dead line Delay following dead line detection input before SOTF function is automatically enabled Time period after circuit breaker closure in which SOTF function is active
RED 670
173
174
Section 6
Current protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes current protection functions. These include functions like Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection, Four step phase overcurrent protection, Pole discordance protection and Residual overcurrent protection.
6.1
3I>>
6.1.1
Introduction
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function, with the reach limited to less than typical eighty percent of the power line at minimum source impedance.
6.1.2
Principle of operation
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the IOC function. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function (IP>>). If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRLn (n=1,2,3) for this phase and the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.
RED 670
175
There is an operation mode (OpMode) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the parameter is set to 1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the parameter is set to 2 out of 3 at least two phase signals must be activated for trip. There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current (StValMult) via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.
6.1.3
Function block
IOC1PHPIOC_50 I3P BLOCK ENMULT TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 en04000391.vsd
Figure 95:
6.1.4
Table 95:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3
6.1.5
Setting parameters
176
RED 670
Table 96:
Parameter Operation IBase OpMode
IP>>
200
%IB
StValMult
0.5 - 5.0
0.1
1.0
6.1.6
Technical data
Table 97:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Dynamic overreach
6.2
3I> 4 4 alt
RED 670
177
6.2.2
Principle of operation
The function is divided into four different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step an operation mode is set (DirModen): Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. The protection design can be decomposed in four parts: The direction element, indicates the over current fault direction The harmonic Restraint Blocking function The 4 step over current function The Mode Selection If VT inputs are not available or not connected, func parameter DirModeX shall be left to default value, Non-directional.
178
RED 670
Direction Element
faultState
START
TRIP
I3P
harmRestrBlock
en05000740.vsd
Figure 96:
A common setting for all steps, StPhaseSel, is used to specify the number of phase currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3. The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the TOC function. In a comparator, for each phase current, the RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase and step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal Start for this phase/step, the Start signal common for all three phases for this step and a common Start signal. A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the pre-processing of the phase currents and compared to a set restrain current level. The function can use a directional option. The direction of the fault current is given as current angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (80%) and a memory voltage (20%). The following combinations are used.
RED 670
179
U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2
U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3
U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1
Phase-earth short circuit:
I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
U refL1 = U L1
I dirL1 = I L1
U refL 2 = U L 2
U refL 3 = U L 3
I dirL 2 = I L 2
I dirL 3 = I L 3
The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function and an angle window AngleRCA-maxFwdAng to AngleRCA+minFwdAng.
180
RED 670
Reverse
Uref RCA
ROA
ROA
Forward
Idir
en05000745.vsd
Figure 97:
The default value of AngleRCA is 65. The parameters minFwdAng and maxFwdAng gives the angle sector from AngleRCA for directional borders. A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set: IminOpPhSel. If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or some type of inverse time characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in chapter "Time inverse characteristics". Different types of reset time can be selected as described in chapter "Time inverse characteristics". There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (InMult, n= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching state. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
RED 670
181
Figure 98:
6.2.4
182
RED 670
Table 99:
Signal TRIP TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 TR3L1 TR3L2 TR3L3 TR4L1 TR4L2 TR4L3 START ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 STL1 STL2 STL3 ST1L1
RED 670
183
6.2.5
Setting parameters
Table 100:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase MaxFwdAng MinFwdAng AngleRCA IMinOpPhSel
StartPhSel
1 out of 3
2ndHarmStab
20
%IB
184
RED 670
Characterist1
I1>
1000
%IB
Operate phase current level for step1 in % of IBase Independent (defenitive) time delay of step 1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 1 Multiplier for operate current level for step 1 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for step 1 Selection of reset curve type for step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
k1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
I1Mult t1Min
0.1 0.001
2.0 0.000
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
tReset1
0.001
0.020
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
RED 670
185
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
HarmRestrain1
Disabled Enabled Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500
Enabled
DirMode2
Non-directional
Characterist2
I2>
500
%IB
Operate phase current level for step2 in % of IBase Independent (defenitive) time delay of step 2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 2 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 2 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for step 2
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
k2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
I2Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
186
RED 670
tReset2
0.001
0.020
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
HarmRestrain2
Enabled
DirMode3
Non-directional
RED 670
187
I3>
250
%IB
Operate phase current level for step3 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay for step 3 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 3 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 3 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for step 3 Selection of reset curve type for step 3 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 3 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 3
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
k3
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
I3Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
tReset3
0.001
0.020
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
188
RED 670
tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
HarmRestrain3
Disabled Enabled Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500
Enabled
DirMode4
Non-directional
Characterist4
I4>
175
%IB
Operate phase current level for step4 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step4 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 4 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 4 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for step 4 Selection of reset curve type for step 4
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
k4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
I4Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
RED 670
189
tPCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
HarmRestrain4
Disabled Enabled
Enabled
6.2.6
Technical data
Table 101:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Min. operating current Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Maximum forward angle Minimum forward angle Second harmonic blocking Independent time delay Table continued on next page
190
RED 670
6.3
IN>>
6.3.1
Introduction
The single input overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short tripping times to allow use as a high set short circuit protection function, with the reach limited to less than typical eighty percent of the power line at minimum source impedance. The function can be configured to measure the residual current from the three phase current inputs or the current from a separate current input.
6.3.2
Principle of operation
The sampled analogue residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current the RMS value is derived. This current value is fed to the IEF function. In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the function (IN>>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRIP. There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
RED 670
191
The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be activated during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.
6.3.3
Function block
IEF1EFPIOC I3P BLOCK BLKAR MULTEN TRIP
en04000393.vsd
Figure 99:
6.3.4
Table 103:
Signal TRIP
6.3.5
Setting parameters
Table 104:
Parameter Operation IBase IN>>
StValMult
0.5 - 5.0
0.1
1.0
192
RED 670
6.4
IN 4 4 alt
6.4.1
Introduction
The four step single input overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately. All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined characteristic. The function can be set to be directional, forward, reverse or non-directional independently for each of the steps. A second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step. The function can be used as main protection for phase to earth faults.
RED 670
193
The function can be used to provide a system back-up e.g. in the case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit failure. Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication blocks into permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weakend infeed functionality are available as well. The function can be configured to measure the residual current from the three phase current inputs or the current from a separate current input.
6.4.2
Principle of operation
The function is divided into four different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step an operation modem DirModen is set: Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. The protection design can be decomposed in four parts: The direction element, indicate earth current fault direction. The directional check uses 3I0cos(-RCA) for comparison The harmonic Restraint Blocking function 4 step over current function Switch On To Fault function (SOTF), including Under Time Mode Selection Blocking at parallel transformers
194
RED 670
3U0 3I0
Direction Element
TRIP
enableDir
3I0
harmRestrBlock
start step 2, 3 and 4 Blocking at parallel transformers SwitchOnToFault CB pos or cmd TRIP
Mode Selection
en05000741.vsd
Figure 100:
The sampled analog residual current is pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency component the RMS value of the residual current is derived. This residual current value is fed to the TEF function. In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the function (IN1>, IN2>, IN3> or IN4>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal Start for this step and a common Start signal. A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the pre-processing of the phase currents and compared to a set restrain current level. The function can use a directional option. A fault is in the forward direction if the residual current component 3I0cos(-RCA) is larger than a set level. The angle is the angle between the residual current and the polarizing voltage (3U0). The angle is defined positive when the residual current lags the reference voltage. The AngleRCA is the characteristic angle of the directional function.
RED 670
195
RCA
Upol = -3U0
Operation IN>Dir
en05000285.vsd
Figure 101:
If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or some type of inverse time characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in chapter 23 "Time inverse characteristics" Different types of reset time can be selected as described in chapter 23 "Time inverse characteristics" There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (INxMult, x = 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching state. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers will be in phase opposition. The summation of the two currents will thus give a small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current will however be significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing, will be a little delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore we will have high 2nd harmonic current initially. After a short period this current will however be small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking will reset. If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd
196
RED 670
harmonic restrain signal will latched as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current level. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
6.4.2.1
RED 670
197
Figure 102:
6.4.4
198
RED 670
Table 107:
Signal TRIP TRIN1 TRIN2 TRIN3 TRIN4 TRSOTF START STIN1 STIN2 STIN3 STIN4 STSOTF STFW STRV 2NDHARMD
6.4.5
Setting parameters
Table 108:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase IMinOpFund
AngleRCA 3UO>Dir
1 1
65 5
Deg %UB
IN>DirCmp
1 - 100
%IB
tDirCmp
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000
RED 670
199
UseStartValue
IN1> IN2> IN3> IN4> Off On Open Closed CloseCommand Off SOTF UnderTime SOTF +UnderTime 0.000 - 60.000 Disabled Enabled 0.000 - 60.000 CB position CB command
IN1>
BlkParTransf ActivationSOTF
Off Open
SOTF
Off
tSOTF HarmResSOTF
0.001 -
0.100 Disabled
s -
t4U ActUnderTime
0.001 -
5.000 CB position
s -
tUnderTime DirMode1
0.000 - 60.000 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500
0.001 -
0.300 Non-directional
s -
Characterist1
IN1>
100
%IB
200
RED 670
k1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IN1Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
tReset1
0.001
0.020
HarmRestrain1
Enabled
tPCrv1
0.001
1.000
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
DirMode2
Non-directional
RED 670
201
IN2>
50
%IB
Operate residual current level for step 2 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 2 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 2 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves step 2 Reset mode when current drops off step 2 Selection of reset curve type for step 2 Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
k2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IN2Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 Disabled Enabled 0.005 - 3.000
Instantaneous
tReset2 HarmRestrain2
0.001 -
0.020 Enabled
s -
tPCrv2
0.001
1.000
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
202
RED 670
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
DirMode3
Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500
Non-directional
Characterist3
IN3>
33
%IB
Operate residual current level for step 3 in % of IBase Independent time delay of step 3 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 3 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 3 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for step 3 Selection of reset curve type for step 3
t3 k3
0.001 0.01
0.800 0.05
s -
IN3Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
RED 670
203
HarmRestrain3
Enabled
tPCrv3
0.001
1.000
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Step3ForSOTF DirMode4
204
RED 670
IN4>
17
%IB
Operate residual current level for step 4 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 4 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 4 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 4 Minimum operate time in IEC IDMT modes step 4 Selection of reset curve type for step 4 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve for step 4 Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter A for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200
k4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IN4Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
tReset4
0.001
0.020
HarmRestrain4
Enabled
tPCrv4
0.001
1.000
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
RED 670
205
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
6.4.6
Technical data
Table 109:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Operate current for directional comparison Timers Inverse characteristics, see table 436 and table 437 Second harmonic restrain operation Relay characteristic angle Minimum polarizing voltage Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time
6.5
206
RED 670
Function block name: THLxANSI number: 49 IEC 61850 logical node name: LPTTR
6.5.1
Introduction
The increasing utilizing of the power system closer to the thermal limits have generated a need of a thermal overload function also for power lines. A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the introduction of the thermal overload function can allow the protected circuit to operate closer to the thermal limits. The three phase current measuring function has an I2t characteristic with settable time constant and a thermal memory. An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the line will be tripped.
6.5.2
Principle of operation
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the THL function. From the largest of the three phase currents a final temperature is calculated according to the expression:
Q final
I = I ref
T ref
(Equation 33)
where: I Iref Tref is the largest phase current, is a given reference current and is steady state temperature corresponding to Iref
If this temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level a start output signal START is activated. The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as: RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 207
Dt Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t
(Equation 34)
where: Qn Qn-1 Qfinal Dt t is the calculated present temperature, is the calculated temperature at the previous time step, is the calculated final temperature with the actual current, is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)
The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure. When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the output signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set. There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current. This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation temperature:
(Equation 35)
The calculated time to trip can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure TTRIP. After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection function, there can be a lockout to reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting ReclTemp. The time to lockout release is calculated, i.e. a calculation of the cooling time to a set value. The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.
(Equation 36)
The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure.
208
RED 670
In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines. This is often used for cable lines where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting the parameter IMult to the number of parallel lines (cables) the actual current on one line is used in the protection algorithm. To activate this option the input ENMULT must be activated. The function has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level.
start signal
actual temperature
time to trip
en05000736.vsd
Figure 103:
RED 670
209
Figure 104:
6.5.4
Table 111:
Signal TRIP START ALARM LOCKOUT
6.5.5
Setting parameters
Table 112:
Parameter Operation HystTemp IBase IMult
IRef
0 - 400
100
%IB
210
RED 670
1 1 1 1
45 90 80 75
6.5.6
Technical data
Table 113:
Function Reference current Start temperature reference Operate time:
I 2 - I p2 t = t ln 2 I - Ib 2
I = Imeasured Alarm temperature Trip temperature
2.0% of heat content trip 2.0% of heat content trip 2.0% of heat content trip
6.6
3I>BF
RED 670
211
6.6.2
Principle of operation
The breaker failure protection function is initiated from protection trip command, either from protection functions within the protection terminal or from external protection devices. The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase selective start signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second attempt to open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time delay. For transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used. The re-trip function can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line protection. The retrip function can be done with or without current check. With the current check the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the operate current level. The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. If this start signal gets high at the same time as current is detected through the circuit breaker, the backup trip timer is started. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected by the function, both by detection of low RMS current and by a special adapted algorithm. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening, i.e. fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current detection has not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip is initiated. There is also a possibility to have a second back-up trip output activated after an added settable time after the first back-up trip. Further the following possibilities are available: The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-
212
RED 670
up trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed breaker. In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection. The current detection for the residual current can be set different from the setting of phase current detection. It is possible to have different re-trip time delays for single phase faults and for multi-phase faults. The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this option activated for small load currents only. It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if the circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.
OR TRRET
en05000832.vsd
Figure 105:
RED 670
213
Figure 106:
Internal logical signals STIL1, STIL2, STIL3 have logical value 1 when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter IP>. Internal logical signal STN has logical value 1 when neutral current has magnitude larger than setting parameter IN>.
214
RED 670
t2MPh t tp OR TRBU
1 of 4
OR
t2 t t3 t tp TRBU2
en06000223.vsd
Figure 107:
6.6.3
Function block
BFP1CCRBRF I3P BLOCK START STL1 STL2 STL3 CBCLDL1 CBCLDL2 CBCLDL3 CBFLT T RBU T RBU2 T RRET T RRET L1 T RRET L2 T RRET L3 CBALARM
en04000397.vsd
Figure 108:
6.6.4
RED 670
215
Table 115:
Signal TRBU TRBU2 TRRET TRRETL1 TRRETL2 TRRETL3 CBALARM
6.6.5
Setting parameters
Table 116:
Parameter Operation IBase FunctionMode
BuTripMode
1 out of 3
RetripMode
Retrip Off
IP> I>BlkCont
1 1
10 20
%IB %IB
IN> t1
1 0.001
10 0.000
%IB s
216
RED 670
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.030
tCBAlarm tPulse
0.001 0.001
5.000 0.200
s s
6.6.6
Technical data
Table 117:
Function Operate phase current Reset ratio, phase current Operate residual current Reset ratio, residual current Phase current level for blocking of contact function Reset ratio Timers Operate time for current detection Reset time for current detection
6.7
3I>STUB
RED 670
217
6.7.2
Principle of operation
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the STB function. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function I>. If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will, in combination with a release signal, activate the timer of this function. If the fault current remains during the set timer delay t the function gives a trip signal.
STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION
BLOCK TRIP
AND
en05000731.vsd
Figure 109:
218
RED 670
en05000678.vsd
Figure 110:
6.7.4
Table 119:
Signal TRIP START
6.7.5
Setting parameters
Table 120:
Parameter Operation IBase ReleaseMode I> t
6.7.6
RED 670
Technical data
Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 219
Table 121:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Definite time
Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time
6.8
PD
6.8.1
Introduction
Single pole operated circuit breakers can due to electrical or mechanical failures end up with the different poles in different positions (close-open). This can cause negative and zero sequence currents which gives thermal stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence current functions. Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct the positions. If the situation consists the remote end can be intertripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation. The pole discordance function operates based on information from auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional criteria from unsymmetrical phase current when required.
6.8.2
Principle of operation
The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discordance is indicated. This is shown in figure 111
220
RED 670
C.B.
Figure 111:
This single binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set delay. There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED. This is shown in figure 112
C.B.
poleOneClosed from C.B. poleTwoClosed from C.B. poleThreeClosed from C.B. + poleOneOpened from C.B. poleTwoOpened from C.B. poleThreeOpened from C.B.
en05000288.vsd
Figure 112:
In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole discordance the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay. Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current measurement. The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current
RED 670
221
values are fed to the PD function. The difference between the smallest and the largest phase current is derived. If this difference is larger than a set ratio the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay. The current based pole discordance function can be set to be active either continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open or close command. The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing function, so that the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences with a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used. The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based pole discordance function is shown in figure 113.
BLOCK BLKDBYAR OR
PolPosAuxCont POLE1OPN POLE1CL POLE2OPN POLE2CL POLE3OPN POLE3CL AND Discordance detection AND OR PD Signal from CB EXTPDIND CLOSECMD OPENCMD OR AND Unsymmetry current detection en05000747.vsd t+200 ms AND t t 150 ms TRIP
Figure 113:
Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function - contact and current based
The pole discordance function is disabled if: The terminal is in TEST mode (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockPD=Yes) The input signal BLOCK is high The input signal BLKDBYAR is high
The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.
222
RED 670
The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single phase autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal AR01-1PT1 if the autoreclosing function is integrated in the terminal; if the autoreclosing function is an external device, then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input of the terminal and this binary input is connected to a signalization 1phase autoreclosing in progress from the external autoreclosing device. If the pole discordance function is enabled, then two different criteria will generate a trip signal TRIP: Pole discordance signalling from the circuit breaker. Unsymmetrical current detection.
6.8.2.1
6.8.2.2
If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time delay t (0-60 s) if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions. The pole discordance function is informed that a trip or close command has been given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field (i.e. from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may be software connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (i.e. close command from a control function or a general trip from integrated protections).
RED 670
223
en05000321.vsd
Figure 114:
PD function block
6.8.4
Table 123:
Signal TRIP START
6.8.5
Setting parameters
224
RED 670
Table 124:
Parameter Operation IBase TimeDelayTrip
ContSel
Off PD signal from CB Pole pos aux cont. Off CB oper monitor Continuous monitor 0 - 100 -
Off
CurrSel
Off
CurrUnsymLevel
80
Unsym magn of lowest phase current compared to the highest. Current magnitude for release of the function in % of IBase
CurrRelLevel
0 - 100
10
%IB
6.8.6
Technical data
Table 125:
Function Operate current Time delay
RED 670
225
226
Section 7
Voltage protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes voltage related protection functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
7.1
3U<
7.1.1
Introduction
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions. The function can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed back-up to primary protection. The function has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
7.1.2
Principle of operation
The two-step undervoltage protection function (TUV) is used to detect low power system voltage. The function has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding start signal is issued. TUV can be set to start/trip based on "one out of three", "two out of three", or "three out of three" of the measured phase voltages, being below the set point. If the phase voltage remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to disconnection of the related high voltage equipment, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking level the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for each step and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay.
RED 670
227
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-phase. The undervoltage protection function measures the phase to earth voltages, if the voltage transformer is connected phase to earth to the analogue voltage inputs. The setting of the analogue inputs are given as primary phase to phase voltage and secondary phase to phase voltage. The function will operate if the phase to earth voltage gets lover than the set percentage of the phase to earth voltage corresponding to the set base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase to earth voltage under:
If the voltage transformer is connected phase to phase to the analogue input, the setting of the analogue inputs are given as primary phase to phase voltage and secondary phase to phase voltage divided by 3. The function will operate if the phase to phase voltage gets lover than the set percentage of the phase to phase voltage corresponding to the set base voltage UBase.
7.1.2.1
Measurement principle
All the three phase to earth voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1< and U2<. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the start outputs. Either "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" or "3 out of 3" phases have to be lower than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding start signal. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.
7.1.2.2
Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available; inverse curve A, inverse curve B, and a programmable inverse curve. The type A curve is described as:
t=
k U < -U U<
(Equation 39)
t=
+ 0.055
(Equation 40)
228
RED 670
kA +D t= p U < -U -C B U<
(Equation 41)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U< down to U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
(Equation 42)
The lowest phase voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration, see figure 115. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics".
Voltage
IDMT Voltage
Time
en05000009.vsd
Figure 115:
Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 229
during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Note that for the undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 116 and figure 117.
tReset 1 Measured Voltage TRIP
Voltage
START Hysteresis
tReset 1
U1<
Time Integrator t1
Froozen Timer
Instantaneous Reset
Time
Linear Decrease en05000010.vsd
Figure 116:
Voltage profile not causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay
230
RED 670
Voltage START
U1<
Time START t1
TRIP
Time Integrator t1
Froozen Timer
Figure 117:
Voltage profile causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay
7.1.2.3
Blocking
The undervoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
RED 670
231
blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the start outputs of step 1, are blocked. The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking can also be set to "off" resulting in no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2. In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get very low. The event will start both the under voltage function and the blocking function, as seen in figure 118. The delay of the blocking function must be set less than the time delay of under voltage function.
Disconnection
tBlkUV1 < t1,t1Min IntBlkStVal1 IntBlkStVal2 Time Block step 1 Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
Figure 118:
Blocking function.
232
RED 670
UL2
ST1L2
Phase 2 Phase 3
UL3
OR
MinVoltSelect or
TRIP
OR
Comparator UL1 < U2< Comparator UL2 < U2< Comparator UL3 < U2<
OR
MinVoltSelect or
TRIP
OR
TR2 OR START
OR
TRIP
en05000012.vsd
Figure 119:
RED 670
233
Figure 120:
7.1.4
Table 127:
Signal TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3
234
RED 670
7.1.5
Setting parameters
Table 128:
Parameter Operation UBase Characterist1
OpMode1
1 out of 3
U1<
70
%UB
t1 t1Min
0.001 0.001
5.000 5.000
s s
k1 IntBlkSel1
0.01 -
IntBlkStVal1
20
%UB
tBlkUV1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
HystAbs1
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
RED 670
235
Characterist2
Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 100
Definite time
OpMode2
1 out of 3
U2<
50
%UB
t2 t2Min
0.001 0.001
5.000 5.000
s s
k2 IntBlkSel2
0.01 -
IntBlkStVal2
20
%UB
tBlkUV2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
HystAbs2 HystAbsIntBlk2
0.1 0.1
0.5 0.5
%UB %UB
Table 129:
Parameter tReset1 ResetTypeCrv1
tIReset1 ACrv1
0.001 0.001
s -
Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Setting A for programmable under voltage IDMT curve, step 1
236
RED 670
CCrv1
0.0
0.1
0.0 - 1.0
DCrv1
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 60.000
PCrv1
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 3.000
CrvSat1
0 - 100
tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2
0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 1.000
0.001 -
0.025 Instantaneous
s -
tIReset2 ACrv2
0.001 0.001
s -
Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Setting A for programmable under voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting B for programmable under voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting C for programmable under voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting D for programmable under voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting P for programmable under voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Tuning param for prog. under voltage IDMT curve, step 2
BCrv2
1.00
0.01
0.50 - 100.00
CCrv2
0.0
0.1
0.0 - 1.0
DCrv2
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 60.000
PCrv2
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 3.000
CrvSat2
0 - 100
7.1.6
Technical data
RED 670
237
Table 130:
Function
Operate voltage, low and high step Absolute hysteresis Internal blocking level, low and high step Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, see table 438 Definite time delays Minimum operate time, inverse characteristics Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time
7.2
3U>
7.2.1
Introduction
Overvoltages will occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, open line ends on long lines. The function can be used as open line end detector, normally then combined with directional reactive over-power function or as system voltage supervision, normally then giving alarm only or switching in reactors or switch out capacitor banks to control the voltage. The function has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed. The overvoltage function has an extremely high reset ratio to allow setting close to system service voltage.
7.2.2
238
Principle of operation
Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670
The two-step overvoltage protection function (TOV) is used to detect high power system voltage. The function has two steps with separate time delays. If one, two or three phase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding start signal is issued. TOV can be set to start/trip based on "one out of three", "two out of three", or "three out of three" of the measured phase voltages, being above the set point. If the phase voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay. The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-phase. The overvoltage protection function measures the phase to earth voltages, if the voltage transformer is connected phase to earth to the analogue voltage inputs. The setting of the analogue inputs are given as primary phase to phase voltage and secondary phase to phase voltage. The function will operate if the phase to earth voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the phase to earth voltage corresponding to the set base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase to earth voltage over
If the voltage transformer is connected phase to phase to the analogue input, the setting of the analogue inputs are given as primary phase to phase voltage and secondary phase to phase voltage divided by 3. The function will operate if the phase to phase voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the phase to phase voltage corresponding to the set base voltage UBase.
7.2.2.1
Measurement principle
All the three phase voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> and U2>. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the start outputs. Either "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" or "3 out of 3" phases have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding start signal. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.
7.2.2.2
Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available; inverse curve A, inverse curve B, inverse curve C, and a programmable inverse curve. The type A curve is described as:
RED 670
239
t=
k U < -U U<
(Equation 44)
t=
- 0.035
(Equation 45)
t=
- 0.035
(Equation 46)
t=
kA U -U > -C B U>
p
+D
(Equation 47)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U< down to U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
(Equation 48)
The highest phase voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration, see figure 121. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics"
240
RED 670
Time
en05000016.vsd
Figure 121:
Trip signal issuing requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. It is also remarkable that for the overvoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 122 and figure 123.
RED 670
241
U1>
Time START t1
TRIP
Linear Decrease
Instantaneous Reset
Time en05000017.vsd
Figure 122:
Voltage profile note causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay
242
RED 670
Voltage START
tReset1 Hysteresis
Time START t1
TRIP
Time Integrator
Froozen Timer
t1
Figure 123:
Voltage profile causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay
7.2.2.3
Blocking
The overvoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals where:
RED 670
243
blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2
7.2.2.4
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the phase-to-neutral voltages in all three phases. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signals. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the highest phase voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" and "3 out of 3" criteria to fulfill the start condition. The design of the TimeOverVoltage function is schematically described in figure 124.
244
RED 670
UL1
Comparator UL1 > U1> Comparator UL2 > U1> Comparator UL3 > U1>
UL2
ST1L2
Phase 2 Phase 3
UL3
OR
MaxVoltSelect or
TRIP
OR
Comparator UL1 > U2> Comparator UL2 > U2> Comparator UL3 > U2>
OR
MaxVoltSelect or
OR OR
OR
TRIP
en05000013.vsd
Figure 124:
RED 670
245
Figure 125:
7.2.4
Table 132:
Signal TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3
246
RED 670
7.2.5
Setting parameters
Table 133:
Parameter Operation UBase Characterist1
OpMode1
1 out of 3
Operation mode, 1 out of 3 / 2 out of 3 / 3 out of 3, step 1 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 1 Operate time delay in DT mode, step 1. Time delay in DT reset (s), step 1 Minimum operate time in IDMT mode (s), step 1 IDMT mode reset type selector, step 1
U1>
120
%UB
t1 tReset1 t1Min
s s s
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
tIReset1 k1
0.001 0.01
0.025 0.05
s -
Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Time multiplier in IDMT mode, step 1
RED 670
247
BCrv1
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv1
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
DCrv1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
PCrv1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
CrvSat1
0 - 100
HystAbs1 Characterist2
0.0 - 100.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 200
0.1 -
%UB -
OpMode2
1 out of 3
Operation mode, 1 out of 3 / 2 out of 3 / 3 out of 3, step 2 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 2 Operate time delay in DT mode, step 2 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2 Minimum operate time in IDMT mode (s), step 2 IDMT mode reset type selector, step 2
U2>
180
%UB
t2 tReset2 t2Min
s s s
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
tIReset2 k2
0.001 0.01
0.025 0.05
s -
Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Time multiplier in IDMT mode, step 2
248
RED 670
BCrv2
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv2
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
DCrv2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
PCrv2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
CrvSat2
0 - 100
HystAbs2
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
7.2.6
Technical data
Table 134:
Function Operate voltage, low and high step Absolute hysteresis Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, see table 439 Definite time delays Minimum operate time, Inverse characteristics Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time
RED 670
249
7.3
3U0
7.3.1
Introduction
Residual voltages will occur in the power system during earth faults. The function can be configured to calculate the residual voltage from the three phase voltage input transformers or from a single phase voltage input transformer fed from an open delta or neutral point voltage transformer. The function has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delayed.
7.3.2
Principle of operation
The two-step residual overvoltage protection function (TRV) is used to detect high single-phase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3U0. The residual voltage can be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power transformer or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings are connected in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the three phase voltages and internally in the protection terminal calculate the corresponding residual voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage to the TRV function block. The function has two steps with separate time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-phase.
7.3.2.1
Measurement principle
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> and U2>. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.
250
RED 670
(Equation 49)
t=
- 0.035
(Equation 50)
t=
- 0.035
(Equation 51)
t=
kA U -U > -C B U>
p
+D
(Equation 52)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U> up to U> *(1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U> *(1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
(Equation 53)
The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in chapter "Inverse characteristics".
RED 670
251
Trip signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. It is also remarkable that for the overvoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 126 and figure 127.
tReset 1 Voltage START tReset1 TRIP
U1>
Hysteresis
Measured Voltage
Time START t1
TRIP
Linear Decrease
Instantaneous Reset
Time en05000019.vsd
Figure 126:
Voltage profile not causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay
252
RED 670
Voltage START
tReset1
Time START t1
TRIP
Time Integrator
Froozen Timer
t1
Figure 127:
Voltage profile causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay
7.3.2.3
Blocking
The residual overvoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals where:
RED 670
253
blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2
7.3.2.4
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic integration. The design of the TRV function is schematically described in figure 128.
UN
ST1 TR1
TRIP
ST2 TR2
OR
START
TRIP
TRIP
en05000748.vsd
Figure 128:
254
RED 670
Figure 129:
7.3.4
Table 136:
Signal TRIP TR1 TR2 START ST1 ST2
7.3.5
Setting parameters
RED 670
255
Table 137:
Parameter Operation UBase Characterist1
U1>
30
%UB
Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step 1 in % of UBase Operate time delay in DT mode, step 1. Time delay in DT reset (s), step 1 Minimum operate time in IDMT mode (s), step 1 IDMT mode reset type selector, step 1
t1 tReset1 t1Min
s s s
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10 0.005 - 200.000
Instantaneous
tIReset1 k1 ACrv1
s -
Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Time multiplier in IDMT mode, step 1 Setting A for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Setting B for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Setting C for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Setting D for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Setting P for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1
BCrv1
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv1
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
DCrv1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
PCrv1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
CrvSat1
0 - 100
HystAbs1
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
256
RED 670
U2>
45
%UB
Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step 2 in % of UBase Operate time delay in DT mode, step 2 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2 Minimum operate time in IDMT mode (s), step 2 IDMT mode reset type selector, step 2
t2 tReset2 t2Min
s s s
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10 0.005 - 200.000
Instantaneous
tIReset2 k2 ACrv2
s -
Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Time multiplier in IDMT mode, step 2 Setting A for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting B for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting C for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting D for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting P for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2
BCrv2
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv2
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
DCrv2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
PCrv2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
CrvSat2
0 - 100
HystAbs2
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
7.3.6
Technical data
RED 670
257
Table 138:
Function
Operate voltage, low and high step Absolute hysteresis Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, see table 440 Definite time setting Minimum operate time Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time
7.4
U/f >
7.4.1
Introduction
When the laminated core of a power transformer is subjected to a magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated components not designed to carry flux and cause eddy currents to flow. The eddy currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively short time.
7.4.2
Principle of operation
The importance of overexcitation protection is growing as the power transformers as well as other power system elements today operate most of the time near their designated limits. Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types. This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. Thus, if
258
RED 670
emergency that includes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged unless corrective action is promptly taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend an overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system. Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination with below-normal frequency. Such condition may occur when a unit is on load, but are more likely to arise when it is on open circuit, or at a loss of load occurrence. Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular danger to experience overexcitation condition. It follows from the fundamental transformer equation, see equation 54, that peak flux density Bmax is directly proportional to induced voltage E, and inversely proportional to frequency f, and turns n.
E = 4.44 f n B max A
(Equation 54)
Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing. If the core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically 1.9 Tesla), the flux will no longer be contained within the core only but will extend into other (non-laminated) parts of the power transformer and give rise to eddy current circulations. Overexcitation will result in: overheating of the non-laminated metal parts, a large increase in magnetizing currents, an increase in core and winding temperature, an increase in transformer vibration and noise.
Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative Volts per Hertz (V / Hz) ratio. The action of the protection is usually to initiate a reduction of excitation and, if this should fail, or is not possible, to trip the transformer after a delay which can be from seconds to minutes, typically 5 - 10 seconds. Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected generator unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are subjected to a wide range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of the turbine. In such cases, the overexcitation protection may trip the field breaker during a startup of a machine, by means of the overexcitation ALARM signal from the transformer terminal. If this is not possible, the power transformer can be disconnected from the source, after a delay, by the TRIP signal. The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers shall be capable of operating continuously at 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load, the ratio of the actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not
RED 670
259
exceed 1.1 times the ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a sustained basis, see equation 56.
E ------- 1.1 Ur fr f
(Equation 56)
(Equation 57)
where:
V/Hz>
V/Hz> is an OEX setting parameter. The setting range is 1.0 pu to 1.5 pu. If the user does not know exactly what to set, then the standard IEC 60076 - 1, section 4.4, the default value V/Hz> = 1.10 pu shall be used. In OEX protection function the relative excitation M (relative V/Hz) is expressed according to equation 58.
Ef V- -----M = relative Hz = ------------Ur fr
(Equation 58)
It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1 for any E and f, where the ratio E / f is equal to Ur / fr. A power transformer is not overexcited as long as the relative excitation is M V/Hz>, V/Hz> expressed in pu. The relative overexcitation is thus defined as shown in equation 59.
overexcitation = M V/Hz>
(Equation 59)
The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage U which is in general not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation. For no load condition, these two voltages are the same, but for a loaded power transformer the internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the voltage U which is measured and fed to OEX, depending on the direction of the power flow through the power transformer, the power transformer side where OEX is applied, and the power transformer leakage reactance of the winding. It is important to specify on the OEX function block in CAP 531 configuration tool worksheet on which side of the power transformer OEX is placed As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full load, 0.8 power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the transformer core, will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage, no load, rated frequency, provided that the short circuit impedance X can be equally divided
260
RED 670
between the primary and the secondary winding: Xleak = Xleak1 = Xleak2 = Xsc / 2 = 0.075 pu.. OEX calculates the internal induced voltage E if Xleak (meaning the leakage reactance of the winding where OEX is connected) is known to the user. The assumption taken for 2-winding power transformers that Xleak = Xsc / 2 is unfortunately most often not true. For a 2-winding power transformer the leakage reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on the core with respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers the situation is still more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage reactance, then it should applied. If a user has no idea about it, Xleak can be set to Xc/2. The OEX protection will then take the given measured terminal voltage U, as the induced voltage E. It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events such as loss of load, etc. It will be observed that a high phase-to-earth voltage does not mean overexcitation. For example, in an unearthed power system, a single-phase-toearth fault means high voltages of the healthy two phases to earth, but no overexcitation on any winding. The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially unchanged. The important voltage is the voltage between the two ends of each winding.
7.4.2.1
Measured voltage
If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where OEX protection is applied, then OEX protection function block shall be set to measure this voltage, MeasuredU. The particular voltage which is used determines the two currents that must be used. If, for example, voltage Uab is fed to OEX, then currents Ia, and Ib must be applied, etc. From these two input currents, current Iab = Ia - Ib is calculated internally by the OEX protection algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage must be higher than 70% of the rated value, otherwise the OEX protection algorithm is exited without calculating the excitation. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation V / Hz shows 0.000. If three phase-to-earth voltages are available from the side where OEX is connected, then OEX protection function block shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage. In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current are used by OEX protection. A check is made within OEX protection if the positive sequence voltage is higher than 70% rated phase-to-earth voltage; below this value, OEX is exited immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation V / Hz shows 0.000. The frequency value is received from the pre-processing block. The function is in operation for frequencies within the range of 33-60 Hz and of 42-75 Hz for 50 and 60 Hz respectively.
RED 670
261
OEX protection function can be connected to any power transformer side, independent from the power flow. The side with a possible On-Load-Tap-Changer (OLTC) must not be used.
7.4.2.2
The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on analysis of the various transformers overexcitation capability characteristics. They can match well a transformer core capability. The square law is according to equation 60.
0.18 k 0.18 k - = -------------------------------------t o p = -------------------------------------------2 2 overexcitation ( M V/Hz> )
(Equation 60)
where: M is excitation, mean value in the interval from t = 0 to t = top is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and is time multiplier setting for inverse time functions, see figure 131. Parameter k (time multiplier setting) selects one delay curve from the family of curves.
V/Hz>
k
An analog overexcitation relay would have to evaluate the following integral expression, which means to look for the instant of time t = top according to equation 61.
t op
( M(t) V/Hz> )
0
dt 0.18 k
(Equation 61)
A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (i.e. j = n) where it becomes true that:
n
Dt
( M(j)
j=k
V/Hz> ) 0.18 k
(Equation 62)
where: Dt is the time interval between two successive executions of overexcitation function and
262
RED 670
M(j) - V/Hz> is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is given as Ur/fr.
As long as M > V/Hz> (i.e. overexcitation condition), the above sum can only be larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will be tripped at j = n. Inverse delays as per figure 131, can be modified (limited) by two special definite delay settings, namely tMax and tMin, see figure 130.
delay in s tMax
under excitation
overexcitation tMin 0 M=V/Hz> V/Hz> Mmax - V/Hz> Overexcitation M-V/Hz> Mmax Emax Excitation M E (only if f = fr = const) 99001067.vsd
Figure 130:
A definite maximum time, tMax, can be used to limit the operate time at low degrees of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than tMax will not be allowed. In case the inverse delay is longer than tMax, OEX trips after tMax seconds. A definite minimum time, tMin, can be used to limit the operate time at high degrees of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than tMin, OEX function trips after tMin seconds. Also, the inverse delay law is no more valid beyond excitation Mmax. Beyond Mmax (beyond overexcitation Mmax - V/Hz>), the delay will always be tMin, no matter what overexcitation.
RED 670
263
Time (s)
1000
100 k = 60
k = 20
10
k=1 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40
OVEREXCITATION IN %
(M-Emaxcont)*100)
en01000373.vsd
Figure 131:
The critical value of excitation Mmax is determined indirectly via OEX protection function setting V/Hz>>. V/Hz>> can be thought of as a no-load-rated-frequency voltage, where the inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, tMin. If, for example, V/Hz>> = 1.40 pu, then Mmax is according to equation 63.
(V/Hz>>) f - = 1.40 Mmax = ------------------------Ur fr
(Equation 63)
The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In this case the interval between M = V/Hz>, and M = Mmax is automatically divided into five equal subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5, and t6) as shown in the figure 132. These times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5 => t6.
264
RED 670
delay in s
tMax
underexcitation 0 Emaxcont
Figure 132:
Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by linear interpolation. Should it happen that tMax be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2, the actual delay would be tMax. Above Mmax, the delay can only be tMin.
7.4.2.3
Cooling
The overexcitation protection OEX is basically a thermal protection; therefore a cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is applied. Parameter Tcool is an OEX setting, with a default time constant tCooling of 20 minutes. This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their previous normal values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is assumed to be reached not before approximately 5 times tCooling minutes. If an overexcitation condition would return before that, the time to trip will be shorter than it would be otherwise.
7.4.2.4
(Equation 64)
If less than V / Hz = V/Hz> (in pu) is shown on the HMI display (or read via SM/ RET521), the power transformer is underexcited. If the value of V/Hz is shown which RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 265
is equal to V/Hz> (in pu), it means that the excitation is exactly equal to the power transformer continuous capability. If a value higher than the value of V/Hz> is shown, the protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if V/Hz = 1.100 is shown, while V/Hz> = 1.1 pu, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum continuous excitation limit. The third item of the OEX protection service report is the thermal status of the protected power transformer iron core, designated on the display by ThermalStatus. This gives the thermal status in % of the trip value which corresponds to 100%. Thermal Status should reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. If the protected power transformer is then for some reason not switched off, the ThermalStaus shall go over 100%. If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by tMax, and/or TMin, then the Thermal Status will generally not reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the very long delay is limited by tMax, then the OEX TRIP output signal will be set to 1 before the Thermal status reaches 100%.
7.4.2.5
Overexcitation alarm
A separate step, AlarmLevel, is provided for alarming purpose. The voltages are normally set 2% lower and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the operator an early abnormal voltages warning.
7.4.2.6
Logic diagram
Figure 133:
Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and frequency are separately checked against their respective limit values. 266 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670
Figure 134:
7.4.4
Table 140:
Signal ERROR TRIP START ALARM
7.4.5
Setting parameters
Table 141:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase MeasuredU
RED 670
267
V/Hz>>
100.0 - 200.0
0.1
140.0
%UB/f
ohm s s
tMax
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
1800.00
tCooling
0.10 - 9000.00
0.01
1200.00
CurveType
IEEE
kForIEEE
t1Tailor
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
7200.00
0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00
s s s s s
AlarmLevel tAlarm
0.1 0.01
100.0 5.00
% s
7.4.6
Technical data
268
RED 670
Table 142:
Function
Operate value, start Operate value, alarm Operate value, high level Curve type
IEEE : t =
(0.18 k ) ( M - 1) 2
where M = relative (V/Hz) = (E/f)/ (Ur/fr) Minimum time delay for inverse function Maximum time delay for inverse function Alarm time delay (0.00060.000) s (0.009000.00) s (0.00060.000) s 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms
RED 670
269
270
Section 8
Frequency protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes the frequency protection functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
8.1
f<
8.1.1
Introduction
Underfrequency occurs as a result of lack of generation in the network. The function can be used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine start-up etc. The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement. Up to two independent under frequency steps are available.
8.1.2
Principle of operation
The underfrequency (TUF) function is used to detect low power system frequency. The function can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied the time delay will be longer if the voltage is higher and shorter if the voltage is lower. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued.
RED 670
271
8.1.2.1
Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases the setting IntBlkStVal, the underfrequency function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included, see section "Inverse characteristics".
8.1.2.2
Time delay
The time delay for the underfrequency function can be either a settable definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time delay depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay and a low voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the setting tTrip sets the time delay, see figure 135and figure 136. For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings UNom, UMin, Exponent, tMax and tMin set the time delay according to figure 137 and equation 66. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of time delay to apply. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the start output, in percent of the total operation time available in PST. Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. On the output of the underfrequency function a 100 ms pulse is issued, after a time delay corresponding to the setting of TimeDlyRestore, when the measured frequency returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.
272
RED 670
TRIP
StartFrequency
Time
en05000721.vsd
Figure 135:
RED 670
273
Frequency START
StartFrequency
Time
en05000723.vsd
Figure 136:
8.1.2.3
(Equation 66)
274
RED 670
TimeDlyOperate [s]
Exponenent 3
0.5
1 2
90
95
100
U [% of UBase]
en05000075.vsd
Figure 137:
Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for the underfrequency function. The time delay to operate is plotted as a function of the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 respectively.
8.1.2.4
Blocking
The underfrequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: BLKTRIP: BLKREST: blocks all outputs blocks the TRIP output blocks the RESTORE output
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal, both the start and the trip outputs, are blocked.
RED 670
275
Voltage
Time integrator TimerOperation Mode Selector TimeDlyOperate TimeDlyReset START TRIP Start & Trip Output Logic START
Frequency
TRIP
en05000726.vsd
Figure 138:
8.1.3
Function block
TUF1SAPTUF U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN en05000326.vsd
Figure 139:
276
RED 670
Table 144:
Signal TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN
8.1.5
Setting parameters
Table 145:
Parameter Operation UBase
35.00 - 75.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 45.00 - 65.00 Definite timer Volt based timer 50 - 150
Hz s s Hz %UB
UMin
50 - 150
90
%UB
RED 670
277
tMax
0.010 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
tMin
0.010 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Table 146:
Parameter IntBlkStVal tReset
8.2
f>
8.2.1
Introduction
Overfrequency will occur at sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network. In some cases close to generating part governor problems can also cause overfrequency. The function can be used for generation shedding, remedial action schemes etc. It can also be used as a sub-nominal frequency stage initiating load restoring. The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement. Up to six independent frequency steps are available.
8.2.2
Principle of operation
The Overfrequency (TOF) function is used to detect high power system frequency. The function has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the
278
RED 670
set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued.
8.2.2.1
Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlkStVal, the overfrequency function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included, see section "Inverse characteristics".
8.2.2.2
Time delay
The time delay for the overfrequency function is a settable definite time delay, specified by the setting tTrip, see figure 140 and figure 141. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the start output, in percent of the total operation time available in PST. Trip signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
RED 670
279
Hysteresis
Measured Frequency
Time START
tTrip
TRIP
Time
en05000732.vsd
Figure 140:
280
RED 670
tReset
Measured Frequency
Time
en05000733.vsd
Figure 141:
8.2.2.3
Blocking
The overfrequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
TOF-BLOCK: TOF-BLKTRIP: blocks all outputs blocks the TOF-TRIP output
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal, both the start and the trip outputs, are blocked.
8.2.2.4
Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the
RED 670
281
power system. The time integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design of the overfrequency function is schematically described in figure 142.
Voltage
START
Frequency
en05000735.vsd
Figure 142:
8.2.3
Function block
T OF1SAPTOF U3P BLOCK BLKT RIP T RIP ST ART BLKDMAGN en05000325.vsd
Figure 143:
8.2.4
282
RED 670
Table 148:
Signal TRIP START BLKDMAGN
8.2.5
Setting parameters
Table 149:
Parameter Operation UBase
Hz %UB s s
8.3
8.3.1
Introduction
Rate of change of frequency function gives an early indication of a main disturbance in the system. The function can be used for generation shedding, load shedding, remedial action schemes etc.
RED 670
283
The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement. Each step can discriminate between positive or negative change of frequency. Up to six independent rate-of-change frequency steps are available.
8.3.2
Principle of operation
The rate-of-change of frequency (RCF) function is used to detect fast power system frequency changes, increase as well as decrease, at an early stage. The function has a settable definite time delay. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains below the set value, for negative rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the trip signal is issued. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains above the set value, for positive rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage, the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued. If the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.
8.3.2.1
Measurement principle
The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFreqGrad. The rate-of-change of frequency function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, the rate-of-change of frequency function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting StartFreqGrad, controls if the rate-of-change of frequency function reacts on a positive or on a negative change in frequency. If the rate-of-change of frequency function is used for decreasing frequency, i.e. the setting StartFreqGrad has been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, then a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency recovers to a value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of StartFreqGrad, sets the rate-of-change of frequency function to start and trip for frequency increases. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included, see section "Inverse characteristics".
8.3.2.2
Time delay
The rate-of-change of frequency function has a settable definite time delay, tTrip. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the start output, in percent of the total operation time. Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a
284
RED 670
user defined reset time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back into the hysteresis area, see figure 144-147. The RESTORE output of the rate-of-change of frequency function is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the restore period, defined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.
RED 670
285
Rate-of-Change of Frequency Time tReset tReset START Hysteresis Measured Rate-ofChange of Frequency TRIP
StartFreqGrad
START TRIP
tTrip
en05000727.vsd
Time
Figure 144:
Rate-of-change of frequency profile, set for frequency decrease conditions, not causing a reset of the start signal
286
RED 670
START TRIP
tTrip
Time
en05000728.vsd
Figure 145:
Frequency profile, set for frequency decrease conditions, causing a reset of the start signal
RED 670
287
Hysteresis
Time START
tTrip
TRIP
en05000729.vsd
Time
Figure 146:
Rate-of-change of frequency profile, set for frequency increase conditions, not causing a reset of the start signal
288
RED 670
tReset
Time
en05000730.vsd
Figure 147:
Frequency profile, set for frequency increase conditions, causing a reset of the start signal
8.3.2.3
Blocking
The rate-of-change of frequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: BLKTRIP: BLKREST: blocks all outputs blocks the TRIP output blocks the RESTORE output
RED 670
289
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the start and the trip outputs, are blocked.
8.3.2.4
Design
The rate-of-change of frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting StartFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power system switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued. The sign of the setting StartFreqGrad is essential, and controls if the function is used for raising or lowering frequency conditions. The design of the rate-of-change of frequency function is schematically described in figure 148.
BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKRESET OR Comparator U < IntBlockLevel Start & Trip Output Logic BLOCK BLKDMAGN
Voltage
Rate-of-Change of Frequency
Comparator If [StartFreqGrad<0 START AND df/dt < StartFreqGrad] OR [StartFreqGrad>0 AND df/dt > StartFreqGrad] Then START
START
TRIP
en05000835.vsd
Figure 148:
290
RED 670
Figure 149:
8.3.4
Table 151:
Signal TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN
8.3.5
Setting parameters
Table 152:
Parameter Operation UBase
StartFreqGrad
-10.00 - 10.00
0.01
0.50
Hz/s
IntBlockLevel
0 - 100
50
%UB
RED 670
291
RestoreFreq
45.00 - 65.00
0.01
49.90
Hz
tRestore tReset
0.001 0.001
0.000 0.000
s s
8.3.6
Technical data
Table 153:
Function Operate value, start function Operate value, internal blocking level Operate time, start function
292
RED 670
Section 9
Multipurpose protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes Multipurpose protection and includes the General current and voltage function. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
9.1
I<
I>
U<
U>
9.1.1
Introduction
The function can be utilized as a negative sequence current protection detecting unsymmetrical conditions such as open phase or unsymmetrical faults. The function can also be used to improve phase selection for high resistive earth faults, outside the distance protection reach, for the transmission line. Three functions are used which measures the neutral current and each of the three phase voltages. This will give an independence from load currents and this phase selection will be used in conjunction with the detection of the earth fault from the directional earth fault protection function.
RED 670
293
Principle of operation
Measured quantities within the function
The function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool. The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 154.
Table 154: Current selection for the GF function
Set value for the parameter CurrentInput Comment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Phase1 Phase2 Phase3 PosSeq NegSeq 3ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh GF function will measure the phase L1 current phasor GF function will measure the phase L2 current phasor GF function will measure the phase L3 current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3 GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and phase L2 current phasor (i.e. IL1-IL2) GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L2 current phasor and phase L3 current phasor (i.e. IL2-IL3) GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L3 current phasor and phase L1 current phasor (i.e. IL3-IL1) GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum magnitude GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time
10
Phase1-Phase2
11
Phase2-Phase3
12
Phase3-Phase1
13 14 15
The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 155: 294 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670
Table 155:
VoltageInput
1 2 3 4 5 Phase1 Phase2 Phase3 PosSeq -NegSeq
-3ZeroSeq
7 8 9
10
Phase1-Phase2
11
Phase2-Phase3
12
Phase3-Phase1
13 14 15
It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 155 is always applicable regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2 & UL3 or three phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1). This information about actual VT connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will then take automatic care about it.
RED 670
295
The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 156 for built-in current restraint feature:
Table 156: Restraint current selection for the GF function
Comment GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3 GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
Set value for the parameter RestrCurr 1 2 3 4 PosSeq NegSeq 3ZeroSeq MaxPh
9.1.2.2
Base voltage shall be entered as: 1. 2. rated phase-to-ground voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 155. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 155.
9.1.2.3
296
RED 670
The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component in the measured current quantity (see table 154). However it shall be noted that this feature is not applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected: PosSeq (i.e. positive sequence current) NegSeq (i.e. negative sequence current) UnbalancePh (i.e. unbalance phase current) UnbalancePh-Ph (i.e. unbalance ph-ph current)
This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first harmonic ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level. The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent on the relevant phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 154) and measured voltage phasor (see table 155). In protection terminology it means that the PGPF function can be made directional by enabling this built-in feature. In that case overcurrent protection step will only operate if the current flow is in accordance with the set direction (i.e. Forward, which means towards the protected object, or Reverse, which means from the protected object). For this feature it is of the outmost importance to understand that the measured voltage phasor (see table 155) and measured current phasor (see table 154) will be used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper directional decision. The PGPF function will NOT do this automatically. It will just simply use the current and voltage phasors selected by the end user to check for the directional criteria. Table 157 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones) for these two quantities for traditional directional relays.
Table 157: Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature
Comment Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90 depending on the power Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90 depending on the power system voltage level (i.e. X/R ratio) Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0 to -90 depending on the power system earthing (i.e. solidly earthed, earthed via resistor, etc.) Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45 Directional overcurrent function for the second phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45 Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Directional feature
Set value for the Set value for the parameter CurrentInput parameter
VoltageInput
PosSeq
PosSeq
NegSeq
-NegSeq
3ZeroSeq
-3ZeroSeq
RED 670
297
Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional feature is enabled. Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & U and IcosPhi&U. The first principle, referred to as "I & U" in the parameter setting tool, checks that: the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 150).
U=-3U0
Figure 150:
where:
The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&U" in the parameter setting tool, checks that:
298
RED 670
that the product Icos() is bigger than the set pick-up level, where is angle between the current phasor and the mta line that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the Icos() straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 150).
U=-3U0
en05000253.vsd
Figure 151:
where: RCADir is -75 ROADir is 50
Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the preset value. User can select one of the following three options: Non-directional (i.e. operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage) Block (i.e. operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage) Memory (i.e. memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)
It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms. After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage goes above set voltage memory limit. The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a measured voltage quantity (see table 155). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. Two different types of dependencies are available:
RED 670
299
StartCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1
ULowLimit_OC1
Figure 152:
Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation
Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Step has value = step)
OC1 Stage Pickup Level
StartCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1
UHighLimit_OC1
Figure 153:
Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation
This feature will simple change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will 300 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670
as well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves (i.e. overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage conditions). The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a restraining current quantity (see table 156). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the restraining current.
IMeasured
te ra
ea ar
pe O
IsetHigh
eff Co r t es I>R
tr es *I r
ain
IsetLow
atan(RestrCoeff) Restraint
en05000255.vsd
Figure 154:
This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude. When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.
9.1.2.4
RED 670
301
time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the setting.
9.1.2.5
9.1.2.6
9.1.2.7
Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for the PGPF function are shown in the following figures.
302
RED 670
REx670
ADM PGPF function
Current and voltage selection settings
Selection of which current and voltage shall be given to the built-in protection elements
en05000169.vsd
Figure 155:
Figure 155 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for multipurpose protection function The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and kilovolts. 1. 2. 3. Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage input. Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one threephase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules. Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
The multipurpose protection function: 1. 2. 3. Selects one current from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally measured current. Selects one voltage from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally measured voltage. Selects one current from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally measured restraint current.
RED 670
303
CURRENT
UC1 2
Selected current
nd
Harmonic restraint
TRUC1
UC2 2nd Harmonic restraint OC1 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control / restraint 1
STUC2 TRUC2
OC2 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control / restraint 1
STOC2 TROC2
UDIRLOW DIROC2
STOV1
OV1
TROV1 STOV2
OV2
Selected voltage
TROV2 STUV1
UV1
TRUV1 STUV2
UV2
TRUV2
VOLTAGE
en05000170.vsd
Figure 156:
304
RED 670
Logic in figure 156 can be summarized as follows: 1. 2. 3. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each protection element and step makes independent decision about status of its START and TRIP output signals. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following four figures Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps (internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.
DEF
OR
BLKTROC 1
AND
TROC1
Selected current
a b
a>b
OC1=On BLKOC1
StartCurr_OC1
AND
STOC1
Inverse Voltage control or restraint feature Directionality check DIR_OK Inverse time selected
Selected voltage
en05000831.vsd
Figure 157:
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step i.e. OC1 (step OC2 has the same internal logic)
RED 670
305
Selected current
a b
b>a
DEF
AND
TRUC1
StartCurr_UC1
AND
STUC1
en05000750.vsd
Figure 158:
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step i.e. UC1 (step UC2 has the same internal logic)
DEF
BLKTROV1
AND
TROV1
OR
a>b
StartVolt_OV1
AND
Inverse
STOV1
en05000751.vsd
Figure 159:
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step i.e.OV1 (step OV2 has the same internal logic)
306
RED 670
DEF OR
BLKTRUV 1
AND
TRUV1
b>a
StartVolt_UV1
AND Inverse
STUV1
en05000752.vsd
Figure 160:
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step i.e.UV1 (step UV2 has the same internal logic)
9.1.3
Function block
GF01CVGAPC I3P U3P BLOCK BLKOC1 BLKOC1TR ENMLTOC1 BLKOC2 BLKOC2TR ENMLTOC2 BLKUC1 BLKUC1TR BLKUC2 BLKUC2TR BLKOV1 BLKOV1TR BLKOV2 BLKOV2TR BLKUV1 BLKUV1TR BLKUV2 BLKUV2TR TRIP TROC1 TROC2 TRUC1 TRUC2 TROV1 TROV2 TRUV1 TRUV2 START STOC1 STOC2 STUC1 STUC2 STOV1 STOV2 STUV1 STUV2 BLK2ND DIROC1 DIROC2 UDIRLOW CURRENT ICOSFI VOLTAGE UIANGLE en05000372.vsd
Figure 161:
GF function block
9.1.4
RED 670
307
Table 158:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLKOC1 BLKOC1TR ENMLTOC1 BLKOC2 BLKOC2TR ENMLTOC2 BLKUC1 BLKUC1TR BLKUC2 BLKUC2TR BLKOV1 BLKOV1TR BLKOV2 BLKOV2TR BLKUV1 BLKUV1TR BLKUV2 BLKUV2TR
Table 159:
Signal TRIP TROC1 TROC2 TRUC1 TRUC2 TROV1 TROV2 TRUV1 TRUV2 START STOC1 STOC2 STUC1
308
RED 670
9.1.5
Setting parameters
Table 160:
Parameter Operation CurrentInput
IBase
3000
Base Current
RED 670
309
UBase OperHarmRestr
0.05 -
400.00 Off
kV -
Base Voltage Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain Off / On Ratio of second to fundamental current harmonic in % Harm analyse disabled above this current level in % of Ibase Enable current restrain function On / Off Select current signal which will be used for curr restrain Restraining current coefficient Relay Characteristic Angle Relay Operate Angle Below this level in % of Ubase setting ActLowVolt takes over Operation OC1 Off / On Operate current level for OC1 in % of Ibase
l_2nd/l_fund
1.0
20.0
BlkLevel2nd
10 - 5000
5000
%IB
EnRestrainCurr
Off On PosSeq NegSeq 3*ZeroSeq Max 0.00 -180 - 180 1 - 90 0.0 - 5.0
Off
RestrCurrInput
PosSeq
0.01 1 1 0.1
Operation_OC1 StartCurr_OC1
1.0
Off 120.0
%IB
310
RED 670
tDef_OC1
0.01
0.50
Independent (definitive) time delay of OC1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC1 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC1 Control mode for voltage controlled OC1 function Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step, slope) Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC1 is U dependent Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of Ubase Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of Ubase Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse) Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for OC1 Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1 (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
k_OC1
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
tMin_OC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
VCntrlMode_OC1
Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Off Step Slope 1.00
Off
VDepMode_OC1
Step
VDepFact_OC1
0.01
0.02 - 5.00
ULowLimit_OC1
1.0 - 200.0
0.1
50.0
%UB
UHighLimit_OC1
1.0 - 200.0
0.1
100.0
%UB
HarmRestr_OC1
Off
DirMode_OC1
Non-directional
DirPrinc_OC1
I&U
ActLowVolt1_VM
Non-directional
RED 670
311
tDef_OC2
0.01
0.50
Independent (definitive) time delay of OC2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC2 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC2 Control mode for voltage controlled OC2 function Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step, slope) Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC2 is U dependent Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of Ubase Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of Ubase Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse) Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for OC2
k_OC2
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
tMin_OC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
VCntrlMode_OC2
Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Off Step Slope 1.00
Off
VDepMode_OC2
Step
VDepFact_OC2
0.01
0.02 - 5.00
ULowLimit_OC2
1.0 - 200.0
0.1
50.0
%UB
UHighLimit_OC2
1.0 - 200.0
0.1
100.0
%UB
HarmRestr_OC2
Off
DirMode_OC2
Non-directional
DirPrinc_OC2
I&U
312
RED 670
Operation_UC1 EnBlkLowI_UC1
Off Off
BlkLowCurr_UC1
20
%IB
StartCurr_UC1
2.0 - 150.0
1.0
70.0
%IB
tDef_UC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
tResetDef_UC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
HarmRestr_UC1
Off
Operation_UC2 EnBlkLowI_UC2
Off Off
BlkLowCurr_UC2
20
%IB
StartCurr_UC2
2.0 - 150.0
1.0
70.0
%IB
tDef_UC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
HarmRestr_UC2
Off On Off On 2.0 - 200.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00
Off
0.1 -
%UB -
tDef_OV1
0.01
1.00
RED 670
313
k_OV1
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
Off On 2.0 - 200.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00
0.1 -
%UB -
tDef_OV2
0.01
1.00
Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for OV2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OV2 Operation UV1 Off / On Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for UV1 Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for UV1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV1 Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV1 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV1 in % of Ubase Operation UV2 Off / On Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in % of Ubase
tMin_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
k_OV2
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
Operation_UV1 StartVolt_UV1
0.1
Off 50.0
%UB
CurveType_UV1
Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00
Definite time
tDef_UV1
0.01
1.00
tMin_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
k_UV1
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
EnBlkLowV_UV1
On
BlkLowVolt_UV1
0.1
0.5
%UB
Operation_UV2 StartVolt_UV2
0.1
Off 50.0
%UB
314
RED 670
tDef_UV2
0.01
1.00
tMin_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
k_UV2
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
EnBlkLowV_UV2
On
BlkLowVolt_UV2
0.1
0.5
%UB
Table 161:
Parameter CurrMult_OC1
ResCrvType_OC1
Instantaneous
tResetDef_OC1
0.01
0.00
P_OC1
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
A_OC1
0.140
0.001
0.000 - 999.000
B_OC1
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 99.000
C_OC1
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
PR_OC1
0.500
0.001
0.005 - 3.000
RED 670
315
CR_OC1
1.0
0.1
0.1 - 10.0
CurrMult_OC2
2.0
0.1
1.0 - 10.0
ResCrvType_OC2
Instantaneous
tResetDef_OC2
0.01
0.00
P_OC2
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
A_OC2
0.140
0.001
0.000 - 999.000
B_OC2
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 99.000
C_OC2
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
PR_OC2
0.500
0.001
0.005 - 3.000
TR_OC2
13.500
0.001
0.005 - 600.000
CR_OC2
1.0
0.1
0.1 - 10.0
tResetDef_UC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
ResCrvType_OV1
Instantaneous
tResetDef_OV1
0.01
0.00
316
RED 670
A_OV1
0.140
0.001
0.005 - 999.000
B_OV1
1.000
0.001
0.500 - 99.000
C_OV1
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
D_OV1
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 10.000
P_OV1
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
ResCrvType_OV2
Instantaneous
tResetDef_OV2
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for OV2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV2
tResetIDMT_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
A_OV2
0.140
0.001
0.005 - 999.000
B_OV2
1.000
0.001
0.500 - 99.000
C_OV2
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
D_OV2
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 10.000
P_OV2
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
RED 670
317
tResetDef_UV1
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for UV1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV1 Selection of reset curve type for UV2
tResetIDMT_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
A_UV1
0.140
0.001
0.005 - 999.000
B_UV1
1.000
0.001
0.500 - 99.000
C_UV1
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
D_UV1
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 10.000
P_UV1
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
ResCrvType_UV2
Instantaneous
tResetDef_UV2
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV2 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for UV2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV2
tResetIDMT_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
A_UV2
0.140
0.001
0.005 - 999.000
B_UV2
1.000
0.001
0.500 - 99.000
318
RED 670
D_UV2
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 10.000
P_UV2
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
9.1.6
Technical data
Table 162:
Function Measuring current input
Base voltage Start overcurrent, step 1 and 2 Start undercurrent, step 1 and 2 Definite time delay Operate time start overcurrent Reset time start overcurrent Operate time start undercurrent Reset time start undercurrent Table continued on next page
1.0% of Ir for I<Ir 1.0% of I for I>Ir 1.0% of Ir for I<Ir 1.0% of I for I>Ir 0.5% 10 ms -
RED 670
319
Voltage level where voltage memory takes over Start overvoltage, step 1 and 2 Start undervoltage, step 1 and 2 Operate time, start overvoltage Reset time, start overvoltage Operate time start undervoltage Reset time start undervoltage High and low voltage limit, voltage dependent operation Directional function Relay characteristic angle Relay operate angle Reset ratio, overcurrent Reset ratio, undercurrent Reset ratio, overvoltage Reset ratio, undervoltage Overcurrent: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Undercurrent: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Overvoltage: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Undervoltage: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time
1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur for U<Ur 1.0% of U for U>Ur 1.0% of Ur for U<Ur 1.0% of U for U>Ur 1.0% of Ur for U<Ur 1.0% of U for U>Ur 2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees -
320
RED 670
10.1
10.1.1
Introduction
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of many protection functions such as differential, earth fault current and negative sequence current functions. It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurring open CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high voltages will stress the secondary circuit. The current circuit supervision function compares the residual current from a three phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer. A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to block protection functions expected to give unwanted tripping.
10.1.2
Principle of operation
The supervision function compares the absolute value of the vectorial sum of the three phase currents |Iphase| and the numerical value of the residual current |Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 162. The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:
RED 670
321
The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of the numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|. The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than the set operate value IMinOp. No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms. The current circuit supervision is enabled by setting Operation = On.
The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms a ALARM will be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the ANDgate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current supervision element(s) operate, e.g. during a fault.
Figure 162:
| I phase | - | I ref |
Slope = 1
Operation area
| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
Figure 163:
Operate characteristics
322
RED 670
Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S I phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.
10.1.3
Function block
CCS1CCSRDIF I3P IREF BLOCK FAIL ALARM
en05000389.vsd
Figure 164:
10.1.4
Table 164:
Signal FAIL ALARM
10.1.5
Setting parameters
Table 165:
Parameter Operation IBase
Ip>Block
5 - 500
150
%IB
IMinOp
5 - 200
20
%IB
RED 670
323
10.2
10.2.1
Introduction
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (FSD) is to block voltage measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and the IED in order to avoid unwanted operations that otherwise might occur. The fuse failure supervision function basically has two different algorithms, negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithm and an additional delta voltage and delta current algorithm. The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated or high-impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3U2 without the presence of the negative-sequence current 3I2. The zero sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low impedance earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3U0 without the presence of the residual current 3I0. A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations. For better adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode setting has been introduced which makes it possible to select the operating conditions for negative sequence and zero sequence based function. The selection of different operation
324
RED 670
modes makes it possible to choose different interaction possibilities between the negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithm.
10.2.2
10.2.2.1
Principle of operation
Zero sequence
The function can be set in five different modes by setting the parameter OpMode. The zero sequence function continuously measure the internal currents and voltages in all three phases and calculate: the zero-sequence voltage 3U0 the zero-sequence current 3I0.
The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0< and 3I0>. The function enable the internal signal fuseFailDetected if the measured zero sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0>, the measured zero sequence current is below the set value 3I0< and the operation mode selector (OpMode is set to 2 (zero sequence mode). This will activate the output signal BLKU, intended to block voltage related protection functions in the IED. The output signal BLKZ will be activated as well if not the internal dead line detection is activaded at the same time. If the fuseFailDetected signal is present for more than 5 seconds at the same time as all phase voltages are below the set value UPh> and the setting parameter ISealIn is set to On, the function will activate the output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ. The same signals will aslo be activated if all phase voltages are below the value UPh>, SealIn=On and any of the phase voltages below the setting value for more than 5 seconds. It is recommended to always set SealIn to On since this will secure that no unwanted operation of fuse failure will occur at closing command of breaker when the line is already energized from the other end. The system voltages shall be normal before fuse failure is allowed to be activated and initiate block of different protection functions. The output signal BLKU can also be activated if no phase voltages is below the setting UPh> for more than 60 seconds at the same time as the zero sequence voltage is above the set value 3U0> for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents are below the setting IDLD< (operate level for dead line detection) and the circuit breaker is closed (input CBCLOSED is activated). This condition covers for fuse failure at open breaker position. Fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are restored.
RED 670
325
Fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory in the IED. In the new start-up procedure the IED checks the stored value in its non volatile memory and establishes the corresponding starting conditions.
TEST
TEST ACTIVE BlocFuse = Yes AND
OR
SealIn = On AND 5s t
AND
Any UL less than Uph> Fuse fail detected (3U0 high and 3I0 low for t>3 ms)
OR
MCBOP
150 ms t 60 sec t AND UN > 3U0> for t>5 s All IL < IDLD< AND
CBCLOSED DISCPOS
en06000394.vsd
Figure 165:
Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, zero sequence based
326
RED 670
The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ can be blocked in the following conditions: The input BLOCK is activated The input BLKTRIP is activated at the same time as the internal signal fufailStarted is not present The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off. The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)
The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The input BLKSP is intended to be connected to the trip output at any of the protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the operation of the fuse failure is blocked during a fixed time of 100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might operate. The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is activated. The block signal has a 200 ms drop-off time delay. The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpMode selector. The additional drop-off timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker. The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause maloperation of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated. The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions (undervoltage protection, synchro-check etc.) except for the impedance protection. The function output BLKZ can be used for blocking the impedance protection function.
RED 670
327
The BLKZ will only be activated if not the internal dead line detection is activated at the same time. The fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are restored. When the output 3PH is activated, all three voltage are low.
10.2.2.2
Negative sequence
The negative sequence operates in the same way as the zero sequence, but it calculates the negative sequence component of current and voltage. the negative sequence current 3I2 the negative sequence voltage 3U2
The function enable the internal signal fuseFailDetected if the measured negative sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U2>, the measured negative sequence current is below the value 3I2< and the operation mode selector (OpMode) is set to 1 (negative sequence mode).
10.2.2.3
The calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and DU>. The delta current and delta voltage algorithm, detects a fuse failure if a sufficient negative change in voltage amplitude without a sufficient change in current amplitude is detected in each phase separately. This check is performed if the circuit breaker is closed. Information about the circuit breaker position is brought to the function input CBCLOSED through a binary input of the IED. There are two conditions for activating the internal STDU signal and set the latch:
328
RED 670
The magnitude of U is higher than the corresponding setting DU> and I is below the setting DI> in any phase at the same time as the circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = 1) The magnitude U is higher than the setting DU> and the magnitude of I is below the setting DI> in any phase at the same time as the magnitude of the phase current in the same phase is higher than the setting IPh>.
The first criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled in any phase at the same time as circuit breaker is closed. Opening circuit breaker at one end and energizing the line from other end onto a fault could lead to wrong start of the fuse failure function at the end with the open breaker. If this is considering to bee an important disadvantage, connect the CBCLOSED input to FALSE. In this way only the second criterion can activate the delta function. The second criterion means that detection of failure in one phase together with high current for the same phase will set the latch. The measured phase current is used to reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) is not by certain followed by current change and a false fuse failure might occur. To prevent that the phase current criterion is introduced. If the signal setLatchUI is set (see figure 165) and if all measured voltages are low (lower than the setting UPh>) the output 3PH will be activated indicating fuse failure in all three phases. The output BLKU and BLKZ will be activated as well. If the signal setLatchUI is activated but not all three phases are below the setting UPh> only BLKU will be activated. The BLKZ will be activated as well if not the internal dead line detection is activated.
10.2.2.4
Operation modes
The fuse failure supervision function can be switched on or off by the setting parameter Operation to On or Off.
For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode selector, OperationMode has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithm. The different operation modes are: OpMode = 0, the negative and zero sequence function is switched off OpMode = 1; Negative sequence is selected OpMode = 2; Zero sequence is selected
RED 670
329
OMode = 3; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in parallel in an OR-condition OpMode = 4; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in series (AND-condition for operation) OpMode = 5; Optimum of negative and zero sequence (the function that has the highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be activated).
The DU and DI function can be switched on or off by the setting parameter OpDUDI to On or Off.
10.2.2.5
10.2.3
Function block
FSD1SDDRFUF BLOCK I3P U3P CBCLOSED MCBOP DISCPOS BLKSP BLKZ BLKU 3PH
en05000700.vsd
Figure 166:
10.2.4
330
RED 670
Table 168:
Signal BLKZ BLKU 3PH
10.2.5
Setting parameters
Table 169:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase OpMode
3U0>
30
%UB
Operate level of residual overvoltage element in % of UBase Operate level of residual undercurrent element in % of IBase Operate level of neg seq overvoltage element in % of UBase Operate level of neg seq undercurrent element in % of IBase Operation of change based function Off/On
3I0<
1 - 100
10
%IB
3U2>
1 - 100
30
%UB
3I2<
1 - 100
10
%IB
OperationDUDI
Off On
Off
RED 670
331
DI<
1 - 100
15
%IB
UPh>
1 - 100
70
%UB
IPh>
1 - 100
10
%IB
SealIn USealln<
Off On 1 - 100
On 70
%UB
IDLD<
1 - 100
%IB
UDLD<
1 - 100
60
%UB
10.2.6
Technical data
Table 170:
Function Operate voltage, zero sequence Operate current, zero sequence Operate voltage, negative sequence Operate current, negative sequence Operate voltage change level Operate current change level
332
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Section 11 Control
About this chapter
This chapter describes the control functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
11.1
sc/vc
11.1.1
Introduction
The synchrocheck function checks that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely. The function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and one- and a half or ring busbar arrangements. Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can have different settings, e.g. the allowed frequency difference can be set to allow wider limits for the auto-reclose attempt than for the manual closing.
11.1.2
11.1.2.1
Principle of operation
Basic functionality
The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are simultaneously within their set limits.
RED 670
333
Section 11 Control
The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is only given when the actual measured quantities match the set conditions. For single circuit breaker and 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangements, the SYN function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage selection. For single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers The internal logic for each function block as well as the Input and Outputs and the setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document. For application related information, please refer to the Application manual.
11.1.2.2
Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the Synchrocheck function components such as Synchronism check, Energizing check and Voltage selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.
Synchronism check
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for the Synchrocheck function for evaluation. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as phase-neutral (or the opposite), this need to be compensated. This is done with a setting, which scales up the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage. When the function is set to Operation = On, the measuring will start. The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for UHighBusSync and UHighLineSync. If both sides are higher than the set values the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff. If a compensation factor is set due to the use of different voltages on the Bus and Line, the factor is deducted from the line voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values. The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and may not exceed the set value. Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available and used for the Manual closing and Auto-Reclose functions respectively as required. The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete Synchrocheck function and block of the Synchronism check function respectively. 334 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670
Section 11 Control
TSTAUTSY will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output Two outputs MANSYOK resp. AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be delayed independently for MANSYOK conditions and for ARSYNOK. A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions. UOK shows that the voltages are high, UDIFF, FRDIFFM/A, PHDIFFM/A shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference conditions are met.
Energizing check
Voltage values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for evaluation by the Synchrocheck function. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as phase-neutral, (or the opposite) this needs to be compensated. This is done with a setting, which scales the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage. The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighLineEnerg and ULowLineEnerg for bus respectively line energizing. The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and shall not exceed a set value. The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed independently for MANENOK conditions and for AUTOENOK. The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete Synchrocheck function resp. block of the Energizing check function. TSTENOK will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output.
RED 670
335
Section 11 Control
OperationSync = On
AND AND AND AND OR AND AND 0-60 s t tSync AND 0-60 s t tSync2 OR AND
TSTSYNOK
SYNOK
AND
UDiff
AND
50 ms t
UHighBusSync UHighLineSync
AND 1
1 1 1 1
PHDIFFME
en05000790.vsd
Figure 167:
Voltage selection
The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformer fuses for the different arrangements is a basic part of the Synchrocheck function and determines the parameters fed to the Synchronism check and Energizing check functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and fuse supervision. The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig. The different alternatives are described below. If NoVoltageSel is set the default voltages used will be ULine1 and UBus1. This is also the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for the used inputs must also be connected. The voltage selection function selected voltages and fuse conditions are the Synchronism check and Energizing check inputs.
336
RED 670
Section 11 Control
For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but it is of course also possible to use an inverter for one of the positions.
External fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of the Synchrocheck functions in the terminal. Alternatively the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used when available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs labelled FF must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is faulty. The SYN1(2)-UB1/2OK and SYN1(2)-UB1/2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and the SYN1(2)-ULN1/2OK and SYN1(2)-ULN1/2FF inputs are related to the line voltage. Configure them to the binary inputs or function outputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing check functions are blocked. The synchronism check requires full voltage on both sides and will be blocked automatically in the event of fuse failures.
This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors auxiliary contacts B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPEN-B2QCLD for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 2 is closed and the disconnector connected to bus 1 is opened the bus 2 voltage is used. All other combinations use the bus 1 voltage. The Outputs B1SEL and B2SEL respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage. The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage transformers. Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the fuse for Bus 1. UB2OK-UB2FF supervises the fuse for Bus 2 and ULNOK-ULNFF supervises the fuse for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively be used dependent on the available signal. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in figure 168.
RED 670
337
Section 11 Control
B1SEL B2SEL
1
AND
invalidSelection busVoltage
bus1Voltage bus2Voltage
OR
selectedFuseOK USELFAIL
OR
OR
BLOCK
en05000779.vsd
Figure 168:
Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars
Note that with 11/2 breaker schemes two Synchrocheck functions must be used in the IED (three for two IEDs in a complete bay). Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breakers is described. This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the Synchrocheck (Synchronism and Energizing check) function. For the bus circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other side is connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the arrangement. Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD, LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The Outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1 voltage. The fuse supervision is connected to ULNOK-ULNFF etc. and with alternative Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available for each of fuse (MCB). The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 on one side and the other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2. Four different output combinations are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.
338
RED 670
Section 11 Control
The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed. The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit breaker is closed. The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed. The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 Circuit breaker is closed.
The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK.The function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in 169 and for the tie circuit breaker in 170
LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD B1QOPEN B1QCLD LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD
AND AND AND AND AND OR AND AND
LN1SEL
lineVoltage
selectedFuseOK USELFAIL
OR
AND
AND
OR
AND
en05000780.vsd
Figure 169:
Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2 breaker arrangement.
RED 670
339
Section 11 Control
LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD
AND
LN1SEL 1 B1SEL
AND
B1QOPEN B1QCLD
AND
AND
busVoltage
LN2SEL 1 B2SEL
AND OR
B2QOPEN B2QCLD
AND
invalidSelection
AND
line2Voltage bus2Voltage UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF ULN2OK ULN2FF BLOCK
lineVoltage
OR
AND OR AND
OR
AND
selectedFuseOK USELFAIL
OR
AND
AND
OR
AND
en05000781.vsd
Figure 170:
Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2 breaker arrangement.
11.1.3
Function block
The Synchrocheck function block is shown in 171. Tables describing the inputs, outputs and setting parameters of this function are presented in the following sections of this document. Refer to the Application manual for the use of inputs and outputs in your particular application.
340
RED 670
Section 11 Control
SYN1SECRSYN U3PBB1 U3PBB2 U3PLN1 U3PLN2 B1QOPEN B1QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF ULN2OK ULN2FF TSTENERG TSTSYNC BLKENERG BLKSYNC BLOCK B1SEL B2SEL LN1SEL LN2SEL USELFAIL AUTOENOK MANENOK TSTENOK MANSYOK TSTMANSY UDIFF FRDIFFM FRDIFFA PHDIFFM PHDIFFA UOK AUTOSYOK TSTAUTSY
en05000702.vsd
Figure 171:
11.1.4
RED 670
341
Section 11 Control
Signal UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF ULN2OK ULN2FF TSTENERG TSTSYNC BLKENERG BLKSYNC BLOCK Description Bus2 voltage transformer OK Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure Line1 voltage transformer OK Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure Line2 voltage transformer OK Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure Energizing check in test mode Synchrocheck in test mode Energizing check blocked Synchrocheck blocked Block of function
Table 172:
Signal B1SEL B2SEL LN1SEL LN2SEL USELFAIL AUTOENOK MANENOK TSTENOK MANSYOK TSTMANSY UDIFF FRDIFFM FRDIFFA PHDIFFM PHDIFFA UOK AUTOSYOK TSTAUTSY
11.1.5
Setting parameters
342
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Table 173:
Parameter Operation SelPhaseBus1
SelPhaseBus2
phase2
SelPhaseLine1
phase2
SelPhaseLine2
phase2
CBConfig
No voltage sel.
Select CB configuration
0.001 5 0.01 -
400.000 0 1.00 On
kV Deg -
Base voltage in kV Phase shift Voltage ratio Operation for synchronism check function Off/On Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck in % of UBase Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in % of UBase Voltage difference limit between bus and line in % of UBase Frequency difference limit between bus and line Manual Frequency difference limit between bus and line Auto
UHighBusSync
1.0
80.0
%UB
UHighLineSync
50.0 - 120.0
1.0
80.0
%UB
UDiff
2.0 - 50.0
1.0
15.0
%UB
FreqDiffM
0.003 - 1.000
0.001
0.050
Hz
FreqDiffA
0.003 - 1.000
0.001
0.200
Hz
RED 670
343
Section 11 Control
Parameter PhaseDiffM Range 5.0 - 90.0 Step 1.0 Default 25.0 Unit Deg Description Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Manual Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Auto Time delay output for synchrocheck Time delay output for synchrocheck for Auto operation Voltage high limit bus for energizing check in % of UBase Voltage high limit line for energizing check in % of UBase Voltage low limit bus for energizing check in % of UBase Voltage low limit line for energizing check in % of UBase Automatic energizing check mode
PhaseDiffA
5.0 - 90.0
1.0
25.0
Deg
tSyncM tSyncA
0.001 0.001
1.000 0.100
s s
UHighBusEnerg
50.0 - 120.0
1.0
80.0
%UB
UHighLineEnerg
50.0 - 120.0
1.0
80.0
%UB
ULowBusEnerg
10.0 - 80.0
1.0
40.0
%UB
ULowLineEnerg
10.0 - 80.0
1.0
40.0
%UB
AutoEnerg
Off DLLB DBLL Both Off DLLB DBLL Both 0.000 - 60.000
DLLB
ManEnerg
DLLB
tAutoEnerg
0.001
0.100
Time delay for automatic energizing check Time delay for manual energizing check Manual dead bus, dead line energizing Maximum voltage for energizing in % of UBase
0.001 1.0
s %UB
11.1.6
Technical data
344
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Table 174:
Function
Phase shift, jline - jbus Voltage ratio, Ubus/Uline Voltage high limit for synchrocheck Reset ratio, synchrocheck Frequency difference limit between bus and line Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Voltage difference limit between bus and line Time delay output for synchrocheck Voltage high limit for energizing check Reset ratio, voltage high limit Voltage low limit for energizing check Reset ratio, voltage low limit Maximum voltage for energizing Time delay for energizing check Operate time for synchrocheck function Operate time for energizing function
11.2
O->I
11.2.1
Introduction
The autoreclosing function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto-reclosing for single or multi-breaker applications.
RED 670
345
Section 11 Control
Up to five reclosing attempts can be programmed. The first attempt can be single-, two and/or three phase for single phase or multi-phase faults respectively. Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A priority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only close if the fault proved to be transient. Each autoreclosing function can be configured to co-operate with a synchrocheck function.
11.2.2
11.2.2.1
Principle of operation
Logic Diagrams
The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding of the functionality.
11.2.2.2
11.2.2.3
346
RED 670
Section 11 Control
closed, 52b). One also has to configure and connect signals from manual trip commands to input INHIBIT. The logic for switching the auto-recloser ON/OFF and the starting of the reclosing is shown in figure 172. The following should be considered. Setting Operation can be set to Off, External ctrl or ON. External ctrl offers the possibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF, communication commands to the same inputs etc. Autoreclose AR is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 and Communication aided trip or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In both alternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the function. START makes a first attempt with synchrocheck, STARTHS makes its first attempt without synchrocheck. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5. Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a certain length of time before the starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to perform an auto-reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs CBPOS and CBREADY.
Operation:On Operation:Off Operation:External Ctrl ON OFF START STARTHS autoInitiate TRSOTF CBREADY CBPOS Additional conditions AND start AND tCBClosedMin t AND Blocking conditions Inhibit condistions count 0
en05000782.vsd
AND AND
OR AND S OR R
SETON
OR OR initiate
120 ms t CB Closed
AND S R
AND
OR
AND
READY
Figure 172:
11.2.2.4
RED 670
347
Section 11 Control
and an auto-reclosing program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the autoreclosing open time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is activated in connection with the start, the auto-reclosing open time for two-phase or three-phase reclosing is used. There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase highspeed auto-reclosing, t1 3PhHS available for use when required. It is activated by input STARTHS. An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the normal shot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for permissive line protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time difference in fault clearance at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open time can then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter Extended t1 = On and the input PLCLOST.
11.2.2.5
PLCLOST initiate
AND tTrip t
OR
AND
AND
Extend t1
start
AND
AND
Figure 173:
Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulse detection
When dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditions must be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signals are exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met. In three-phase reclosing a synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It is possible to use a synchronism check function in the same physical device or an external one. The release signal is configured by connecting to the auto-reclosing function input SYNC. If reclosing without checking is preferred the SYNC input can 348 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670
Section 11 Control
be set to TRUE (set high). Another possibility is to set the output of the synchro-check function to a permanently activated state. At confirmation from the synchro-check, or if the reclosing is of single-phase or two-phase type, the signal passes on. At singlephase, two-phase reclosing and at three-phase high-speed reclosing started by STARTHS, synchronization is not checked, and the state of the SYNC input is disregarded. By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) the readiness of the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing command. If the CB has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB ready for an Open-Close-Open sequence) this condition may not be complied with after the tripping and at the moment of reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition was however checked at the start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB is prepared for a Close-Open sequence. The synchronism check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time interval, tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted and blocked. The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which the reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB closing command is given. A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state in the reclosing sequence.
RED 670
349
Section 11 Control
t1 1Ph t
1P2PTO 3PHSTO 3PT1TO 3PT2TO 3PT3TO 3PT4TO 3PT5TO SYNC initiate CBREADY
1P2PTO
OR
AND OR AND
AND
AND
OR
AND
tSync t
Pulse AR (above) TR2P TR3P start initiate Shot 0 Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5 LOGIC reclosing programs
OR
AND
1PT1 2PT1 3PHS 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 3PT4 3PT5 1 PERMIT1P PREP3P Inhibit Y
OR
INPROGR
Y INHIBIT
Blocking
OR
tInhibit t
en05000784.vsd
Figure 174:
The CB closing command, CLOSECB is a pulse with a duration set by parameter tPulse. For circuit-breakers without anti-pumping function, the close pulse cutting described below can be used. This is done by selecting the parameter CutPulse=On. In case of a new trip pulse, the closing command pulse is cut (interrupted). The minimum duration of the pulse is always 50 ms. See figure 175 When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter is incremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total number of reclosing commands issued.
350
RED 670
Section 11 Control
pulse initiate
CLOSECB
1PT1 2PT1 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 3PT4 3PT5 RSTCOUNT **) Only if "CutPulse" = On
AND
counter
AND
counter
AND
counter
AND
counter
AND
counter
AND
counter
AND
counter counter
en05000785.vsd
Figure 175:
After the reclosing command the reclaim timer tReclaim starts running for the set time. If no tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.
Transient fault
If a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and a new input signal START or TRSOTF appears, the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. The timers for the first shot can no longer be started. Depending on the setting for the number of reclosing shots, further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence will be ended. After the reclaim time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets but the CB remains open. The CB closed data at the CBPOS input will be missing. Because of this, the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle. Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and start is received after the last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. The signal resets once the reclaim time has elapsed. The unsuccessful signal can also be made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should then be set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB does not respond to the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the output UNSUCCL is set high after time tUnsucCl.
RED 670
351
Section 11 Control
AND
OR
AND
UNSUCCL
OR AND
tUnsucCl t
AND
CBclosed
eno5000786.vsd
Figure 176:
The auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following reclosing shots (if selected) even if the start signals are not received from the protection functions, but the breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting parameter AutoCont = On and tAutoContWait to the required delay for the function to proceed without a new start.
tAutoContWait t
AND
CLOSECB
AND
S Q R
AND
CBPOS
CBClosed
OR
START
OR
initiate
en05000787.vsd
Figure 177:
If a user wants to apply starting auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of from protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode is 352 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670
Section 11 Control
selected by a setting parameter StartByCBOpen = On. One needs then to block reclosing at all manual trip operations. Typically one also set CBAuxContType = NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary contact of type NC (normally closed, 52b) to inputs CBPOS and START. When the signal changes from CB closed to CB open an auto-reclosing start pulse is generated and latched in the function, subject to the usual checks. Then the reclosing sequence continues as usual. One needs to connect signals from manual tripping and other functions, which shall prevent reclosing, to the input INHIBIT.
StartByCBOpen = On 1 START STARTHS
AND
start
en05000788.vsd
Figure 178:
11.2.2.6
RED 670
353
Section 11 Control
Fault
CB POS
Closed Open Closed
CB READY START SYNC READY INPROG 1PT1 ACTIVE CLOSE CB PREP3P SUCCL
Time t1 1Ph tPulse (Trip) tReclaim
en04000196.vsd
Figure 179:
Fault
CB POS
Closed Open
CB READY START TR3P SYNC READY INPROGR 3PT1 3PT2 ACTIVE CLOSE CB PREP3P UNSUCCL
t1 3Ph (Trip)
Open
Time
en04000197.vsd
Figure 180:
354
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED AR01-CBREADY(CO) AR01-START AR01-TR3P AR01-SYNC AR01-READY AR01-INPROGR AR01-1PT1 AR01-T1 AR01-T2 AR01-CLOSECB AR01-P3P AR01-UNSUC
tReclaim t1s
en04000198.vsd
Figure 181:
Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED AR01-CBREADY(CO) AR01-START AR01-TR3P AR01-SYNC AR01-READY AR01-INPROGR AR01-1PT1 AR01-T1 AR01-T2 AR01-CLOSECB AR01-P3P AR01-UNSUC
tReclaim t1s t2
en04000199.vsd
Figure 182:
Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph, two-shot reclosing
RED 670
355
Figure 183:
AR function block
11.2.4
356
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Table 176:
Signal BLOCKED SETON READY ACTIVE SUCCL UNSUCCL INPROGR 1PT1 2PT1 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 3PT4 3PT5 PERMIT1P PREP3P CLOSECB WFMASTER COUNT1P COUNT2P COUNT3P1 COUNT3P2 COUNT3P3 COUNT3P4 COUNT3P5 COUNTAR
11.2.5
Setting parameters
RED 670
357
Section 11 Control
Table 177:
Parameter Operation
NoOfShots
FirstShot
1/2/3ph
StartByCBOpen
Off
To be set ON if AR is to be started by CB open position Select the CB aux contact type NC/NO for CBPOS input Select type of circuit breaker ready signal CO/OCO Open time for shot 1, single-phase Open time for shot 1, two-phase Open time for shot 1, delayed reclosing 3ph Open time for shot 1, high speed reclosing 3ph Open time for shot 2, three-phase Open time for shot 3, three-phase Open time for shot 4, three-phase Open time for shot 5, three-phase Duration of the reclaim time Maximum wait time for synchrocheck OK Extended open time for loss of permissive channel Open time extended by this value if Extended t1 is true
CBAuxContType
NormOpen
CBReadyType
CO
s s s s
0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 Off On 0.000 - 60.000
s s s s s s -
tExtended t1
0.001
0.400
358
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Parameter tInhibit tTrip CutPulse tPulse Follow CB Range 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.00 - 6000.00 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 5.000 0.200 Off 0.200 Off Unit s s s Description Inhibit reclosing reset time Maximum trip pulse duration Shorten closing pulse at a new trip Off/On Duration of the circuit breaker closing pulse Advance to next shot if CB has been closed during dead time Min time that CB must be closed before new sequence allows Continue with next reclosing-shot if breaker did not close Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot Unsuccessful closing signal obtained by checking CB position Block AR at unsuccessful reclosing Wait time for CB before indicating unsuccessful/ successful Priority selection between adjacent terminals None/Low/ High Maximum wait time for release from Master
tCBClosedMin
0.01
5.00
AutoCont
Off
tAutoContWait
0.001
2.000
UnsucClByCBChk
NoCBCheck
BlockByUnsucCl
Off
tUnsucCl
0.01
30.00
Priority
None
tWaitForMaster
0.01
60.00
11.2.6
Technical data
RED 670
359
Section 11 Control
Table 178:
Function
Number of autoreclosing shots Number of autoreclosing programs Autoreclosing open time: shot 1 - t1 1Ph shot 1 - t1 2Ph shot 1 - t1 3PhHS shot 1 - t1 3PhDld shot 2 - t2 shot 3 - t3 shot 4 - t4 shot 5 - t5 Extended autorecloser open time Autorecloser maximum wait time for sync Maximum trip pulse duration Inhibit reset time Reclaim time Minimum time CB must be closed before AR becomes ready for autoreclosing cycle Circuit breaker closing pulse length CB check time before unsuccessful Wait for master release Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot
(0.00-6000.00) s
11.3
11.3.1
11.3.2
Principle of operation
A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor bank. The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the apparatus control function directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic sequences. Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function module that handles
360
RED 670
Section 11 Control
the interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in the process information used by higher-level control functions. Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised by one software module (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals connected to a breaker and a disconnector are almost the same, the same software is used to handle these two types of apparatuses. The software module is connected to the physical process in the switchyard via an interface module by means of a number of digital inputs and outputs. One type of interface module is intended for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and another type is intended for a disconnector or earthing switch (SXSWI). Four types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and supervision within the bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a control function reflecting the switchyard configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard configuration. These four types are: Bay control QCBAY Switch controller SCSWI Circuit breaker SXCBR Circuit switch SXSWI
The three latter functions are logical nodes according to IEC 61850. The function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl, to handle the local/remote switch, and the function blocks QCRSV and RESIN, for the reservation function, also belong to the apparatus control function. The principles of operation, function block, input and output signals and setting parameters for all these functions are described below.
11.3.3
11.3.3.1
11.3.3.2
Principle of operation
The functionality of the bay control function is not defined in the IEC 6185081 standard, which means that the function is a vendor specific logical node. The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and blocking conditions to other functions within the bay e.g. switch control functions, voltage control functions and measurement functions.
The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch connected to this function can have three positions remote/local/off. The positions RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 361
Section 11 Control
are here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station/remote level and local from the IED level. The local/remote switch is normally situated on the control/protection IED itself, which means that the position of the switch and its validity information are connected internally, and not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted separately on the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/O boards. When the local panel switch is in Off position all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate. To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl are needed and connected to QCBAY. For more information, see section "Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl)". The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch position according to table 179. In addition, there is one configuration parameter that affects the value of the PSTO signal. If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LRswitch position is in Local or Remote state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), i.e. it is permitted to operate from both local and remote level without any priority. When the external panel switch is in Off position the PSTO value shows the actual state of switch, i.e. 0. In this case it is not possible to control anything.
Table 179:
Local panel switch positions 0 = Off 1 = Local 1 = Local 2 = Remote 2 = Remote 3 = Faulty
0 1 5 2 5 3
Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within a complete bay. The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:
362
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay. Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all configured functions within the bay. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 6185081). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.
The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires an Control level password. This will be requested at attempt to operate if authority levels has been defined in the IED. Default password is "abb".
11.3.3.3
Function block
CB01QCBAY LR_OFF LR_LOC LR_REM LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD PSTO UPD_BLKD CMD_BLKD
en05000796.vsd
Figure 184:
CB function block
11.3.3.4
Table 181:
Signal PSTO UPD_BLKD CMD_BLKD
RED 670
363
Section 11 Control
11.3.3.5 Setting parameters
Table 182:
Parameter AllPSTOValid
11.3.4
11.3.4.1
11.3.4.2
Principle of operation
The function block LocalRemote handles the signals coming from the local/remote switch. The connections are seen in figure 185, where the inputs on function block LocalRemote are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When a local LCD HMI is used, the inputs are not used and are set to FALSE in the configuration. The outputs from the LocalRemote function block control the output PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on QCBAY.
364
RED 670
Section 11 Control
CB01QCBAY LR_OFF PSTO LR_LOC UPD_BLKD LR_REM CMD_BLKD LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD CB02QCBAY LR_OFF PSTO LR_LOC UPD_BLKD LR_REM CMD_BLKD LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD
LRC1LocRemControl PSTO1 HMICTR1 PSTO2 HMICTR2 PSTO3 HMICTR3 PSTO4 HMICTR4 PSTO5 HMICTR5 PSTO6 HMICTR6 PSTO7 HMICTR7 PSTO8 HMICTR8 PSTO9 HMICTR9 PSTO10 HMICTR10 PSTO11 HMICTR11 PSTO12 HMICTR12 en05000250.vsd
Figure 185:
Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local LCD HMI with two bays and two screen pages
If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can be different for the included bays. When the local LCD HMI is used the position of the local/remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen page that is presented on the local HMI. The function block LocRemControl controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position to applicable bay and screen page. The local-remote switching is under strict password control. This is activated by defining an administrator and user with their passwords. Default password i abb. The selected position local-remote or local and remote is indicated by LEDs.
11.3.4.3
Function block
LR01LocalRemote CT RLOFF OFF LOCCT RL LOCAL REMCT RL REMOT E LHMICT RL VALID en05000360.vsd
Figure 186:
LR function block
RED 670
365
Section 11 Control
LRC1LocRemControl PST O1 HMICT R1 PST O2 HMICT R2 PST O3 HMICT R3 PST O4 HMICT R4 PST O5 HMICT R5 PST O6 HMICT R6 PST O7 HMICT R7 PST O8 HMICT R8 PST O9 HMICT R9 PST O10 HMICT R10 PST O11 HMICT R11 PST O12 HMICT R12 en05000361.vsd
Figure 187:
11.3.4.4
Table 184:
Signal OFF LOCAL REMOTE VALID
Table 185:
Signal PSTO1 PSTO2 PSTO3 PSTO4 PSTO5 PSTO6 PSTO7 PSTO8
366
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Signal PSTO9 PSTO10 PSTO11 PSTO12 Description PSTO input channel 9 PSTO input channel 10 PSTO input channel 11 PSTO input channel 12
Table 186:
Signal HMICTR1 HMICTR2 HMICTR3 HMICTR4 HMICTR5 HMICTR6 HMICTR7 HMICTR8 HMICTR9 HMICTR10 HMICTR11 HMICTR12
11.3.4.5
Setting parameters
Table 187:
Parameter ControlMode
11.3.5
11.3.5.1
11.3.5.2
Principle of operation
RED 670
367
Section 11 Control
The function is provided with verification checks for the select - execute sequence, i.e. checks the conditions prior each step of the operation. The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation, blockings and synchrocheck.
Command handling
Two types of command models can be used. The two command models are "direct with enhanced security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". Which one of these two command models that are used is defined by the parameter CtlModel. The meaning with "direct with enhanced security" model is that no select is required. The meaning with "SBO with enhanced security" model is that a select is required before execute. In this function only commands with enhanced security is supported regarding changing of the position. With enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence, the sequence is terminated and the error is mapped into the enumerated variable "cause" attribute belonging to the pulsed response signal for the IEC61850 communication. The last cause L_CAUSE can be read from the function block and used for example at commissioning. The meaning of the cause signals can be found in table 2. There is not any relation between the command direction and the actual position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to execute a close command. Before an executing command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no executing command is send. If the parameter is false the execution command is send independent of the position value.
Evaluation of position
In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the onephase switches, following principles will be applied:
All switches in open position: All switches in close position: One switch =open, two switches= close (or inversely): Any switch in intermediate position: Any switch in bad state: switch control position = open switch control position = close switch control position = intermediate switch control position = intermediate switch control position = bad state
368
RED 670
Section 11 Control
The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the time stamp of the last changed phase when it goes to end position. When it goes to intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase. In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discordance and is supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance situation, i.e. the position of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than the setting tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set. In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values from the switch modules XCBR/XSWI. At error the "cause" value with highest priority is shown.
Blocking principles
The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY) and via the IEC61850 communication from the operator place. The different blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of position. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible. The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this function, i.e. no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
The switch controller works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and the synchronizing function SECRSYN. It is assumed that the synchrocheck function is continuously in operation and gives the result to the SCSWI. The result from the synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the synchrocheck state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, the switch controller SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function SXCBR. When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, the SCSWI will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the closing command to the SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see figure 188. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision of the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the
RED 670
369
Section 11 Control
synchronizing function. The SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-bysynchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in figure 192.
SCSWI EXE_CL OR SXCBR CLOSE
en05000091.vsd
Figure 188:
Example of interaction between SCSWI, SECRSYN (synchrocheck and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function
Time diagrams
The SCSWI function has timers for evaluating different time supervision conditions. These timers are explained here. The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute command signal, i.e. the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the selection of the object to operate.
select execute command tSelect timer t1 t1>tSelect, then longoperation-time in 'cause' is set
en05000092.vsd
Figure 189:
tSelect
The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the reservation, i.e. the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.
370
RED 670
Section 11 Control
select reservation request RES_RQ reservation granted RES_GRT command termination tResResponse timer t1 t1>tResResponse, then 1-of-n-control in 'cause' is set
en05000093.vsd
Figure 190:
tResResponse
The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the command termination, see figure 191.
execute command position L1 open close position L2 open close position L3 open close cmd termination L1 cmd termination L2 cmd termination L3 cmd termination position open close tExecutionFB timer t1>tExecutionFB, then long-operation-time in 'cause' is set *
t1
Figure 191:
tExecutionFB
The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck conditions are not fulfilled.
RED 670
371
Section 11 Control
execute command SYNC_OK tSynchrocheck START_SY SY_INPRO tSynchronizing t2 t2>tSynchronizing, then blocked-by-synchrocheck in 'cause' is set
en05000095.vsd
t1
Figure 192:
Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with a value. Table 188 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard.The list of values of the cause are in order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Table 188:
Apparatus control function 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35
Error handling
372
RED 670
Section 11 Control
11.3.5.3 Function block
CS01SCSWI BLOCK PSTO L_SEL L_OPEN L_CLOSE AU_OPEN AU_CLOSE BL_CMD RES_GRT RES_EXT SY_INPRO SYNC_OK EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE XPOS1 XPOS2 XPOS3 EXE_OP EXE_CL SELECTED RES_RQ START_SY POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS POLEDISC CMD_BLK L_CAUSE XOUT
en05000337.vsd
Figure 193:
CS function block
11.3.5.4
RED 670
373
Section 11 Control
Table 190:
Signal EXE_OP EXE_CL SELECTED RES_RQ START_SY POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS POLEDISC CMD_BLK L_CAUSE XOUT
11.3.5.5
Setting parameters
Table 191:
Parameter CtlModel
PosDependent
Always permitted
tSelect
0.001
30.000
tResResponse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
tSynchrocheck
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
10.00
tSynchronizing
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tExecutionFB
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
30.000
tPoleDiscord
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
374
RED 670
11.3.6.2
Principle of operation
The intended user of this function is other functions such as e.g. Switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluate block conditions and evaluate different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value. The function has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from the operator place.
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in this function to indicate the local/ remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 194.
Local= Operation at switch yard level
UE TR
From I/O
switchLR
FAL SE
Figure 194:
Local/Remote switch
Blocking principles
The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients e.g. operators place, protection functions, autoreclosure etc.
RED 670
375
Section 11 Control
The blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate command. Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate command. Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other signals related to the position will be reset. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.
Substitution
The substitution part in this function is used for manual set of the position for the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real process value is erroneous of some reason. The function will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process. It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 195 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
376
RED 670
Section 11 Control
AdaptivePulse = TRUE
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
en05000097.vsd
Figure 195:
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 196 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The adaptively parameter will have affect on both execute output pulses.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
EXE_CL tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
en05000098.vsd
Figure 196:
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or tClosePulse. The execute output pulses are reset when:
RED 670
377
Section 11 Control
the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to true the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, i.e. tStartMove has elapsed. If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer "tOpenPulse" or "tClosePulse" has elapsed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed. An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in figure 197 .
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
en05000099.vsd
Figure 197:
Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with a value. Table 192 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the cause are in order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Error handling
378
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Table 192:
Apparatus control function 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35
11.3.6.3
Function block
XC01SXCBR GRPConABS1 EXE_OP GRPConABS2 EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS TR_POS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE
BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE TR_OPEN TR_CLOSE RS_CNT XIN TERVALUE OSEVALUE PENVALUE
en05000338.vsd
Figure 198:
XC function block
11.3.6.4
RED 670
379
Section 11 Control
Signal BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE TR_OPEN TR_CLOSE RS_CNT XIN Description Steady signal for block of the position updating Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O Signal for open position of truck from I/O Signal for close position of truck from I/O Resets the operation counter Execution information from CSWI
Table 194:
Signal XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD OPENPOS CLOSEPOS TR_POS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE
11.3.6.5
Setting parameters
Table 195:
Parameter tStartMove
tIntermediate AdaptivePulse
0.001 -
s -
tOpenPulse tClosePulse
0.001 0.001
0.200 0.200
s s
380
RED 670
11.3.7.2
Principle of operation
The intended user of this function is other functions such as e.g. Switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or a 61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluate block conditions and evaluate different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value. The function has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from the operator place.
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in this function to indicate the local/ remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 199.
Local= Operation at switch yard level
UE TR
From I/O
switchLR
FAL SE
Figure 199:
Local/Remote switch
Blocking principles
The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients e.g. operators place, protection functions, autoreclosure etc.
RED 670
381
Section 11 Control
The blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate command. Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate command. Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other signals related to the position will be reset. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.
Substitution
The substitution part in this function is used for manual set of the position for the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real process value is erroneous of some reason. The function will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process. It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 200 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
382
RED 670
Section 11 Control
AdaptivePulse = TRUE
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
en05000097.vsd
Figure 200:
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 201 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The adaptively parameter will have affect on both execute output pulses.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
EXE_CL tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
en05000098.vsd
Figure 201:
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or tClosePulse. The execute output pulses are reset when: the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to true the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, i.e. tStartMove has elapsed. 383
RED 670
Section 11 Control
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer "tOpenPulse" or "tClosePulse" has elapsed. There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed. An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in figure 202.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
en05000099.vsd
Figure 202:
Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with a value. Table 196 describes possible values of the "cause" in priority order. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Table 196:
Cause (value) 0 8 2 24 25
Error handling
384
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Cause (value) 9 12 31 32 33 34 35 Description blocked-by-process command-already-in-execution switch-not-start-moving persistent-intermediate-state switch-returned-to-initial-position switch-in-bad-state not-expected-final-position
11.3.7.3
Function block
XS01SXSWI BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE RS_CNT XIN XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE en05000339.vsd
Figure 203:
XS function block
11.3.7.4
RED 670
385
Section 11 Control
Table 198:
Signal XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD OPENPOS CLOSEPOS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE
11.3.7.5
Setting parameters
Table 199:
Parameter tStartMove
tIntermediate AdaptivePulse
0.001 -
s -
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Load Break Disconnector Earthing Switch HS Earthing Switch
0.001 0.001 -
s s -
11.3.8
11.3.8.1
386
RED 670
Section 11 Control
11.3.8.2 Principle of operation
The function block QCRSV handles the reservation. The function starts to operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay or if there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible to reserve the function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the own bay is the input signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller SCWI. The signals for request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and V_RE_RQ from function block RESIN. These signals are included in signal EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV. The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay only (TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no reservation request RES_BAYS is created.
If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to know which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with the input signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of the current bay can be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already is reserved by itself or another bay. This information is available in the output signal RESERVED. If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is connected to switch controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command sequence will be reset and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the "cause" signal.
When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay that requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If not, it will send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and wait for their response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done by activating the output RES_BAYS. When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI (tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-ncontrol" in the "cause" signal.
When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped into the output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input RES_DATA in QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the acknowledgment from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the bay already is reserved the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.
RED 670
387
Section 11 Control
Blocking and overriding of reservation
If the function QCRSV is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is blocked. That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay. This can be set, for example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent operations from another operator place at the same time. The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the OVERRIDE input signal, i.e. reserving the own bay without waiting for the external acknowledge.
If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay i.e. use of up to eight apparatuses, the input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE. If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional QCRSV. The both functions QCRSV have to communicate and this is done through the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to figure 10. If more then one QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must be in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.
CR01QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_GRT1 RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2 RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4 RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5 RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8 RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS BLK_RES ACK_TO_B OVERRIDE RESERVED RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
CR02QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_GRT1 RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2 RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4 RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5 RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8 RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS BLK_RES ACK_TO_B OVERRIDE RESERVED RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
1 1 1
RES_BAYS
ACK_TO_B
RESERVED
en05000088.vsd
Figure 204:
388
RED 670
Section 11 Control
11.3.8.3 Function block
CR01QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_RQ1 RES_RQ2 RES_RQ3 RES_RQ4 RES_RQ5 RES_RQ6 RES_RQ7 RES_RQ8 BLK_RES OVERRIDE RES_DAT A RES_GRT 1 RES_GRT 2 RES_GRT 3 RES_GRT 4 RES_GRT 5 RES_GRT 6 RES_GRT 7 RES_GRT 8 RES_BAYS ACK_T O_B RESERVED EXCH_OUT en05000340.vsd
Figure 205:
CR function block
11.3.8.4
Table 201:
Signal RES_GRT1 RES_GRT2 RES_GRT3 RES_GRT4 RES_GRT5 RES_GRT6 RES_GRT7
RED 670
389
Section 11 Control
Signal RES_GRT8 RES_BAYS ACK_TO_B RESERVED EXCH_OUT Description Reservation is made and the app. 8 is allowed to operate Request for reservation of other bays Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved Indicates that the bay is reserved Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks
11.3.8.5
Setting parameters
Table 202:
Parameter tCancelRes
ParamRequest1
ParamRequest2
ParamRequest3
ParamRequest4
ParamRequest5
ParamRequest6
ParamRequest7
ParamRequest8
390
RED 670
11.3.9.2
Principle of operation
The reservation input function is based purely on Boolean logic conditions. The logic diagram in figure 206 shows how the output signals are created. The inputs of the function block are connected to a receive function block representing signals transferred over the station bus from another bay.
EXCH_IN INT BIN
& FutureUse 1
ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK
ANY_ACK
& BAY_VAL 1
VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
BAY_RES
& 1 V _RE_RQ
BIN INT
EXCH_OUT
en05000089.vsd
Figure 206:
Figure 207 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay" used in the reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions block are connected to the module QCRSV that handles the reservation function in the own bay. The value to the input EXCH_IN on the first RESIN module in the chain RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 391
Section 11 Control
has the integer value 5. This is provided by the use of instance number one of the function block RESIN (RE01-), where the input EXCH_IN is set to #5, but is hidden for the user.
RE01RESIN BAY_ACK ACK_F_B BAY_VAL ANY_ACK BAY_RES VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT
Bay 1
Bay 2
RE02RESIN EXCH_IN ACK_F_B BAY_ACK ANY_ACK BAY_VAL VALID_TX BAY_RES RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT REnnRESIN EXCH_IN ACK_F_B BAY_ACK ANY_ACK BAY_VAL VALID_TX BAY_RES RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT
Bay n
CR01QCRSV RES_DATA
en05000090.vsd
Figure 207:
11.3.9.3
Function block
RE01RESIN BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT en05000341.vsd
Figure 208:
RE function block
11.3.9.4
392
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Table 204:
Signal ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT
11.3.9.5
Setting parameters
Table 205:
Parameter FutureUse
11.4
11.4.1
Interlocking
Introduction
The interlocking function blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material damage and/or accidental human injury. Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements, each handling the interlocking of one bay. The function is distributed to each control IED and not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs. The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the installation at any given time.
11.4.2
Principle of operation
The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED. The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function. Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus. The reservation function (see section "Apparatus control (APC)") is used to ensure that HV apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the
RED 670
393
Section 11 Control
interlocking condition of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the operation is performed. After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching devices that may affect it. The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay. The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking signals can include the following kind of information: Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase) Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module) External release (to add special conditions for release) Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch) Output signals to release the HV apparatus
The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as shown in figure 209.
Interlocking modules in other bays Apparatus control modules
SCILO SCSWI SXSWI
Interlocking module
Figure 209:
Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the following: Unearthed busbars Busbars connected together Other bays connected to a busbar Received data from other bays is valid
394
RED 670
Section 11 Control
WA1 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn
... ..
WA1 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1 WA2 QB1 QB2 QA1 QB9 QB1 QB2 QA1 QB9
en05000494.vsd
QB1
QB2
QC1
QC2
QA1
Figure 210:
When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control terminal, or input board error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for execution of the function will not be given. On the station HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid. For all interlocking modules these general rules apply: The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and earthing switches are always identical. Earthing switches on the line feeder end, e.g. rapid earthing switches, are normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a line voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If there is no line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs must be set to no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating. Earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections e.g. without load/ voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section, i.e. the status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the earthing switch operation is concerned. Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems. Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is completely isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed connections, or if they are earthed on both sides. Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and earthing
RED 670
395
Section 11 Control
switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between CB and transformer. Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar transfer is in progress.
To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the interlocking conditions are available: Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B 1 1/2-CB diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B
The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customers specific requirements, by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration tool PCM 600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these specific conditions. The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in TR are intended for transfer to other bays.
11.4.3
11.4.3.1
11.4.3.2
Principle of operation
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined end position e.g. open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN) is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit breaker/switch SXCBR/SXSWI and the enable signals come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node Switch controller SCSWI. One instance per switching device is needed.
396
RED 670
Section 11 Control
POSOPEN POSCLOSE
SCILO =1
1 &
EN_OPEN >1
&
OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN
& &
>1
EN_CLOSE
en04000525.vsd
Figure 211:
11.4.3.3
Function block
CI01SCILO POSOPEN POSCLOSE OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE
en05000359.vsd
Figure 212:
CI function block
11.4.3.4
Table 207:
Signal EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE
RED 670
397
en04000478.vsd
Figure 213:
398
RED 670
Section 11 Control
11.4.4.2 Function block
IF01ABC_LINE QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLIT L QB9_OP QB9REL QB9_CL QB9IT L QB1_OP QB1REL QB1_CL QB1IT L QB2_OP QB2REL QB2_CL QB2IT L QB7_OP QB7REL QB7_CL QB7IT L QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1IT L QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2IT L QC9_OP QC9REL QC9_CL QC9IT L QC11_OP QB1OPT R QC11_CL QB1CLT R QC21_OP QB2OPT R QC21_CL QB2CLT R QC71_OP QB7OPT R QC71_CL QB7CLT R BB7_D_OP QB12OPT R BC_12_CL QB12CLT R BC_17_OP VPQB1T R BC_17_CL VPQB2T R BC_27_OP VPQB7T R BC_27_CL VPQB12T R VOLT _OFF VOLT _ON VP_BB7_D VP_BC_12 VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 EXDU_ES EXDU_BPB EXDU_BC QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 QB7_EX3 QB7_EX4 en05000357.vsd
Figure 214:
IF function block
RED 670
399
Section 11 Control
11.4.4.3 Logic diagram
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC9 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC9 QC2_CL QC9_CL QB9_EX2 ABC_LINE =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & >1
1
VPQA1 VPQB9 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB7 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC9 VPQC11 VPQC21 VPQC71 VPVOLT QB9REL QB9ITL &
1
QA1CLREL QA1CLITL
&
en04000527.vsd
400
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QB2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1
&
1
1
QB1REL QB1ITL
&
&
en04000528.vsd
RED 670
401
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES
&
1
1
QB2REL QB2ITL
QB2_EX1
&
&
en04000529.vsd
402
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQC9 VPQC71 VP_BB7_D VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 QC9_OP QC71_OP EXDU_ES BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_17_OP BC_27_OP EXDU_BC QB7_EX1 VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC71 VP_BB7_D VP_BC_17 QA1_CL QB1_CL QC9_OP QB9_CL QC71_OP EXDU_ES BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_17_CL EXDU_BC QB7_EX2
&
>1
1
QB7REL QB7ITL
&
RED 670
403
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC71 VP_BB7_D VP_BC_27 QA1_CL QB2_CL QC9_OP QB9_CL QC71_OP EXDU_ES BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_27_CL EXDU_BC QB7_EX3 VPQC9 VPQC71 QC9_CL QC71_CL EXDU_ES QB7_EX4 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB9 QB1_OP QB2_OP QB9_OP VPQB7 VPQB9 VPVOLT QB7_OP QB9_OP VOLT_OFF
&
>1
&
&
1 1
&
1
QC9REL QC9ITL
en04000531.vsd
404
RED 670
Section 11 Control
QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2 QB7_OP QB7_CL VPQB7 QB1_OP QB2_OP VPQB1 VPQB2 >1 &
QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR VPQB7TR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB12TR
en04000532.vsd
11.4.4.4
RED 670
405
Section 11 Control
Signal QC71_CL BB7_D_OP BC_12_CL BC_17_OP BC_17_CL BC_27_OP BC_27_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VP_BB7_D VP_BC_12 VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 EXDU_ES EXDU_BPB EXDU_BC QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 QB7_EX3 QB7_EX4 Description Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed position Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own bay are open A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA7 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA7 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are valid No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches No transm error from any bay with disconnectors on WA7 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7
406
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Table 209:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB9REL QB9ITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QB7REL QB7ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR VPQB7TR VPQB12TR
11.4.5
11.4.5.1
RED 670
407
Section 11 Control
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) WA7 (C) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 QB20 QB7
QC2
en04000514.vsd
Figure 215:
11.4.5.2
Function block
IG01ABC_BC QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QB20_OP QB20_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL BBT R_OP BC_12_CL VP_BBT R VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_12 EXDU_BC QA1O_EX1 QA1O_EX2 QA1O_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB20_EX1 QB20_EX2 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 QA1OPREL QA1OPIT L QA1CLREL QA1CLIT L QB1REL QB1IT L QB2REL QB2IT L QB7REL QB7IT L QB20REL QB20IT L QC1REL QC1IT L QC2REL QC2IT L QB1OPT R QB1CLT R QB220OT R QB220CT R QB7OPT R QB7CLT R QB12OPT R QB12CLT R BC12OPT R BC12CLT R BC17OPT R BC17CLT R BC27OPT R BC27CLT R VPQB1T R VQB220T R VPQB7T R VPQB12T R VPBC12T R VPBC17T R VPBC27T R
en05000350.vsd
Figure 216:
IG function block
408
RED 670
Section 11 Control
11.4.5.3 Logic diagram
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB20_OP QB20_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL VPQB1 QB1_OP QA1O_EX1 VPQB20 QB20_OP QA1O_EX2 VP_BBTR BBTR_OP EXDU_12 QA1O_EX3 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB7 VPQB20 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL ABC_BC =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & & >1
1
VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB20 VPQB7 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 VPQC21 VPQC71 QA1OPREL QA1OPITL
&
en04000533.vsd
RED 670
409
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QB2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQB2 VP_BC_12 QB2_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB1_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX3
&
>1
1
QB1REL QB1ITL
&
&
en04000534.vsd
410
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQB1 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB2_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX3
&
>1
1
QB2REL QB2ITL
&
&
en04000535.vsd
RED 670
411
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQB20 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC71 QA1_OP QB20_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC71_OP EXDU_ES QB7_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC71 QC2_CL QC71_CL EXDU_ES QB7_EX2 VPQA1 VPQB7 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB7_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB20_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QC2_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB20_EX2
&
>1
1
QB7REL QB7ITL
&
&
>1
1
QB20REL QB20ITL
&
en04000536.vsd
412
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQB1 VPQB20 VPQB7 VPQB2 QB1_OP QB20_OP QB7_OP QB2_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB20_OP QB2_OP VPQB20 VPQB2 QB7_OP QB7_CL VPQB7 QB1_OP QB2_OP VPQB1 VPQB2 QA1_OP QB1_OP QB20_OP VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB20 QA1_OP QB1_OP QB7_OP VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB7 QA1_OP QB2_OP QB7_OP VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQB7
&
1 1
& &
QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB220OTR QB220CTR VQB220TR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR VPQB7TR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB12TR BC12OPTR BC12CLTR VPBC12TR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR VPBC17TR BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VPBC27TR
en04000537.vsd
11.4.5.4
RED 670
413
Section 11 Control
Signal QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QB20_OP QB20_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL BBTR_OP BC_12_CL VP_BBTR VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_12 EXDU_BC QA1O_EX1 QA1O_EX2 QA1O_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB20_EX1 QB20_EX2 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 Description QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB7 is in open position QB7 is in closed position QB20 is in open position QB20 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open position Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed position No busbar transfer is in progress A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/WA2 busbars No transmission error from any other bus coupler bay External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB20 External condition for apparatus QB20 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7
414
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Table 211:
Signal QA1OPREL QA1OPITL QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QB7REL QB7ITL QB20REL QB20ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB220OTR QB220CTR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR BC12OPTR BC12CLTR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VPQB1TR VQB220TR VPQB7TR VPQB12TR
RED 670
415
Section 11 Control
Signal VPBC12TR VPBC17TR VPBC27TR Description Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are valid
11.4.6
11.4.6.1
en04000515.vsd
Figure 217:
416
RED 670
Section 11 Control
11.4.6.2 Function block
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB3_OP QB3_CL QB4_OP QB4_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_BC QA1_EX1 QA1_EX2 QA1_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 IE01AB_TRAFO QA1CLREL QA1CLIT L QB1REL QB1IT L QB2REL QB2IT L QC1REL QC1IT L QC2REL QC2IT L QB1OPT R QB1CLT R QB2OPT R QB2CLT R QB12OPT R QB12CLT R VPQB1T R VPQB2T R VPQB12T R
en05000358.vsd
Figure 218:
IE function block
RED 670
417
Section 11 Control
11.4.6.3 Logic diagram
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB3_OP QB3_CL QB4_OP QB4_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQB3 VPQB4 VPQC3 QA1_EX2 QC3_OP QA1_EX3 QC1_CL QC2_CL QC3_CL QA1_EX1 AB_TRAFO =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 &
1
VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQB3 VPQB4 VPQC3 VPQC11 VPQC21 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL
>1 &
en04000538.vsd
418
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC11 QA1_OP QB2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQB2 VPQC3 VP_BC_12 QB2_CL QC3_OP BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB1_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC2_CL QC3_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX3
&
>1
1
QB1REL QB1ITL
&
&
en04000539.vsd
RED 670
419
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQB1 VPQC3 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL QC3_OP BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB2_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC2_CL QC3_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX3
&
>1
1
QB2REL QB2ITL
&
&
en04000540.vsd
420
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB3 VPQB4 QB1_OP QB2_OP QB3_OP QB4_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2 QB1_OP QB2_OP VPQB1 VPQB2
&
1 1
>1 &
11.4.6.4
RED 670
421
Section 11 Control
Signal BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_BC QA1_EX1 QA1_EX2 QA1_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 Description A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches No transmission error from any bus coupler bay External condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2
Table 213:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR VPQB12TR
422
RED 670
QC1
QB1 QA1
QB2
QC2
QC3
QC4
A1A2_BS
en04000516.vsd
Figure 219:
11.4.7.2
Function block
IH01A1A2_BS QA1_OP QA1OPREL QA1_CL QA1OPIT L QB1_OP QA1CLREL QB1_CL QA1CLIT L QB2_OP QB1REL QB2_CL QB1IT L QC3_OP QB2REL QC3_CL QB2IT L QC4_OP QC3REL QC4_CL QC3IT L S1QC1_OP QC4REL S1QC1_CL QC4IT L S2QC2_OP S1S2OPT R S2QC2_CL S1S2CLT R BBT R_OP QB1OPT R VP_BBT R QB1CLT R EXDU_12 QB2OPT R EXDU_ES QB2CLT R QA1O_EX1 VPS1S2T R QA1O_EX2 VPQB1T R QA1O_EX3 VPQB2T R QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 en05000348.vsd
Figure 220:
IH function block
RED 670
423
Section 11 Control
11.4.7.3 Logic diagram
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL VPQB1 QB1_OP QA1O_EX1 VPQB2 QB2_OP QA1O_EX2 VP_BBTR BBTR_OP EXDU_12 QA1O_EX3 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQA1 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPS1QC1 QA1_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP S1QC1_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQC3 VPS1QC1 QC3_CL S1QC1_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX2 A1A2_BS =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & & >1
1
&
en04000542.vsd
424
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPS2QC2 QA1_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP S2QC2_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQC4 VPS2QC2 QC4_CL S2QC2_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX2 VPQB1 VPQB2 QB1_OP QB2_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2 QB1_OP QB2_OP QA1_OP VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQA1
&
>1
1
QB2REL QB2ITL
&
&
1 1
QC3REL QC3ITL QC4REL QC4ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR
>1 &
11.4.7.4
RED 670
425
Section 11 Control
Signal QC3_OP QC3_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL BBTR_OP VP_BBTR EXDU_12 EXDU_ES QA1O_EX1 QA1O_EX2 QA1O_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 Description QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QC4 is in open position QC4 is in closed position QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position No busbar transfer is in progress Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer No transm error from any bay connected to busbar 1 and 2 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2
Table 215:
Signal QA1OPREL QA1OPITL QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QC4REL QC4ITL S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR QB1OPTR QB1CLTR
426
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Signal QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPS1S2TR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR Description QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position Status of the app. between bus section 1 and 2 are valid Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
11.4.8
11.4.8.1
QC1
QC2
A1A2_DC
en04000492.vsd
Figure 221:
11.4.8.2
Function block
II01A1A2_DC QB_OP QB_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBCL_EX1 QBCL_EX2 QBOP_EX1 QBOP_EX2 QBOP_EX3 QBOPREL QBOPIT L QBCLREL QBCLIT L DCOPT R DCCLT R VPDCT R
en05000349.vsd
Figure 222:
II function block
RED 670
427
Section 11 Control
11.4.8.3 Logic diagram
A1A2_DC QB_OP QB_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 VPS1_DC S1QC1_OP S2QC2_OP S1DC_OP EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBOP_EX1 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 VPS2_DC S1QC1_OP S2QC2_OP S2DC_OP EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBOP_EX2 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 S1QC1_CL S2QC2_CL EXDU_ES QBOP_EX3 =1 VPQB VPDCTR DCOPTR DCCLTR =1 =1 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2
&
>1
1
QBOPREL QBOPITL
&
&
en04000544.vsd
428
RED 670
Section 11 Control
11.4.8.4
RED 670
429
Section 11 Control
Table 217:
Signal QBOPREL QBOPITL QBCLREL QBCLITL DCOPTR DCCLTR VPDCTR
11.4.9
11.4.9.1
QC
en04000504.vsd
Figure 223:
11.4.9.2
Function block
IJ01BB_ES QC_OP QC_CL BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB QCREL QCITL BBESOPTR BBESCLTR
en05000347.vsd
Figure 224:
IJ function block
430
RED 670
Section 11 Control
11.4.9.3 Logic diagram
BB_ES VP_BB_DC BB_DC_OP EXDU_BB QC_OP QC_CL QCREL QCITL BBESOPTR BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd
&
11.4.9.4
Table 219:
Signal QCREL QCITL BBESOPTR BBESCLTR
11.4.10
11.4.10.1
RED 670
431
Section 11 Control
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QC1 QA1 DB_BUS_A QC2 QB61 QB62 QC3 QB9 QC9 QC5 QA2 DB_BUS_B QB2 QC4
DB_LINE
en04000518.vsd
Figure 225:
Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined. DB_LINE is the connection from the line to the circuit breaker parts that are connected to the busbars. DB_BUS_A and DB_BUS_B are the connections from the line to the busbars.
11.4.10.2
Function block
IB01DB_BUS_A QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLITL QB1_OP QB61REL QB1_CL QB61ITL QB61_OP QB1REL QB61_CL QB1ITL QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1ITL QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2ITL QC3_OP QB1OPTR QC3_CL QB1CLTR QC11_OP VPQB1TR QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 en05000354.vsd
Figure 226:
IB function block
432
RED 670
Section 11 Control
IA01DB_LINE QA1_OP QA1_CL QA2_OP QA2_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9REL QB9ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QC9REL QC9ITL
en05000356.vsd
Figure 227:
IA function block
IC01DB_BUS_B QA2_OP QA2CLREL QA2_CL QA2CLITL QB2_OP QB62REL QB2_CL QB62ITL QB62_OP QB2REL QB62_CL QB2ITL QC4_OP QC4REL QC4_CL QC4ITL QC5_OP QC5REL QC5_CL QC5ITL QC3_OP QB2OPTR QC3_CL QB2CLTR QC21_OP VPQB2TR QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 en05000355.vsd
Figure 228:
IC function block
11.4.10.3
Logic diagrams
RED 670
433
Section 11 Control
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VPQB61 VPQB1 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QB61_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QC2_CL QC3_CL QB61_EX2 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX2
VPQA1 VPQB61 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC11 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL
&
&
>1
1
QB1REL QB1ITL
&
en04000547.vsd
434
RED 670
Section 11 Control
&
1 1
RED 670
435
Section 11 Control
QA1_OP QA1_CL QA2_OP QA2_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQA1 VPQA2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC9 QA1_OP QA2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX1
VPQA1 VPQA2 VPQB61 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQB62 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQB9 VPQC3 VPQC9 VPVOLT QB9REL QB9ITL
&
en04000549.vsd
436
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC9 VPQB62 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC9_OP QB62_OP QB9_EX2 VPQA2 VPQB61 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC9 QA2_OP QB61_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX3 VPQC3 VPQC9 VPQB61 VPQB62 QC3_OP QC9_OP QB61_OP QB62_OP QB9_EX4 VPQC3 VPQC9 QC3_CL QC9_CL QB9_EX5
&
>1
&
&
&
en04000550.vsd
RED 670
437
Section 11 Control
VPQB61 VPQB62 VPQB9 QB61_OP QB62_OP QB9_OP VPQB9 VPVOLT QB9_OP VOLT_OFF
&
1
QC3REL QC3ITL
&
1
QC9REL QC9ITL
en04000551.vsd
438
RED 670
Section 11 Control
QA2_OP QA2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VPQB62 VPQB2 VPQA2 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC3 QA2_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC3_OP QB62_EX1 VPQC5 VPQC3 QC5_CL QC3_CL QB62_EX2 VPQA2 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC21 QA2_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQC4 VPQC21 QC4_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX2
VPQA2 VPQB62 VPQB2 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC3 VPQC21 QA2CLREL QA2CLITL QB62REL QB62ITL
&
&
>1
1
QB2REL QB2ITL
&
en04000552.vsd
RED 670
439
Section 11 Control
&
1 1
11.4.10.4
Table 221:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL
440
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Signal QB61ITL QB1REL QB1ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR Description Switching of QB61 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
Table 222:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QA2_OP QA2_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON QB9_EX1
RED 670
441
Section 11 Control
Signal QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 Description External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9
Table 223:
Signal QB9REL QB9ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QC9REL QC9ITL
Table 224:
Signal QA2_OP QA2_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2
442
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Table 225:
Signal QA2CLREL QA2CLITL QB62REL QB62ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC4REL QC4ITL QC5REL QC5ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR
11.4.11
11.4.11.1
RED 670
443
Section 11 Control
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QC1 QA1 QC2 QB6 BH_LINE_A QC3 QB6 QC3 BH_LINE_B QA1 QC2 QB2 QC1
QB61
QA1
QB62
QB9 QC9
BH_CONN en04000513.vsd
Figure 229:
Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker and a half switchyard layout.
11.4.11.2
Function blocks
444
RED 670
Section 11 Control
IL01BH_LINE_A QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLITL QB6_OP QB6REL QB6_CL QB6ITL QB1_OP QB1REL QB1_CL QB1ITL QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1ITL QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2ITL QC3_OP QC3REL QC3_CL QC3ITL QB9_OP QB9REL QB9_CL QB9ITL QC9_OP QC9REL QC9_CL QC9ITL CQA1_OP QB1OPTR CQA1_CL QB1CLTR CQB61_OP VPQB1TR CQB61_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 en05000352.vsd
Figure 230:
IL function block
RED 670
445
Section 11 Control
IM01BH_LINE_B QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLIT L QB6_OP QB6REL QB6_CL QB6IT L QB2_OP QB2REL QB2_CL QB2IT L QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1IT L QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2IT L QC3_OP QC3REL QC3_CL QC3IT L QB9_OP QB9REL QB9_CL QB9IT L QC9_OP QC9REL QC9_CL QC9IT L CQA1_OP QB2OPT R CQA1_CL QB2CLT R CQB62_OP VPQB2T R CQB62_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VOLT _OFF VOLT _ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 en05000353.vsd
Figure 231:
IM function block
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL 1QC3_OP 1QC3_CL 2QC3_OP 2QC3_CL QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2
IK01BH_CONN QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL QB62REL QB62ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL
en05000351.vsd
Figure 232:
IK function block
11.4.11.3
446
Logic diagrams
Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670
Section 11 Control
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL CQB61_OP CQB61_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQB1 VPQB6 VPQB9 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QB6_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QC2_CL QC3_CL QB6_EX2
VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 VPCQB61 VPQC11 VPVOLT QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL
&
en04000554.vsd
RED 670
447
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX2 VPQB1 VPQB6 QB1_OP QB6_OP VPQB6 VPQB9 VPCQB61 QB6_OP QB9_OP CQB61_OP VPQA1 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQB61 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 QB9_EX1 QB6_OP QB9_EX2 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QB9_EX3
&
>1
1
QB1REL QB1ITL
&
&
1 1
&
1
&
>1
QB9REL QB9ITL
>1 &
en04000555.vsd
448
RED 670
Section 11 Control
CQB61_OP QB9_EX4 CQA1_OP CQC1_OP CQC2_OP QB9_EX5 QC9_OP QC3_OP QB9_EX6 VPQC9 VPQC3 QC9_CL QC3_CL QB9_EX7 VPQB9 VPVOLT QB9_OP VOLT_OFF QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1
>1 &
&
>1
&
&
RED 670
449
Section 11 Control
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL CQB62_OP CQB62_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQB2 VPQB6 VPQB9 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QB6_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QC2_CL QC3_CL QB6_EX2
VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 VPCQB62 VPQC21 VPVOLT QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL
&
en04000557.vsd
450
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQC1 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX2 VPQB2 VPQB6 QB2_OP QB6_OP VPQB6 VPQB9 VPCQB62 QB6_OP QB9_OP CQB62_OP VPQA1 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQB62 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 QB9_EX1 QB6_OP QB9_EX2 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QB9_EX3
&
>1
1
QB2REL QB2ITL
&
&
1 1
&
1
&
>1
QB9REL QB9ITL
>1 &
en04000558.vsd
RED 670
451
Section 11 Control
CQB62_OP QB9_EX4 CQA1_OP CQC1_OP CQC2_OP QB9_EX5 QC9_OP QC3_OP QB9_EX6 VPQC9 VPQC3 QC9_CL QC3_CL QB9_EX7 VPQB9 VPVOLT QB9_OP VOLT_OFF QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2
>1 &
&
>1
&
&
452
RED 670
Section 11 Control
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL 1QC3_OP 1QC3_CL 2QC3_OP 2QC3_CL VPQB61 VPQB62 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VP1QC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP 1QC3_OP QB61_EX1 VPQC1 VP1QC3 QC1_CL 1QC3_CL QB61_EX2 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VP2QC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP 2QC3_OP QB62_EX1 VPQC2 VP2QC3 QC2_CL 2QC3_CL QB62_EX2 VPQB61 VPQB62 QB61_OP QB62_OP
VPQA1 VPQB61 VPQB62 VPQC1 VPQC2 VP1QC3 VP2QC3 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL
&
&
>1
1
QB62REL QB62ITL
&
&
1 1
11.4.11.4
RED 670
453
Section 11 Control
Table 226:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQB61_OP CQB61_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4
454
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Signal QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 Description External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9
Table 227:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL QB1REL QB1ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QB9REL QB9ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR
Table 228:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP
RED 670
455
Section 11 Control
Signal QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQB62_OP CQB62_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 Description QC2 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QB9 is in open position QB9 is in closed position QC9 is in open position QC9 is in closed position QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC21 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9
Table 229:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL
456
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Signal QB2REL QB2ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QB9REL QB9ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR Description Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden Switching of QC3 is allowed Switching of QC3 is forbidden Switching of QB9 is allowed Switching of QB9 is forbidden Switching of QC9 is allowed Switching of QC9 is forbidden QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
Table 230:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL 1QC3_OP 1QC3_CL 2QC3_OP 2QC3_CL QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2
RED 670
457
Section 11 Control
Table 231:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL QB62REL QB62ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL
11.5
11.5.1
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (GGIO)
Introduction
The Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (LSR, or the selector switch function block, as it is also known) is used within the CAP tool in order to get a selector switch functionality similar with the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and extended purchase portfolio. The virtual selector switches eliminate all these problems.
11.5.2
Principle of operation
The selector switch can be operated either from the control menu on the Local HMI or with logic prepared in the configuration. The LSR has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the UP input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in ascending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When a signal is received on the DOWN input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in descending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated). Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, in case of UP or DOWN operation, the previously active output will be deactivated. Also, depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the output activation.
458
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Repeated down or up when end position has been reached will give repeated pulses on the selected step. This can e.g. be used to have multiple activations on two position switches. One can block the function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input. The LSR function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actual position number. The positions names are fully settable by the user.
RED 670
459
Figure 233:
460
RED 670
Table 233:
Signal SWPOS01 SWPOS02 SWPOS03 SWPOS04 SWPOS05 SWPOS06 SWPOS07 SWPOS08 SWPOS09 SWPOS10 SWPOS11 SWPOS12 SWPOS13 SWPOS14 SWPOS15 SWPOS16 SWPOS17 SWPOS18 SWPOS19 SWPOS20 SWPOS21 SWPOS22 SWPOS23 SWPOS24 SWPOS25 SWPOS26 SWPOS27 SWPOS28
RED 670
461
Section 11 Control
Signal SWPOS29 SWPOS30 SWPOS31 SWPOS32 SWPOSN NAME01 NAME02 NAME03 NAME04 NAME05 NAME06 NAME07 NAME08 NAME09 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 NAME17 NAME18 NAME19 NAME20 NAME21 NAME22 NAME23 NAME24 NAME25 NAME26 NAME27 NAME28 NAME29 NAME30 NAME31 NAME32 Description Selector switch position 29 Selector switch position 30 Selector switch position 31 Selector switch position 32 Switch position (integer). User define string for position 1 User define string for position 2 User define string for position 3 User define string for position 4 User define string for position 5 User define string for position 6 User define string for position 7 User define string for position 8 User define string for position 9 User define string for position 10 User define string for position 11 User define string for position 12 User define string for position 13 User define string for position 14 User define string for position 15 User define string for position 16 User define string for position 17 User define string for position 18 User define string for position 19 User define string for position 20 User define string for position 21 User define string for position 22 User define string for position 23 User define string for position 24 User define string for position 25 User define string for position 26 User define string for position 27 User define string for position 28 User define string for position 29 User define string for position 30 User define string for position 31 User define string for position 32
11.5.5
462
Setting parameters
Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670
Section 11 Control
Table 234:
Parameter StopAtExtremes
Table 235:
Parameter Operation NrPos OutType tPulse tDelay
11.6
11.6.1
11.6.2
Principle of operation
Upon receiving the input signals, the DPGGIO function block will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 (via its non-transparent-to-CAP user outputs) to the equipment or system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, one must use other tools, described in the Application Manual, Chapter 2: Engineering of the IED and define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.
11.6.3
Function block
DP01DPGGIO OPEN CLOSE VALID POSITION
en07000200.vsd
Figure 234:
DP function block
RED 670
463
Table 237:
Signal POSITION
11.6.5
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
464
RED 670
12.1
12.1.1
Introduction
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults, a scheme communication logic is provided. All types of communication schemes e.g. permissive underreach, permissive overreach, blocking, intertrip etc. are available. The built-in communication module (LDCM) can be used for scheme communication signalling when included. Logic for loss of load and/or local acceleration in co-operation with autoreclose function is also provided for application where no communication channel is available.
RED 670
465
12.1.2.1
Blocking scheme
The principal of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote terminal. The received signal, which shall be connected to CR, is used to not release the zone to be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input CACC, see figure 235. In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the settable timer tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip, see figure 235. The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip by activating the input BLKTR, Block of carrier send by activating the input BLKCS.
CACC CR tCoord
AND
TRIP
en05000512.vsd
Figure 235:
12.1.2.2
466
RED 670
CACC CR
tCoord
AND
TRIP
en05000513.vsd
Figure 236:
The permissive underreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned for blocking scheme above.
12.1.2.3
12.1.2.4
Unblocking scheme
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used. The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal CRG, which must always be present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 237. This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission. The carrier received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal is present again.
RED 670
467
en05000746.vsd
Figure 237:
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Off: No restart: The unblocking function is out of operation Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored If CRG disappears a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG) Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecure will be ignored It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent signalling
12.1.2.5
Intertrip scheme
In the direct inter-trip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an underreaching zone that is tripping the line. The received signal CR is directly transferred to a TRIP for tripping without local criteria. The signal is further processed in the tripping logic. In case of single-pole tripping in multi-phase systems, a phase selection is performed.
12.1.2.6
468
RED 670
AND
OR
CRL CRL
1
200 ms t
t
150 ms
AND AND
LCG
OR
AND
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
OR
CS
AND
CACC Schemetype = Permissive OR CSOR
tCoord
OR
25 ms t
TRIP
OR
AND
AND
tSendMin
OR AND
SchemeType = Blocking BLKCS
AND
en05000515.vsd
Figure 238:
RED 670
469
en05000332.vsd
Figure 239:
12.1.4
Table 239:
Signal TRIP CS CRL LCG
12.1.5
Setting parameters
470
RED 670
Table 240:
Parameter Operation SchemeType
tCoord
0.001
0.035
Co-ordination time for blocking communication scheme Minimum duration of a carrier send signal Operation mode of unblocking logic Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection
tSendMin Unblock
0.001 -
0.100 Off
s -
tSecurity
0.001
0.035
12.1.6
Technical data
Table 241:
Function Scheme type
Co-ordination time for blocking communication scheme Minimum duration of a carrier send signal Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection Operation mode of unblocking logic
12.2
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
RED 670
471
Function block name: ZCALANSI number: 85 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZCRWPSCH
12.2.1
Introduction
The current reversal function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line. The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated, received carrier signal together with local under voltage criteria and no reverse zone operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back to accelerate the sending end.
12.2.2
12.2.2.1
Principle of operation
Current reversal logic
The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRLV to recognize the fault on the parallel line. When the reverse zone has been activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev. This makes it possible for the carrier receive signal to reset before the carrier aided trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see figure 240.
Figure 240:
The preventing of sending carrier send signal CS and activating of the TRIP in the scheme communication block ZCOM is carried out by connecting the IRLV signal to input BLOCK in the ZCOM function. The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set to zero.
472
RED 670
Figure 241:
When an echo function is used in both terminals, a spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-up of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms. An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo&Trip, together with the WEI function and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 242.
RED 670
473
Figure 242:
12.2.3
Function block
ZCALZCRWPSCH U3P BLOCK IRVBLK IRV WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2 VTSZ CBOPEN CRL IRVL TRWEI TRWEIL1 TRWEIL2 TRWEIL3 ECHO
en05000334.vsd
Figure 243:
12.2.4
474
RED 670
Table 243:
Signal IRVL TRWEI TRWEIL1 TRWEIL2 TRWEIL3 ECHO
12.2.5
Setting parameters
Table 244:
Parameter CurrRev
tPickUpRev tDelayRev
0.001 0.001
0.020 0.060
s s
WEI
Off
0.001 0.05 1
0.010 400.00 70
s kV %UB
UPN<
10 - 90
70
%UB
12.2.6
Technical data
Table 245:
Function Detection level phase to neutral voltage Detection level phase to phase voltage Reset ratio Table continued on next page
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Range or value (10-90)% of Ubase (10-90)% of Ubase <105% Accuracy 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur -
RED 670
475
12.3
12.3.1
Introduction
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no communication channel is available, local acceleration logic (ZCLC) can be used. This logic enables fast fault clearing during certain conditions, but naturally, it can not fully replace a communication channel. The logic can be controlled either by the auto re-closer (zone extension) or by the loss of load current (loss-of-load acceleration).
12.3.2
12.3.2.1
Principle of operation
Zone extension
The overreaching zone is connected to the input -EXACC. For this reason, configure the ARREADY functional input to a READY functional output of a used autoreclosing function or via the selected binary input to an external autoreclosing device, see figure 244. This will allow the overreaching zone to trip instantaneously.
476
RED 670
Figure 244:
After the auto-recloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state, there will be no ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step distance time functions. In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching zone range, an unwanted auto-reclosing cycle will occur. The step distance function at the reclosing attempt will prevent an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed. On the other hand, at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by instantaneous zone (normally zone 1) only the first trip will be "instantaneous". The function will be blocked if the input BLOCK is activated (common with loss of load acceleration).
12.3.2.2
Loss-of-load acceleration
When the "acceleration" is controlled by a loss of load, the overreaching zone used for "acceleration" connected to LLACC is not allowed to trip "instantaneously" during normal non-fault system conditions. When all three-phase currents have been above the set value MinCurr for more than setting tLowCurr, an overreaching zone will be allowed to trip "instantaneously" during a fault condition when one or two of the phase currents will become low due to a three phase trip at the opposite terminal, see figure 245. The current measurement is performed internally and the STILL signal becomes logical one under the described conditions. The load current in a healthy phase is in this way used to indicate the tripping at the opposite terminal. Note that this function will not operate in case of three-phase faults, because none of the phase currents will be low when the opposite terminal is tripped.
RED 670
477
Figure 245:
Breaker closing signals can if decided be connected to block the function during normal closing.
12.3.3
Function block
ZCLCZCLCPLAL I3P BLOCK ARREADY NDST EXACC BC LLACC TRZE TRLL
en05000333.vsd
Figure 246:
12.3.4
478
RED 670
Table 247:
Signal TRZE TRLL
12.3.5
Setting parameters
Table 248:
Parameter Operation IBase LoadCurr
LossOfLoad
Off
ZoneExtension
Off
MinCurr
%IB
tLowCurr tLoadOn
0.001 0.001
0.200 0.000
s s
tLoadOff
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
12.4
RED 670
479
12.4.2
Principle of operation
The directional residual overcurrent protection (TEF) is configured to give input information, i.e. directional fault detection signals, to the EFC logic: CACC: Signal to be used for tripping of the communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward overreach step of STFW. CSBLK: Signal to be used for sending block signal in the blocking communication scheme, normally the start signal of a reverse overreach step of STRV. CSUR: Signal to be used for sending permissive signal in the underreach permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward underreach step of STINn, where n corresponds to the underacting step. CSOR: Signal to be used for sending permissive signal in the overreach permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward overreach step of STINn, where n corresponds to the overreach step.
In addition to this a signal from the autoreclosing function should be configured to the BLKCS input for blocking of the function at a single phase reclosing cycle.
12.4.2.1
Blocking scheme
In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional element detects an earth fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional element operates, it trips after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received from the other line end. The time delay, normally 30 40 ms, depends on the communication transmission time and a chosen safety margin. One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency) is needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for zero
480
RED 670
and positive sequence source impedances, the channel can be shared with the impedance-measuring system, if that system also works in the blocking mode. The power line carrier communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal attenuation will occur due to the fault. Blocking schemes are particular favorable for three-terminal applications if there is no zero-sequence outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to current reversals because the received carrier signal is maintained long enough to avoid unwanted operation due to current reversal. There is never any need for weakend-infeed logic, because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no blocking signal is received from the weak end. The fault clearing time is however generally longer for a blocking scheme than for a permissive scheme. If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no blocking signal comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (carrier receive) the TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.
Figure 247:
12.4.2.2
RED 670
481
impedance) is about equal at both ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance measuring and the directional earth-fault current system of the healthy line may detect a fault in different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping. Common channels cannot be used when the weak-end-infeed function is used in the distance or earth fault protection. In case of an internal earth fault, the forward directed measuring element operates and sends a permissive signal to the remote end via the CS output (carrier send). Local tripping is permitted when the forward direction measuring element operates and a permissive signal is received via the CR binary input (carrier receive). The permissive scheme can of either underreach or overreach type. In the underreach alternative an underreach directional residual overcurrent measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive send signal CSUR. In the overreach alternative an overreach directional residual overcurrent measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive send signal CSOR. Also the underreach signal CSUR can initiate sending.
12.4.2.3
Unblocking scheme
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used. The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal CRG, which must always be present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 248. This
482
RED 670
also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission. The carrier received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal is present again.
CR 1 CRG 200 ms t AND OR tSecurity t 150 ms t AND LCG >1 CRL
en05000746.vsd
Figure 248:
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Off: No restart: The unblocking function is out of operation Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored If CRG disappeares a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG) Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecure will be ignored It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent signalling
12.4.3
Function block
EFC1ECPSCH BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CSBLK CACC CSOR CSUR CR CRG TRIP CS CRL LCG
en05000659.vsd
Figure 249:
RED 670
483
Table 250:
Signal TRIP CS CRL LCG
12.4.5
Setting parameters
Table 251:
Parameter Operation SchemeType
tCoord
0.001
0.035
Communication scheme coordination time Minimum duration of a carrier send signal Operation mode of unblocking logic Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection
tSendMin Unblock
0.001 -
0.100 Off
s -
tSecurity
0.001
0.035
484
RED 670
12.5
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)
Function block name: EFCAANSI number: 85 IEC 61850 logical node name: ECRWPSCH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
12.5.1
Introduction
The EFCA additional communication logic is a supplement to the EFC scheme communication logic for the residual overcurrent protection. To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the line, the directional earth-fault protection function can be supported with logic, that uses communication channels. REx670 terminals have for this reason available additions to scheme communication logic. If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both terminals, overreaching permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on the other line. This lack of security can result in a total loss of interconnection between the two buses. To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current-reversal logic (transient blocking logic) can be used. Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent protection, can basically operate only when the protection in the remote terminal can detect the fault. The detection requires a sufficient minimum residual fault current, out from this terminal. The fault current can be too low due to an opened breaker or high positive and/or zero sequence source impedance behind this terminal. To overcome these conditions, weak end infeed (WEI) echo logic is used.
RED 670
485
Principle of operation
Directional comparison logic function
The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreach and permissive overreach schemes. The circuits for the permissive overreach scheme contain logic for current reversal and weak end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the blocking overreach scheme. Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth-fault protection module to get back-up tripping in case the communication equipment malfunctions and prevents operation of the directional comparison logic. Figure 250 and figure 251 show the logic circuits. Connect the necessary signal from the auto-recloser for blocking of the directional comparison scheme, during a single-phase auto-reclosing cycle, to the BLOCK input of the directional comparison module.
12.5.2.2
Figure 250:
12.5.2.3
486
RED 670
The weak end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction element, connected to WEIBLK via an OR-gate. See figure 251. If neither the forward nor the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms. The weakend-infeed logic echoes back the received permissive signal. See figure 251. If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms, the fault current is sufficient for the IED to detect the fault with the earthfault function that is in operation.
Figure 251:
With the Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to above. Further, it activates the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo conditions are fulfilled and the neutral point voltage is above the set operate value for 3U0> The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the earth-fault function that is in operation.
Figure 252:
The weak end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of 200 ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo signal to be sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing action if the weak end echo is selected for both line ends.
RED 670
487
en05000335.vsd
Figure 253:
12.5.4
Table 254:
Signal IRVL TRWEI ECHO CR
12.5.5
Setting parameters
488
RED 670
Table 255:
Parameter CurrRev
tPickUpRev tDelayRev
0.001 0.001
0.020 0.060
s s
WEI
Off
0.001 0.05 1
0.010 400.00 70
s kV %UB
UPN<
10 - 90
70
%UB
12.5.6
Technical data
Table 256:
Function Operate voltage 3Uo for WEI trip Reset ratio Operate time for current reversal Delay time for current reversal Coordination time for weak-end infeed logic
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)
Range or value (5-70)% of Ubase >95% (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.00060.000) s Accuracy 1.0% of Ur 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms
RED 670
489
490
Section 13 Logic
Section 13 Logic
About this chapter
This chapter describes primarily tripping and trip logic functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
13.1
I->O
13.1.1
Introduction
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved in the tripping of the fault. It provides the pulse prolongation to ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation with autoreclosing functions. The trip function block includes functionality for evolving faults and breaker lockout.
13.1.2
Principle of operation
The duration of a trip output signal from the TRPx function is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to secure the breaker opening. For three-pole tripping, TRPx function has a single input (TRIN) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions within the IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs, are routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.
RED 670
491
Section 13 Logic
BLOCK TRIN
Operation Mode = On Program = 3Ph
tTripMin AND t
OR
TRIP
en05000789.vsd
Figure 254:
The TRPx function for single- and two-pole tripping has additional phase segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter inputs enable single- and two-pole tripping for those functions which do not have their own phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single trip output and not phase segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase segregated trip inputs of the expanded TRPx function. Examples of such protection functions are the residual overcurrent protections. The expanded TRPx function has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping (e.g. carrier-aided tripping commands from the scheme communication logic), and one for earth fault tripping (e.g. tripping output from a residual overcurrent protection). Additional logic secures a three-pole final trip command for these protection functions in the absence of the required phase selection signals. The expanded TRPx function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 (besides the trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these signals. There are also separate output signals indicating single pole, two pole or three pole trip. These signals are important for cooperation with the auto-reclosing function. The expanded TRPx function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special input is also provided which disables single- and two-pole tripping, forcing all tripping to be three-pole. In multi-breaker arrangements, one TRPx function block is used for each breaker. This can be the case if single pole tripping and auto-reclosing is used. The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal from another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three pole trip, if desired. It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of closing only the choice is by setting TripLockout.
492
RED 670
Section 13 Logic
13.1.2.1 Logic diagram
TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 1PTRZ 1PTREF TRIN Program = 3ph
OR OR OR AND
RSTTRIP - cont.
en05000517.vsd
Figure 255:
Figure 256:
RED 670
493
Section 13 Logic
Figure 257:
494
RED 670
Section 13 Logic
Figure 258:
Figure 259:
RED 670
495
en05000707.vsd
Figure 260:
13.1.4
Table 258:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2
496
RED 670
Section 13 Logic
Signal TRL3 TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT Description Trip signal from phase L3 Tripping single-pole Tripping two-pole Tripping three-pole Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)
13.1.5
Setting parameters
Table 259:
Parameter Operation Program
TripLockout
Off
AutoLock
Off
tTripMin
0.001
0.150
13.1.6
Technical data
Table 260:
Function Trip action Minimum trip pulse length Timers
13.2
13.2.1
RED 670
497
Section 13 Logic
The matrix and the physical outputs will be seen in the PCM 600 engineering tool and this allows the user to adapt the signals to the physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs.
13.2.2
Principle of operation
Tripping matrix logic block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide the necessary grouping of connected input signals (e.g. for tripping and alarming purposes) to the three output signals from the function block. Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules: 1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (i.e. INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the first output signal (i.e. OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT1 via setting parameters "PulseTime1", "OnDelayTime1" & "OffDelayTime1". when any one of second 16 inputs signals (i.e. INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the second output signal (i.e. OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT2 via setting parameters "PulseTime2", "OnDelayTime2" & "OffDelayTime2" when any one of all 32 input signals (i.e. INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the third output signal (i.e. OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT3 via setting parameters "PulseTime3", "OnDelayTime3" & "OffDelayTime3".
2.
3.
498
RED 670
Section 13 Logic
Figure 261:
Output signals from this function block are typically connected to other logic blocks or directly to output contacts from the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit breaker(s) the pulse time delay on that output signal shall be set to approximately 0,150s in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils. Twelve such function blocks are available in the IED.
RED 670
499
en05000370.vsd
Figure 262:
TR function block
13.2.4
500
RED 670
Section 13 Logic
Signal INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 Description Binary input 14 Binary input 15 Binary input 16 Binary input 17 Binary input 18 Binary input 19 Binary input 20 Binary input 21 Binary input 22 Binary input 23 Binary input 24 Binary input 25 Binary input 26 Binary input 27 Binary input 28 Binary input 29 Binary input 30 Binary input 31 Binary input 32
Table 262:
Signal OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3
13.2.5
Setting parameters
Table 263:
Parameter Operation PulseTime1 OnDelayTime1 OffDelayTime1
RED 670
501
Section 13 Logic
Parameter PulseTime2 OnDelayTime2 OffDelayTime2 PulseTime3 OnDelayTime3 OffDelayTime3 Range 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Unit s s s s s s Description Output pulse time for output 2 Output on delay time for output 2 Output off delay time for output 2 Output pulse time for output 3 Output on delay time for output 3 Output off delay time for output 3
13.3
13.3.1
13.3.2
Figure 263:
Table 264:
Signal INPUT
Table 265:
Signal OUT
13.3.3
502
RED 670
Section 13 Logic
The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.
O001OR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 OUT NOUT
en04000405.vsd
Figure 264:
Table 266:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6
OR function block
Input signals for the OR (O001-) function block
Description Input 1 to OR gate Input 2 to OR gate Input 3 to OR gate Input 4 to OR gate Input 5 to OR gate Input 6 to OR gate
Table 267:
Signal OUT NOUT
13.3.4
en04000406.vsd
Figure 265:
RED 670
503
Section 13 Logic
Table 268:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4N
Table 269:
Signal OUT NOUT
13.3.5
Figure 266:
Table 270:
Signal INPUT
TM function block
Input signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block
Description Input to timer
Table 271:
Signal ON OFF
Table 272:
Parameter T
504
RED 670
Figure 267:
Table 273:
Signal INPUT
Table 274:
Signal OUT
Table 275:
Parameter T
13.3.7
Figure 268:
Table 276:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2
RED 670
505
Section 13 Logic
Table 277:
Signal OUT NOUT
13.3.8
Figure 269:
Table 278:
Signal SET RESET
SM function block
Input signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block
Description Set input Reset input
Table 279:
Signal OUT NOUT
Table 280:
Parameter Memory
13.3.9
506
RED 670
Section 13 Logic
Figure 270:
Table 281:
Signal INPUT
GT function block
Input signals for the GT (GT01-) function block
Description Input to gate
Table 282:
Signal OUT
Table 283:
Parameter Operation
13.3.10
Figure 271:
Table 284:
Signal INPUT
TS function block
Input signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block
Description Input to timer
Table 285:
Signal ON OFF
RED 670
507
Section 13 Logic
Table 286:
Parameter Operation t
13.3.11
Technical data
Table 287:
Logic block LogicAND LogicOR LogicXOR LogicInverter LogicSRMemory LogicGate LogicTimer LogicPulseTimer LogicTimerSet LogicLoopDelay
13.4
13.4.1
13.4.2
Principle of operation
There are eight outputs from the FIXD function block: OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value; ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value; INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0; INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1; REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value; STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value; ZEROSMPL
508
RED 670
Section 13 Logic
is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value; GRP_OFF is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value; The function does not allow any settings and therefore its not present in PCM 600. For examples on how to use each type of output in the configuration, please read the Application Manual.
13.4.3
Function block
FIXDFixedSignals OFF ON INTZERO INTONE REALZERO STRNULL ZEROSMPL GRP_OFF en05000445.vsd
Figure 272:
13.4.4
13.4.5
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
RED 670
509
510
Section 14 Monitoring
Section 14 Monitoring
About this chapter
This chapter describes the functions that handle measurements, events and disturbances. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.
14.1
Measurements (MMXU)
Function block name: SVRxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CVMMXU IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
Function block name: CPxx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CMMXU
Function block name: VPxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VMMXU
Function block name: CSQx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CMSQI
RED 670
511
Section 14 Monitoring
Function block name: VSQx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VMSQI
14.1.1
Introduction
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM 600 or to station level (i.e. IEC61850). The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system. Additionally it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers (i.e. CTs & VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally it can be used to verify proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function. The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, i.e the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of noise in the inputs. Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based on periodic reporting. The measuring function, SVR, provides the following power system quantities: P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power PF: power factor U: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude I: phase current magnitude F: power system frequency
512
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) U: phase-phase voltages (magnitude and angle)
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get class 0.5 presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600. The measuring functions CSQ and VSQ provides sequential quantities: I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle) U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and angle).
The SVR function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental frequency phasors (i.e. DFT values) of the measured current and voltage signals. The measured power quantities are available either as instantaneously calculated quantities or averaged values over a period of time (i.e. low pass filtered) depending on the selected settings. The IED can be provided with up to 3 SVR-, 10 CP-, 5 VP-, 3 CSQ- and 3 VSQmeasurement functions.
14.1.2
14.1.2.1
Principle of operation
Measurement supervision
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the preprocessing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and built-in options. The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations: Locally by means of the local HMI Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM 600 or over the station bus (IEC 61850-8) Internally by connecting the analog output signals to the Disturbance Report function
All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section "Analog inputs".
RED 670
513
Section 14 Monitoring
Zero point clamping
Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL12-31, I1, I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0).). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the service values within SVR. Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function block by means of four built-in operating thresholds, see figure 273. The monitoring has two different modes of operating: Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
Hysteresis
en05000657.vsd
Figure 273:
Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may be connected to a measurement expander block (XP) to get measurement supervision as binary signals. The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 273. The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring
514
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.
The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurement is continuous for each measured separately, but the reporting of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic reporting modes are available: Cyclic reporting (Cyclic) Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band) Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)
Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting (XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or integral dead-band reporting.
Y Value Reported (1st) Value Reported Value Reported Value Reported
Y3 Y2 Y4
Value Reported
Y1
Y5
t (*)
t (*)
t (*)
t (*)
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Value 5
en05000500.vsd
Figure 274:
Periodic reporting
If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is larger than the Y predefined limits that are set by user (XZeroDb), then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level, if this is detected by a new measured value. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 275 shows an example with the amplitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
RED 670
515
Section 14 Monitoring
Y1
t
99000529.vsd
Figure 275:
After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the Y set limits.
The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit (XZeroDb), figure 276, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other. The last value reported, Y1 in figure 276 serves as a basic value for further measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5). The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with small variations that can last for relatively long periods.
516
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Value Reported
A7
Y5 Value Reported t
99000530.vsd
Y1
Figure 276:
14.1.2.2
The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:
Set value for Formula used for complex, threeparameter phase power calculation Mode 1 L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 I L1 + U L 2 I L 2 + U L 3 I L 3
* * *
Comment
U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3 I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3
Used when three phaseto-earth voltages are available Used when three two phase-tophase voltages are available Used when only symmetrical three phase power shall be measured Used when only UL1L2 phase-tophase voltage is available
Arone
S = U L1 L 2 I L1 - U L 2 L 3 I L 3
* *
U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2 I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2
PosSeq
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq
*
U =
3 U PosSeq
I = I PosSeq
4 L1L2
S = U L1 L 2 ( I L1 - I L 2 )
* *
U = U L1 L 2 I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2
RED 670
517
Section 14 Monitoring
Set value for Formula used for complex, threeparameter phase power calculation Mode 5 L2L3 Formula used for voltage and current magnitude calculation Comment
S = U L 2 L3 ( I L 2 - I L3 )
* *
U = U L2 L3 I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2
Used when only UL2L3 phase-tophase voltage is available Used when only UL3L1 phase-tophase voltage is available Used when only UL1 phase-toearth voltage is available Used when only UL2 phase-toearth voltage is available Used when only UL3 phase-toearth voltage is available
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3 - I L1 )
* *
U = U L 3 L1 I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2
L1
S = 3 U L1 I L1
*
U =
3 U L1
I = I L1
8 L2
S = 3 U L2 I L2
*
U =
3 U L2
I = IL2
9 L3
S = 3 U L3 I L3
*
U =
3 U L3
I = I L3
* means complex conjugated value
It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes (i.e. 1 & 2) the measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes (i.e. from 3 to 9) it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following formulas:
P = Re( S )
(Equation 83)
Q = Im( S )
(Equation 84)
S = S =
P +Q
2
(Equation 85)
PF = cosj = P S
(Equation 86)
518
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is leading the voltage phasor. Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
Measured currents and voltages used in the SVR function can be calibrated to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 277.
% of Ir -10 IAmpComp5 IAmpComp30 IAmpComp100 -10 5 30 0-5%: Constant 5-30-100%: Linear >100%: Constant 100 Measured current % of Ir Amplitude compensation
Angle compensation
en05000652.vsd
Figure 277:
Calibration curves
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, U, I & power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 519
Section 14 Monitoring
the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
X = k X Old + (1 - k ) X Calculated
where: X XOld is a new measured value (i.e. P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle (Equation 87)
XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.
In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not present, it is possible for the end user to set the magnitude IGenZeroDb level for current and voltage measurement UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either current or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power (i.e. P, Q & S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurement supervision functionality, included in the SVR function, is using these values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision, see section "Measurement supervision"). In order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the complete measurement chain (i.e. CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors etc.) it is possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude (i.e. setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle (i.e. setting parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (i.e. complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (e.g. around rated power) can be done at site. However to perform this calibration it is necessary to have external power meter of the high accuracy class available.
Compensation facility
Directionality
In CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shown in the following figure 278.
520
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Busbar
Protected Object
en05000373.vsd
Figure 278:
That practically means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar. In some application, like for example when power is measured on the secondary side of the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements. This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
Frequency
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as an output.
14.1.2.3
RED 670
521
Section 14 Monitoring
14.1.2.4 Voltage phasors (MMXU, VP)
The VP function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents when it comes to 0.5 calibrations, see above. Phase to phase voltages (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ULxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
14.1.2.5
14.1.3
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
SVR1CVMMXU I3P U3P S S_RANGE P_INST P P_RANGE Q_INST Q Q_RANGE PF PF_RANGE ILAG ILEAD U U_RANGE I I_RANGE F F_RANGE en05000772.vsd
Figure 279:
522
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
CP01CMMXU I3P IL1 IL1RANG IL1ANGL IL2 IL2RANG IL2ANGL IL3 IL3RANG IL3ANGL en05000699.vsd
Figure 280:
VP01VMMXU U3P
CP function block
Figure 281:
CSQ1CMSQI I3P
VP function block
Figure 282:
VSQ1VMSQI U3P
CS function block
Figure 283:
VS function block
14.1.4
RED 670
523
Section 14 Monitoring
Table 290:
Signal S S_RANGE P P_RANGE Q Q_RANGE PF PF_RANGE ILAG ILEAD U U_RANGE I I_RANGE F F_RANGE
Table 291:
Signal I3P
Table 292:
Signal IL1 IL1RANG IL2 IL2RANG IL3 IL3RANG
Table 293:
Signal U3P
524
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Table 294:
Signal UL12 UL12RANG UL23 UL23RANG UL31 UL31RANG
Table 295:
Signal I3P
Table 296:
Signal 3I0 3I0RANG I1 I1RANG I2 I2RANG
Table 297:
Signal U3P
Table 298:
Signal 3U0 3U0RANG U1 U1RANG U2 U2RANG
RED 670
525
0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000
SLimHyst
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
PDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% W
PZeroDb PHiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000
1 0.001
0 900000000.000
PHiLim
0.001
800000000.000
PLowLim
0.001
-800000000.000
PLowLowLim
0.001
-900000000.000
PMin
0.001
-1000000000.000
526
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter PMax Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 1000000000.000 Unit W Description Maximum value
PRepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
PLimHyst
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
QDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
QZeroDb QHiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Off On -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 1 - 99999 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.05 - 2000.00 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001
0 900000000.000
QHiLim
0.001
800000000.000
VAr
QLowLim
0.001
-800000000.000
VAr
QLowLowLim
0.001
-900000000.000
VAr
QMin
0.001
-1000000000.000
VAr
Operation QMax
0.001
On 1000000000.000
VAr
IBase QRepTyp
1 -
3000 Cyclic
A -
UBase QLimHyst
0.05 0.001
400.00 5.000
kV %
Base setting for voltage level in kV Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Selection of measured current and voltage
Mode
L1, L2, L3
RED 670
527
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter PowAmpFact Range 0.000 - 6.000 Step 0.001 Default 1.000 Unit Description Amplitude factor to scale power calculations Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I &U Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, U and I Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range Zero point clamping in % of Ubase High High limit (physical value) Zero point clamping in % of Ibase High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type
PowAngComp
-180.0 - 180.0
0.1
0.0
Deg
0.00 - 1.00
0.01
0.00
PFDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% % % -
PFZeroDb UGenZeroDb PFHiHiLim IGenZeroDb PFHiLim PFLowLim PFLowLowLim PFMin PFMax PFRepTyp
0 - 100000 1 - 100 -3.000 - 3.000 1 - 100 -3.000 - 3.000 -3.000 - 3.000 -3.000 - 3.000 -1.000 - 0.000 0.000 - 1.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000
PFLimHyst
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value)
UDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% V
UZeroDb UHiHiLim
1 0.001
0 460000.000
UHiLim
0.001
450000.000
ULowLim
0.001
380000.000
528
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter ULowLowLim Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 350000.000 Unit V Description Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
UMin
0.001
0.000
UMax
0.001
400000.000
Maximum value
URepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
ULimHyst
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
IDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% A
IZeroDb IHiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001
0 900.000
IHiLim
0.001
800.000
ILowLim
0.001
-800.000
ILowLowLim
0.001
-900.000
IMin
0.001
0.000
IMax
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IRepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
ILimHyst
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value)
FrDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% Hz
FrZeroDb FrHiHiLim
1 0.001
0 65.000
RED 670
529
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter FrHiLim Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 63.000 Unit Hz Description High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
FrLowLim
0.001
47.000
Hz
FrLowLowLim
0.001
45.000
Hz
FrMin
0.001
0.000
Hz
FrMax
0.001
70.000
Hz
Maximum value
FrRepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
FrLimHyst
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
530
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Table 300:
Parameter IL1DbRepInt
1 0.001
On 0 900.000
IBase IAmpComp5
1 0.001
3000 0.000
A %
IL1HiLim
0.001
800.000
IAmpComp30
0.001
0.000
IL1LowLim
0.001
-800.000
IAmpComp100
0.001
0.000
IL1LowLowLim
-10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000
0.001
-900.000
IAngComp5 IL1Min
0.001 0.001
0.000 0.000
Deg A
IAngComp30 IL1Max
0.001 0.001
0.000 1000.000
Deg A
IAngComp100 IL1RepTyp
0.001 -
0.000 Cyclic
Deg -
IL1LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
IL1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s
RED 670
531
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter IL1AngRepTyp Range Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300 Step Default Cyclic Unit Description Reporting type
IL2DbRepInt
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% A
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
IL2ZeroDb IL2HiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001
0 900.000
IL2HiLim
0.001
800.000
IL2LowLim
0.001
-800.000
IL2LowLowLim
0.001
-900.000
IL2Min
0.001
0.000
IL2Max
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IL2RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
IL2LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type
IL2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
IL2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
IL3DbRepInt
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% A
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value)
IL3ZeroDb IL3HiHiLim
1 0.001
0 900.000
IL3HiLim
0.001
800.000
IL3LowLim
0.001
-800.000
532
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter IL3LowLowLim Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default -900.000 Unit A Description Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
IL3Min
0.001
0.000
IL3Max
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IL3RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
IL3LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type
IL3AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
IL3AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Table 301:
Parameter UL12DbRepInt
1 0.001
On 0 460000.000
UBase UAmpComp5
0.05 0.001
400.00 0.000
kV %
UL12HiLim
0.001
450000.000
UAmpComp30
0.001
0.000
UL12LowLim
-10000000000.00 010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
RED 670
533
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter UAmpComp100 Range -10.000 - 10.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit % Description Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
UL12LowLowLim
-10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000
0.001
350000.000
UL12Min
0.001
0.000
UL12Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL12RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL12LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type
UL12AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
UL12AngRepTyp
Cyclic
UL23DbRepInt
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% V
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
UL23ZeroDb UL23HiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001
0 460000.000
UL23HiLim
0.001
450000.000
UL23LowLim
0.001
380000.000
UL23LowLowLim
0.001
350000.000
UL23Min
0.001
0.000
UL23Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL23RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL23LimHys
0.001
5.000
534
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter UL23AnDbRepInt Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type
UL23AngRepTyp
Cyclic
UL31DbRepInt
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% V
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
UL31ZeroDb UL31HiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001
0 460000.000
UL31HiLim
0.001
450000.000
UL31LowLim
0.001
380000.000
UL31LowLowLim
0.001
350000.000
UL31Min
0.001
0.000
UL31Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL31RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL31LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type
UL31AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
UL31AngRepTyp
Cyclic
RED 670
535
Section 14 Monitoring
Table 302:
Parameter 3I0DbRepInt
3I0ZeroDb 3I0HiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001
0 900.000
3I0HiLim
0.001
800.000
3I0LowLim
0.001
-800.000
3I0LowLowLim
0.001
-900.000
3I0Min
0.001
0.000
3I0Max
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
3I0RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
3I0LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Operation Mode On / Off Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type
Operation 3I0AngDbRepInt
Off On 1 - 300
Off 10
s,%, %s -
3I0AngRepTyp
Cyclic
I1DbRepInt
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% A
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value)
I1ZeroDb I1HiHiLim
1 0.001
0 900.000
I1HiLim
0.001
800.000
I1LowLim
0.001
-800.000
536
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter I1LowLowLim Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default -900.000 Unit A Description Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
I1Min
0.001
0.000
I1Max
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
I1RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
I1LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type
I1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
I1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
I2DbRepInt
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% A
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
I2ZeroDb I2HiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
1 0.001
0 900.000
I2HiLim
0.001
800.000
I2LowLim
0.001
-800.000
I2LowLowLim
0.001
-900.000
I2Min
0.001
0.000
I2Max
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
I2RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
RED 670
537
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter I2LimHys Range 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit % Description Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type
I2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
I2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Table 303:
Parameter 3U0DbRepInt
3U0ZeroDb 3U0HiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001
0 460000.000
3U0HiLim
0.001
450000.000
3U0LowLim
0.001
380000.000
3U0LowLowLim
0.001
350000.000
3U0Min
0.001
0.000
3U0Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
3U0RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
3U0LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Operation Mode On / Off Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type
Operation 3U0AngDbRepInt
Off On 1 - 300
Off 10
s,%, %s -
3U0AngRepTyp
Cyclic
538
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter U1DbRepInt Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% V Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
U1ZeroDb U1HiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001
0 460000.000
U1HiLim
0.001
450000.000
U1LowLim
0.001
380000.000
U1LowLowLim
0.001
350000.000
U1Min
0.001
0.000
U1Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
U1RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
U1LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type
U1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
U1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
U2DbRepInt
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% V
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value)
U2ZeroDb U2HiHiLim
1 0.001
0 460000.000
U2HiLim
0.001
450000.000
U2LowLim
0.001
380000.000
U2LowLowLim
0.001
350000.000
RED 670
539
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter U2Min Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit V Description Minimum value
U2Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
U2RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
U2LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type
U2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
U2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
14.1.6
Technical data
Table 304:
Function Frequency Voltage Connected current Active power, P Reactive power, Q Apparent power, S Power factor, cos ()
Measurements (MMXU)
Range or value (0.95-1.05) fr (0.1-1.5) Ur (0.2-4.0) Ir 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur 0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur 0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur 0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur 0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir Accuracy 2.0 mHz 0.5% of Ur at U Ur 0.5% of U at U > Ur 0.5% of Ir at I Ir 0.5% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Sr at S Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr 1.0% of Sr at S Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr 1.0% of Sr at S Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr 0.02
14.2
540
RED 670
14.2.2
Principle of operation
The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six counters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each positive edge of the input respectively. The maximum count up speed is 10 pulses per second. The maximum counter value is 10 000. For counts above 10 000 the counter will stop at 10 000 and no restart will take place. To not risk that the flash memory is worn out due to too many writings, a mechanism for limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the product. This however gives as a result that it can take long time, up to several minutes, before a new value is stored in the flash memory. And if a new CNTGGIO value is not stored before auxiliary power interruption, it will be lost. The CNTGGIO stored values in flash memory will however not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption. The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six counters are blocked. The input can for example be used for blocking the counters at testing. All inputs are configured via PCM 600.
14.2.2.1
Reporting
The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI. Refer to Operators manual for procedure. Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI and a binary input. Refer to Operators manual for procedure. Reading of content and resetting of the counters can also be performed remotely, for example PCM 600 or MicroSkada.
14.2.2.2
Design
The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six counters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each positive edge of the input respectively. The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six counters are blocked.
RED 670
541
Section 14 Monitoring
The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six counters are set to 0.
14.2.3
Function block
CNT1CNTGGIO BLOCK COUNTER1 COUNTER2 COUNTER3 COUNTER4 COUNTER5 COUNTER6 RESET en05000345.vsd
Figure 284:
14.2.4
Input signals
Table 305:
Signal BLOCK COUNTER1 COUNTER2 COUNTER3 COUNTER4 COUNTER5 COUNTER6 RESET
14.2.5
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
14.2.6
Technical data
Table 306:
Function Counter value Max. count up speed
542
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
14.3
14.3.1
14.3.2
Principle of operation
The main purpose of the event function block is to generate events when the state or value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state transition, for which event generation is enabled. Each event function block has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given a name from the CAP configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create single events, but are also intended for double indication events. The function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events. The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals have a resolution corresponding to the execution cyclicity of the event function block. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have a resolution of 1 ms. The outputs from the event function block are formed by the reading of status, events and alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each input is intended to be used by the station level. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears. The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The event mask can be set individually for each input channel. These settings are available:
RED 670
543
Section 14 Monitoring
It is possible to define which part of the event function block that shall generate events. This can be performed individually for the LON and SPA communication respectively. For each communication type these settings are available: Off Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16
For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It is possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input channel. To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate the event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block will be removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66% of the maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel equals 3 times the configurable setting MaxEvPerSec.
544
RED 670
14.3.4
RED 670
545
Section 14 Monitoring
Signal INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 Description Input 14 Input 15 Input 16 User defined string for input 1 User defined string for input 2 User defined string for input 3 User defined string for input 4 User defined string for input 5 User defined string for input 6 User defined string for input 7 User defined string for input 8 User defined string for input 9 User defined string for input 10 User defined string for input 11 User defined string for input 12 User defined string for input 13 User defined string for input 14 User defined string for input 15 User defined string for input 16
14.3.5
Setting parameters
Table 308:
Parameter SPAChannelMask
LONChannelMask
Off
EventMask1
AutoDetect
EventMask2
AutoDetect
546
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter EventMask3 Range NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect Step Default AutoDetect Unit Description Reporting criteria for input 3
EventMask4
AutoDetect
EventMask5
AutoDetect
EventMask6
AutoDetect
EventMask7
AutoDetect
EventMask8
AutoDetect
EventMask9
AutoDetect
EventMask10
AutoDetect
EventMask11
AutoDetect
EventMask12
AutoDetect
EventMask13
AutoDetect
RED 670
547
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter EventMask14 Range NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Step Default AutoDetect Unit Description Reporting criteria for input 14
EventMask15
AutoDetect
EventMask16
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1 MinRepIntVal2 MinRepIntVal3 MinRepIntVal4 MinRepIntVal5 MinRepIntVal6 MinRepIntVal7 MinRepIntVal8 MinRepIntVal9 MinRepIntVal10 MinRepIntVal11 MinRepIntVal12 MinRepIntVal13 MinRepIntVal14 MinRepIntVal15 MinRepIntVal16
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s
Minimum reporting interval input 1 Minimum reporting interval input 2 Minimum reporting interval input 3 Minimum reporting interval input 4 Minimum reporting interval input 5 Minimum reporting interval input 6 Minimum reporting interval input 7 Minimum reporting interval input 8 Minimum reporting interval input 9 Minimum reporting interval input 10 Minimum reporting interval input 11 Minimum reporting interval input 12 Minimum reporting interval input 13 Minimum reporting interval input 14 Minimum reporting interval input 15 Minimum reporting interval input 16
14.4
548
Section 14 Monitoring
Function block name: FL--ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: LMBRFLO
14.4.1
Introduction
The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a persistent fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line. The built-in fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to the fault in percent, km or miles. The main advantage is the high accuracy achieved by compensating for load current and for the mutual zero sequence effect on double circuit lines. The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation of the distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault current, together with recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault position. The fault can be recalculated with new source data at the actual fault to further increase the accuracy. Specially on heavily loaded long lines (where the fault locator is most important) where the source voltage angles can be up to 35-40 degrees apart the accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced compensation included in fault locator.
14.4.2
Principle of operation
The Fault Locator (FL) in the IED is an essential complement to other monitoring functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with great accuracy. When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages are selected from the Trip Value Recorder data, thus the analog signals used by the fault locator must be among those connected to the disturbance report function. The analog configuration (channel selection) is performed using the parameter setting tool within PCM 600. The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and additional fault resistance.
RED 670
549
Section 14 Monitoring
DRP FL
en05000045.vsd
Figure 285:
Simplified network configuration with network data, required for settings of the fault location-measuring function.
If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a significant manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due to exceptional switching state in the immediate network, power generation out of order etc.), new values can be entered via the local HMI and a recalculation of the distance to the fault can be ordered using the algorithm described below. Its also possible to change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault can be achieved. The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in kilometers or miles as selected on the local HMI. The fault location is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the LHMI or PCM 600. Additional information is specified in symbols before the distance-to-fault figure:
* E > A non-compensated model was used for calculation Error, the fault was found outside the measuring range The fault is located beyond the line, in forward direction
14.4.2.1
Measuring Principle
For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-end infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the distance to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not done, the accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the amount of additional fault resistance. The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of double-end infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.
550
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
14.4.2.2 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault
Figure 286 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed from both ends with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume, that the fault occurs at a distance F from terminal A on a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is used for better clarification of the algorithm.
L F
ZA
A IA
pZL IF
IB
(1-p).ZL
ZB
UA
RF
xx01000171.vsd
Figure 286:
Where: IA IF
p
is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault, is the fault current and is a relative distance to the fault
(Equation 89)
Where: IFA DA is the change in current at the point of measurement, terminal A and is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A and the total fault current.
RED 670
551
Section 14 Monitoring
(Equation 90)
Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:
I FA - RF U A = I A p Z L + ------DA
(Equation 91)
Table 309:
Fault type: L1-N
3 -- D ( I L1A I 0A ) 2
3 -- D ( I L2A I 0A ) 2
L2-N
UL2A
IL2A + KN x INA
L3-N
UL3A
IL3A + KN x INA
3 -- D ( I L3A I0A ) 2
D IL 1 L 2 A
UL1A-UL2A UL2A-UL3A
D IL2L3A
L3-L1, L3-L1-N
UL3A-UL1A
IL3A - IL1A
D IL3L1A
The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is equal to:
Z0L Z 1L K N = ----------------------3 Z1L
(Equation 98)
DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current before the fault. In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted into the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm. For double lines, the fault equation is:
552
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
I FA - RF + I 0P Z 0M U A = I A p Z 1L + ------DA
(Equation 99)
Where: I0P Z0M DA is a zero sequence current of the parallel line, is a mutual zero sequence impedance and is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:
( 1 p ) ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B DA = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------2 ZA + Z L + 2 Z B
(Equation 101)
From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these two cases. Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 91 or 100 is a function of p, the general equation 100 can be written in the form:
p p K1 + K2 K3 RF = 0
2
(Equation 102)
Where:
UA ZB - + --------------------------+1 K 1 = --------------I A ZL Z L + ZA DD
(Equation 103)
UA ZB - -------------------------- + 1 K2 = ------------- IA Z L Z L + Z A DD
(Equation 104)
IF A ZA + ZB - -------------------------- + 1 K 3 = -------------- I A Z L Z 1 + ZA DD
(Equation 105)
and: RED 670 ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines. IA, IFA and UA are given in the above table. KN is calculated automatically according to equation 101. ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters. 553
Section 14 Monitoring
For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 102 applies to both single and parallel lines. Equation 102 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:
p p Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) R F Re ( K 3 ) = 0
2
(Equation 106)
p Im ( K1 ) + Im ( K 2 ) R F Im ( K3 ) = 0
(Equation 107)
If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 107, and then inserted to equation 106. According to equation 106, the relative distance to the fault is solved as the root of a quadratic equation. Equation 106 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, that gives an unequivocal figure for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should be selected. If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate the relative distance to the fault.
14.4.2.3
The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated impedance model, is influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is only used if the load compensated models do not function and the display indicates whether the non-compensated model was used when calculating the distance to the fault.
14.4.2.4
IEC 60870-5-103
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll fault location information from the IED to a master (i.e. station HSI). There are two outputs that must be connected to appropriate inputs on the function block I103StatFltDis, FLTDISTX gives distance to fault (reactance, according the standard) and CALCMADE gives a pulse (100 ms) when a result is obtainable on FLTDISTX output.
554
RED 670
Figure 287:
14.4.4
Table 311:
Signal FLTDISTX CALCMADE
14.4.5
Setting parameters
Table 312:
Parameter DrepChNoIL1
DrepChNoIL2
1 - 30
Ch
DrepChNoIL3
1 - 30
Ch
RED 670
555
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter DrepChNoIN Range 0 - 30 Step 1 Default 4 Unit Ch Description Recorder input number recording residual current, IN Recorder input number recording 3I0 on parallel line Recorder input number recording phase voltage, UL1 Recorder input number recording phase voltage, UL2 Recorder input number recording phase voltage, UL3
DrepChNoIP
0 - 30
Ch
DrepChNoUL1
1 - 30
Ch
DrepChNoUL2
1 - 30
Ch
DrepChNoUL3
1 - 30
Ch
Table 313:
Parameter R1A X1A R1B X1B R1L X1L R0L X0L R0M X0M LineLength
14.4.6
Technical data
556
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Table 314:
Function
14.5
14.5.1
Introduction
The functions MMXU (SVR, CP and VP), MSQI (CSQ and VSQ) and MVGGIO (MV) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value expander block (XP) has been introduced to be able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals i.e. below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic.
14.5.2
Principle of operation
The input signal must be connected to the RANGE-output of a measuring function block (MMXU, MSQI or MVGGIO). The function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according to table 315.
RED 670
557
Section 14 Monitoring
Table 315:
Measured supervised value is: Output: LOWLOW LOW NORMAL HIGH HIGHHIGH
14.5.3
Function block
RANGE XP01RANGE_XP HIGHHIGH HIGH NORMAL LO W LOWLOW en05000346.vsd
Figure 288:
XP function block
14.5.4
Table 317:
Signal HIGHHIGH HIGH NORMAL LOW LOWLOW
14.6
558
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Function block name: DRP--, DRA1- DRA4-, DRB1- DRB6ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ABRDRE
14.6.1
Introduction
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the disturbance report functionality. The disturbance report, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all selected analogue input and binary signals connected to the function block i.e. maximum 40 analogue and 96 binary signals. The disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions: Event List (EL) Indications (IND) Event recorder (ER) Trip Value recorder (TVR) Disturbance recorder (DR) Fault Locator (FL)
The function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration, starting conditions, recording times and large storage capacity. A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input in the DRAx or DRBy function blocks which is set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All signals from start of prefault time to the end of post-fault time, will be included in the recording. Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade format. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to get information about the recordings, but the disturbance report files may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.
14.6.2
Principle of operation
The disturbance report (DRP) is a common name for several facilities to supply the operator, analysis engineer, etc. with sufficient information about events in the system. The facilities included in the disturbance report are:
RED 670
559
Section 14 Monitoring
General disturbance information Indications (IND) Event recorder (ER) Event list (EL) Trip values (phase values) (TVR) Disturbance recorder (DR) Fault locator (FL)
Figure 289Figure "" shows the relations among Disturbance Report, included functions and function blocks. EL, ER and IND uses information from the binary input function blocks (DRB1- 6). TVR uses analog information from the analog input function blocks (DRA1-3) which is used by FL after estimation by TVR. The DR function acquires information from both DRAx and DRBx.
DRA1-- 4Disturbance Report DRP- A4RADR Analog signals Trip Value Rec Fault Locator RDRE FL01 FL
DRB1-- 6-
Disturbance Recorder
Binary signals
en05000124.vsd
Figure 289:
The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time etc. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 1-65536.
560
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Disturbance report
Record no. N
Indications
Trip values
Event recordings
Disturbance recording
Fault locator
Event list
en05000125.vsd
Figure 290:
Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is over-written by the new one. The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. The figure 291 shows number of recordings vs total recording time tested for a typical configuration, i.e. in a 50 Hz system its possible to record 100 where the average recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report (IND, ER, EL and TVR).
6,3 s 50 Hz
40
6,3 s 60 Hz
Figure 291:
Number of recordings.
Disturbance information
Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip values are available on the local human-machine interface (LHMI). To acquire a
RED 670
561
Section 14 Monitoring
complete disturbance report the use of a PC and PCM600 is required. The PC may be connected to the IED-front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports). Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the disturbance (not time-tagged). (See section "Indications (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)
Indications (IND)
The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the LHMI or PCM 600. (See section "Event recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)
The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via LHMI or PCM 600. (See section "Event list (RDRE)" for more detailed information.) The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and during the fault. (See section "Trip value recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)
The disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the fault. (See section "Disturbance recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.) The fault location function calculates the distance to fault. (See section "Fault locator (RFLO)" for more detailed information)
Time tagging
The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time tagging within the disturbance report
Recording times
The disturbance report (DRP) records information about a disturbance during a settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. The disturbance recorder (DR), the event recorder (ER) and indication function register disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time. The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording =
PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on which criterion stops the current disturbance recording
562
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
3
en05000487.vsd
Figure 292:
PreFaultRecT, 1 tFault, 2
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time. TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances.Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.
Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for external analog signals, i.e. signals from the analog input modules (TRM) and line differential communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and summation block (Sum3Ph). The last 10 channels may be connected to internally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA input signals, phase differential currents, bias currents etc.).
RED 670
563
Section 14 Monitoring
PRxxSMAI External analog signals TRM, LDCM SUxx GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN
DRA1A1RADR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 ... A4RADR INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 ... INPUT40
en05000653.vsd
DRA2A2RADR DRA3A3RADR
Internal analog signals T2Dx, T3Dx, REFx, HZDx, L3D, L6D, LT3D, LT6D SVRx, CPxx, VP0x, CSQx, VSQx, MVxx
Figure 293:
The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after configuration) available as an input signal on the DRAx- function block via the PRxx function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than the base sampling rate, the Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new updated sample is available. If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analogue configuration of the Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration). In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used. The preprocessor function block (PRxx) calculates the residual quantities in cases where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). PRxx makes the information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as a input signal the corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the PRxx-block. Connect the signals to the DRAx accordingly. For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.
564
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.
Binary signals
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by the disturbance report.The signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is selected to be recorded when: the corresponding function block is included in the configuration the signal is connected to the input of the function block
Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (operation=ON/OFF). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the local HMI (setLED=On/Off). The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers. The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with the LHMI IndicationMask=Show/Hide.
Trigger signals
The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions. A trigger can be of type: Manual trigger Binary-signal trigger Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, from PCM600 or via station bus (IEC61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to Operators manual for procedure.
Manual trigger
Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger (Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1).The binary signal must remain in a steady state for at least 15 ms to be valid. When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the disturbance report.
RED 670
565
Section 14 Monitoring
Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp, OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe. The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name. If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is separately performed for each channel. This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network. All under/over trig signal information is available on the LHMI and PCM600, see table 318.
Post Retrigger
The disturbance report function does not respond to any new trig condition, during a recording. Under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line. In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig = On)during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording. When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not start until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording a new complete recording will be fetched. The disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance recordings.
14.6.3
Function block
DRP-RDRE DRPOFF RECSTART RECMADE CLEARED MEMUSED en05000406.vsd
Figure 294:
566
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
DRA1A1RADR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 en05000430.vsd
Figure 295:
DRA4A4RADR INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 NAME31 NAME32 NAME33 NAME34 NAME35 NAME36 NAME37 NAME38 NAME39 NAME40 en05000431.vsd
Figure 296:
RED 670
567
Section 14 Monitoring
DRB1B1RBDR INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 en05000432.vsd
Figure 297:
14.6.4
Table 319:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5
Input signals for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function block, example for DRA1DRA3
Description Group signal for input 1 Group signal for input 2 Group signal for input 3 Group signal for input 4 Group signal for input 5
568
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Signal INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 Description Group signal for input 6 Group signal for input 7 Group signal for input 8 Group signal for input 9 Group signal for input 10 User define string for analogue input 1 User define string for analogue input 2 User define string for analogue input 3 User define string for analogue input 4 User define string for analogue input 5 User define string for analogue input 6 User define string for analogue input 7 User define string for analogue input 8 User define string for analogue input 9 User define string for analogue input 10
Table 320:
Signal INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 NAME31 NAME32 NAME33 NAME34 NAME35 NAME36 NAME37 NAME38 NAME39 NAME40
RED 670
569
Section 14 Monitoring
Table 321:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16
Input signals for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function block, example for DRB1DRB6
Description Binary channel 1 Binary channel 2 Binary channel 3 Binary channel 4 Binary channel 5 Binary channel 6 Binary channel 7 Binary channel 8 Binary channel 9 Binary channel 10 Binary channel 11 Binary channel 12 Binary channel 13 Binary channel 14 Binary channel 15 Binary channel 16 User define string for binary input 1 User define string for binary input 2 User define string for binary input 3 User define string for binary input 4 User define string for binary input 5 User define string for binary input 6 User define string for binary input 7 User define string for binary input 8 User define string for binary input 9 User define string for binary input 10 User define string for binary input 11 User define string for binary input 12 User define string for binary input 13 User define string for binary input 14 User define string for binary input 15 User define string for binary input 16
14.6.5
Setting parameters
570
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Table 322:
Parameter OpModeTest Operation PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT TimeLimit PostRetrig
ZeroAngleRef
Ch
Table 323:
Parameter Operation01 NomValue01
UnderTrigOp01
Off On
Off
UnderTrigLe01
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp01
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe01
0 - 5000
200
Operation02 NomValue02
0.1
Off 0.0
UnderTrigOp02
Off On
Off
RED 670
571
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter UnderTrigLe02 Range 0 - 200 Step 1 Default 50 Unit % Description Under trigger level for analogue cha 2 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 2 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 2 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 3 Use under level trig for analogue cha 3 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 3 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 3 (on) or not (off) Overtrigger level for analogue cha 3 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 4 Use under level trig for analogue cha 4 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 4 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 4 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 4 in % of signal Operation On/Off
OverTrigOp02
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe02
0 - 5000
200
Operation03 NomValue03
0.1
Off 0.0
UnderTrigOp03
Off On
Off
UnderTrigLe03
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp03
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe03
0 - 5000
200
Operation04 NomValue04
0.1
Off 0.0
UnderTrigOp04
Off On
Off
UnderTrigLe04
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp04
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe04
0 - 5000
200
Operation05
Off On
Off
572
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter NomValue05 Range 0.0 - 999999.9 Step 0.1 Default 0.0 Unit Description Nominal value for analogue channel 5 Use under level trig for analogue cha 5 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 5 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 5 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 5 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 6 Use under level trig for analogue cha 6 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 6 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 6 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 6 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 7 Use under level trig for analogue cha 7 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 7 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 7 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigOp05
Off On
Off
UnderTrigLe05
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp05
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe05
0 - 5000
200
Operation06 NomValue06
0.1
Off 0.0
UnderTrigOp06
Off On
Off
UnderTrigLe06
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp06
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe06
0 - 5000
200
Operation07 NomValue07
0.1
Off 0.0
UnderTrigOp07
Off On
Off
UnderTrigLe07
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp07
Off On
Off
RED 670
573
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter OverTrigLe07 Range 0 - 5000 Step 1 Default 200 Unit % Description Over trigger level for analogue cha 7 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 8 Use under level trig for analogue cha 8 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 8 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 8 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 8 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 9 Use under level trig for analogue cha 9 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 9 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 9 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 9 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 10 Use under level trig for analogue cha 10 (on) or not (off)
Operation08 NomValue08
0.1
Off 0.0
UnderTrigOp08
Off On
Off
UnderTrigLe08
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp08
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe08
0 - 5000
200
Operation09 NomValue09
0.1
Off 0.0
UnderTrigOp09
Off On
Off
UnderTrigLe09
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp09
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe09
0 - 5000
200
Operation10 NomValue10
0.1
Off 0.0
UnderTrigOp10
Off On
Off
574
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter UnderTrigLe10 Range 0 - 200 Step 1 Default 50 Unit % Description Under trigger level for analogue cha 10 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 10 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 10 in % of signal
OverTrigOp10
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe10
0 - 5000
200
Table 324:
Parameter Operation31 NomValue31
UnderTrigOp31
Off On
Off
UnderTrigLe31
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp31
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe31
0 - 5000
200
Operation32 NomValue32
0.1
Off 0.0
UnderTrigOp32
Off On
Off
UnderTrigLe32
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp32
Off On
Off
RED 670
575
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter OverTrigLe32 Range 0 - 5000 Step 1 Default 200 Unit % Description Over trigger level for analogue cha 32 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 33 Use under level trig for analogue cha 33 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 33 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 33 (on) or not (off) Overtrigger level for analogue cha 33 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 34 Use under level trig for analogue cha 34 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 34 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 34 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 34 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 35 Use under level trig for analogue cha 35 (on) or not (off)
Operation33 NomValue33
0.1
Off 0.0
UnderTrigOp33
Off On
Off
UnderTrigLe33
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp33
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe33
0 - 5000
200
Operation34 NomValue34
0.1
Off 0.0
UnderTrigOp34
Off On
Off
UnderTrigLe34
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp34
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe34
0 - 5000
200
Operation35 NomValue35
0.1
Off 0.0
UnderTrigOp35
Off On
Off
576
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter UnderTrigLe35 Range 0 - 200 Step 1 Default 50 Unit % Description Under trigger level for analogue cha 35 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 35 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 35 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 36 Use under level trig for analogue cha 36 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 36 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 36 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 36 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 37 Use under level trig for analogue cha 37 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 37 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 37 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 37 in % of signal Operation On/off
OverTrigOp35
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe35
0 - 5000
200
Operation36 NomValue36
0.1
Off 0.0
UnderTrigOp36
Off On
Off
UnderTrigLe36
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp36
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe36
0 - 5000
200
Operation37 NomValue37
0.1
Off 0.0
UnderTrigOp37
Off On
Off
UnderTrigLe37
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp37
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe37
0 - 5000
200
Operation38
Off On
Off
RED 670
577
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter NomValue38 Range 0.0 - 999999.9 Step 0.1 Default 0.0 Unit Description Nominal value for analogue channel 38 Use under level trig for analogue cha 38 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 38 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 38 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 38 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 39 Use under level trig for analogue cha 39 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 39 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 39 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 39 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 40 Use under level trig for analogue cha 40 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigOp38
Off On
Off
UnderTrigLe38
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp38
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe38
0 - 5000
200
Operation39 NomValue39
0.1
Off 0.0
UnderTrigOp39
Off On
Off
UnderTrigLe39
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp39
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe39
0 - 5000
200
Operation40 NomValue40
0.1
Off 0.0
UnderTrigOp40
Off On
Off
578
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter UnderTrigLe40 Range 0 - 200 Step 1 Default 50 Unit % Description Under trigger level for analogue cha 40 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 40 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 40 in % of signal
OverTrigOp40
Off On
Off
OverTrigLe40
0 - 5000
200
Setting parameters FUNCn and INFONOn (n=1-16) for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function are only available in the LHMI.
Table 325:
Parameter Operation01 TrigLevel01
IndicationMa01
Hide
SetLED01
Off
Operation02 TrigLevel02
Off Trig on 1
IndicationMa02
Hide
SetLED02
Off
Operation03 TrigLevel03
Off Trig on 1
RED 670
579
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter IndicationMa03 Range Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Step Default Hide Unit Description Indication mask for binary channel 3 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 3 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 4 Indication mask for binary channel 4 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 4 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 5 Indication mask for binary channel 5 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 5 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 6 Indication mask for binary channel 6 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 6 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 7 Indication mask for binary channel 7
SetLED03
Off
Operation04 TrigLevel04
Off Trig on 1
IndicationMa04
Hide
SetLED04
Off
Operation05 TrigLevel05
Off Trig on 1
IndicationMa05
Hide
SetLED05
Off
Operation06 TrigLevel06
Off Trig on 1
IndicationMa06
Hide
SetLED06
Off
Operation07 TrigLevel07
Off Trig on 1
IndicationMa07
Hide Show
Hide
580
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter SetLED07 Range Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Step Default Off Unit Description Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 7 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 8 Indication mask for binary channel 8 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 8 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 9 Indication mask for binary channel 9 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 9 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 10 Indication mask for binary channel 10 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 10 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 11 Indication mask for binary channel 11 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 11 Trigger operation On/Off
Operation08 TrigLevel08
Off Trig on 1
IndicationMa08
Hide
SetLED08
Off
Operation09 TrigLevel09
Off Trig on 1
IndicationMa09
Hide
SetLED09
Off
Operation10 TrigLevel10
Off Trig on 1
IndicationMa10
Hide
SetLED10
Off
Operation11 TrigLevel11
Off Trig on 1
IndicationMa11
Hide
SetLED11
Off
Operation12
Off
RED 670
581
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter TrigLevel12 Range Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Step Default Trig on 1 Unit Description Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 12 Indication mask for binary channel 12 Set red-LED on HMI for binary input 12 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 13 Indication mask for binary channel 13 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 13 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 14 Indication mask for binary channel 14 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 14 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 15 Indication mask for binary channel 15 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 15 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 16
IndicationMa12
Hide
SetLED12
Off
Operation13 TrigLevel13
Off Trig on 1
IndicationMa13
Hide
SetLED13
Off
Operation14 TrigLevel14
Off Trig on 1
IndicationMa14
Hide
SetLED14
Off
Operation15 TrigLevel15
Off Trig on 1
IndicationMa15
Hide
SetLED15
Off
Operation16 TrigLevel16
Off Trig on 1
582
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter IndicationMa16 Range Hide Show Off On 0 - 255 Step Default Hide Unit Description Indication mask for binary channel 16 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 16 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103)
SetLED16
Off
FUNCT1
FunT
FUNCT2
0 - 255
FunT
FUNCT3
0 - 255
FunT
FUNCT4
0 - 255
FunT
FUNCT5
0 - 255
FunT
FUNCT6
0 - 255
FunT
FUNCT7
0 - 255
FunT
FUNCT8
0 - 255
FunT
FUNCT9
0 - 255
FunT
FUNCT10
0 - 255
FunT
FUNCT11
0 - 255
FunT
FUNCT12
0 - 255
FunT
RED 670
583
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter FUNCT13 Range 0 - 255 Step 1 Default 0 Unit FunT Description Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNCT14
0 - 255
FunT
FUNCT15
0 - 255
FunT
FUNCT16
0 - 255
FunT
INFONO1
0 - 255
InfNo
INFONO2
0 - 255
InfNo
INFONO3
0 - 255
InfNo
INFONO4
0 - 255
InfNo
INFONO5
0 - 255
InfNo
INFONO6
0 - 255
InfNo
INFONO7
0 - 255
InfNo
INFONO8
0 - 255
InfNo
584
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter INFONO9 Range 0 - 255 Step 1 Default 0 Unit InfNo Description Information number for binary channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFONO10
0 - 255
InfNo
INFONO11
0 - 255
InfNo
INFONO12
0 - 255
InfNo
INFONO13
0 - 255
InfNo
INFONO14
0 - 255
InfNo
INFONO15
0 - 255
InfNo
INFONO16
0 - 255
InfNo
14.6.6
Technical data
Table 326:
Function Pre-fault time Post-fault time Limit time Maximum number of recordings Time tagging resolution Table continued on next page
RED 670
585
Section 14 Monitoring
Function Maximum number of analog inputs Maximum number of binary inputs Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value recorder per recording Maximum number of indications in a disturbance report Maximum number of events in the Event recording per recording Maximum number of events in the Event list Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of channels, typical value) Sampling rate Recording bandwidth Range or value 30 + 10 (external + internally derived) 96 30 Accuracy -
96 150 1000, first in - first out 340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz 1 kHz at 50 Hz 1.2 kHz at 60 Hz (5-300) Hz
14.7
14.7.1
14.7.2
Principle of operation
When a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status, the event list function stores input name, status and time in the event list in chronological order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal logic signals and binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwritten when a new event arrives. The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on the LHMI.
586
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
The event list function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder function, which is only active during a disturbance. The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the userdefined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and the event recorder function (ER). The event list is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL).
14.7.3
Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and uses information from the DRBx- block.
14.7.4
Input signals
The event list logs the same binary input signals as configured for the Disturbance Report function.
14.7.5
Technical data
Table 327:
Function Buffer capacity Resolution Accuracy Maximum number of events in the list
14.8
14.8.1
Indications (RDRE)
Introduction
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system it is important to know e.g. binary signals that have changed status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short perspective to get information via the LHMI in a straightforward way. There are three LEDs on the LHMI (green, yellow and red), which will display status information about the IED and the Disturbance Report function (trigged). The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance Report function that have changed status during a disturbance.
RED 670
587
Section 14 Monitoring
The indication information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in the IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get the information.
14.8.2
Principle of operation
The LED indications display this information: Green LED:
Steady light Flashing light Dark In Service Internal fail No power supply
Yellow LED:
Steady light Flashing light A disturbance report is triggered The IED is in test mode or in configuration mode
Red LED:
Steady light Trigged on binary signal N with SetLEDN=On
Indication list: The possible indicated signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance report function and disturbance recorder The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording period of the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic one or state changes from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list of indications. Signals are not time tagged. In order to be recorded in the list of indications the: the signal must be connected to binary input (DRB1-6) function block the DRP parameter Operation must be set On the DRP must be trigged (binary or analogue) the input signal must change state from logical 0 to 1 during the recording time.
Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when configuring the binary inputs. The name of the binary input signal that appears in the Indication function is the userdefined name assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in
588
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function (ER).
14.8.3
Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and uses information from the DRBx- block.
14.8.4
Input signals
The indication function may log the same binary input signals as the Disturbance Report function.
14.8.5
Technical data
Table 328:
Function Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications presented for single disturbance Maximum number of recorded disturbances
Indications
Value 96 100
14.9
14.9.1
RED 670
589
14.9.3
Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and uses information from the DRBx- block.
14.9.4
Input signals
The event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance Report function.
14.9.5
Technical data
Table 329:
Function Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in disturbance report Maximum number of disturbance reports Resolution Accuracy
590
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
14.10
14.10.1
14.10.2
Principle of operation
The trip value recorder (TVR) calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault amplitudes as well as the phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The parameter ZeroAngleRef points out which input signal is used as the angle reference. The calculated data is input information to the fault locator (FL). When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interception is searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The channel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest number. When a starting point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values of the complex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of the signals. If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used as the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one cycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as prefault and fault values. The name of the analog input signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function is the user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the Disturbance recorder function (DR).
RED 670
591
Section 14 Monitoring
The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FLOC) and managed in via the LHMI or PCM 600.
14.10.3
Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and uses information from the DRBx- block.
14.10.4
Input signals
The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to DRA1-3 (not DRA4).
14.10.5
Technical data
Table 330:
Function Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs Maximum number of disturbance reports
14.11
14.11.1
592
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
The disturbance recording information can be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analysed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
14.11.2
Principle of operation
Disturbance recording (DR) is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals. The binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals generated by the functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are input channels from the Transformer Input Module (TRM), Line Differential communication Module (LDCM) through the Signal Matrix Analog Input (SMAI) and possible summation (Sum3Ph) function blocks and some internally derived analog signals. For details, refer to section "Disturbance report (RDRE)". DR collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic buffer. The pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will continuously be overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer is determined by the set pre-fault recording time. Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and the data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long as the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the postfault time and it can be set in the disturbance report. The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory, intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the oldest recording is overwritten. The last 100 recordings are stored in the IED. The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance recording. A recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from analog inputs (over-/underlevel trig). A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for all functions within the disturbance report functionality.
14.11.2.1
The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation. The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are divided into three files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT).
RED 670
593
Section 14 Monitoring
The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the disturbance i.e. information from the Disturbance Report functions (ER, TVR and FL). The Disturbance Handling tool use this information and present the recording in a user-friendly way. General: Station name, object name and unit name Date and time for the trig of the disturbance Record number Sampling rate Time synchronization source Recording times Activated trig signal Active setting group
Analog: Signal names for selected analog channels Information e.g. trig on analog inputs Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating Over- or Undertrig: level and operation Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig CT direction
The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to interpret the data file. For example sampling rate, number of channels, system frequency, channel info etc. The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel for each sample in the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequence number and time stamp for each set of samples.
14.11.2.2
IEC 60870-5-103
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll disturbance recordings from the IED to a master (i.e. station HSI). The standard describes how to handle 8 disturbance recordings, 8 analog channels (4 currents and 4 voltages) using the public range and binary signals. The last 8 recordings, out of maximum 100, are available for transfer to the master. When the last one is transferred and acknowledged new recordings in the IED will appear, in the master points of view (even if they already where stored in the IED).
594
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
To be able to report 40 analog channels from the IED using IEC 60870-5-103 the first 8 channels are placed in the public range and the next 32 are placed in the private range. To comply the standard the first 8 must be configured according to table 331.
Table 331:
Signal IL1 IL2 IL3 IN UL1 UL2 UL3 UN
The binary signals connected to DRB1-DRB6 are reported by polling. The function blocks include function type and information number.
14.11.3
Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP-, DRAx and DRBx- block.
14.11.4
14.11.5
Setting parameters
For Setting parameters see table 322 - table 325.
14.11.6
Technical data
Table 332:
Function Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs Maximum number of binary inputs Maximum number of disturbance reports Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of channels, typical value)
RED 670
595
596
Section 15 Metering
Section 15 Metering
About this chapter
This chapter describes among others, Pulse counter logic which is a function used to meter externally generated binary pulses. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.
15.1
15.1.1
Introduction
The pulse counter logic function counts externally generated binary pulses, for instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read by the pulse counter function. A scaled service value is available over the station bus. The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered to achieve this functionality.
15.1.2
Principle of operation
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset. The integration time period can be set in the range from 30 seconds to 60 minutes and is synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI).
RED 670
597
Section 15 Metering
The pulse counter in REx670 supports unidirectional incremental counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialization of the IED. The reported value to station HMI over the LON bus contains Identity, Value, Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality consists of: Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error) Wrapped around Blocked Adjusted
The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is, the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database. The pulse counter function updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the function. The pulse counter function requires an binary input card, BIMp, that is specially adapted to the pulse counter function. Figure 298 shows the pulse counter function block with connections of the inputs and outputs.
SingleCmdFunc OUTx SingleCmdFunc OUTx I/O-module Pulse INPUT OUT Pulse length >1s Reset counter PulseCounter BLOCK INVALID RESTART READ_VAL BLOCKED NEW_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT NAME SCAL_VAL EVENT INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4
IEC EVENT
SMS settings 1.Operation = Off/On 2.tReporting = 0s...60min 3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events 4.Scale = 1-90000
Figure 298:
The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command blocks, which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected 598 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670
Section 15 Metering
to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second. The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary Input Module (BIM). The NAME input is used for a user-defined name with up to 13 characters. The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter. Each pulse counter function block has four binary output signals that can be connected to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event function block. The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration. The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED startup, in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during last integration cycle. The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There are two reasons why the counter is blocked: The BLOCK input is set, or The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.
The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was updated since last report. The SCAL_VAL signal consists of value, time and status information.
15.1.3
Function block
PC01PCGGIO BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT INVALID RESTART BLOCKED NEW_VAL NAME SCAL_VAL en05000709.vsd
Figure 299:
PC function block
15.1.4
RED 670
599
Section 15 Metering
Table 333:
Signal BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT
Table 334:
Signal INVALID RESTART BLOCKED NEW_VAL NAME SCAL_VAL
15.1.5
Setting parameters
Table 335:
Parameter Operation EventMask
CountCriteria
RisingEdge
Scale
0.001
1.000
Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to unit per counted value Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
Quantity
Count
tReporting
60
600
RED 670
RED 670
601
602
16.1
Overview
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus. Following communication protocols are available: IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol LON communication protocol SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
16.2
16.2.1
RED 670
603
16.2.2.2
Principle of operation
Upon receiving a signal at its input, the SPGGIO function block will send the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 (via its non-transparent-to-CAP user output) to the equipment or system that requests this signal. To be able to get the signal, one must use other tools, described in the Application Manual, Chapter 2: Engineering of the IED and define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.
16.2.2.3
Function block
SP01SPGGIO IN en05000409.vsd
Figure 300:
SP function block
MP01SP16GGIO BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 en06000632.vsd
Figure 301:
MP function block
16.2.2.4
604
RED 670
Table 338:
Signal BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16
16.2.2.5
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
16.2.3
16.2.3.1
16.2.3.2
Principle of operation
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, the MVGGIO block will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC61850-8-1 (through two not-visible-to-CAP user outputs) the value and the deadband, to other equipment or systems in the substation.
RED 670
605
Figure 302:
MV function block
16.2.3.4
Table 340:
Signal VALUE RANGE
16.2.3.5
Setting parameters
Table 341:
Parameter MV db
MV zeroDb
0 - 100000
500
MV hhLim
0.001
90.000
MV hLim
0.001
80.000
High limit
MV lLim
0.001
-80.000
Low limit
MV llLim
0.001
-90.000
606
RED 670
MV max
0.001
100.000
Maximum value
MV dbType
Dead band
Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db) Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
MV limHys
0.001
5.000
16.2.4
Technical data
Table 342:
Function Protocol Communication speed for the IEDs
16.3
16.3.1
RED 670
607
For more information see LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and Control, Users manual and Technical description, 1MRS 750035-MTD EN.
LON protocol
Configuration of LON Lon Network Tool (LNT 505) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network configuration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks network is easily accessible on a single tool program. For details see the Operators manual. Activate LONCommunication Activate LON communication in the PST Parameter Setting Tool under Settings -> General settings > Communication > SLM configuration > Rear optical LON, where ADE should be set to ON. Add LON Device Types LNT A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing the device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505, with the SLDT IED 670 package version 1p2 r03.
608
RED 670
RED 670
609
Event masks The event mask for each input can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST) Under: Settings > General Settings > Monitoring > Event function as. No events OnSet, at pick-up of the signal OnReset, at drop-out of the signal OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the event function block. Single indication Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function block. Other Boolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is event masked in the event function block. Double indications Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the event reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is done in the event function block. Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not possible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for the first 8 inputs on an event function block.
610
RED 670
00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0 01 generates an open event with the read status 1 10 generates a close event with the read status 2 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3
Analog value All analog values are reported cyclic, the reporting interval is taken from the connected function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from the event function block.
Figure 303:
Command handling Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent SPA-bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character message following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent using explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport service. Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N) are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only one SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending the next message.
RED 670
611
For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, i.e. the function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 32, SXCBR 1 to 18and SXSWI 1 to 28; the SPA addresses are according to table 344
Horizontal communication
Network variables are used for communication between REx 5xx and 670IEDs. The supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values. The multiple command send function block (MTxx) is used to pack the information to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for the application by a multiple command function block (CMxx). At horizontal communication the input BOUND on the event function block (MTxx) must be set to 1. There are 10 MT and 60 CM function blocks available. The MT and CM function blocks are connected using Lon Network Tool (LNT 505). This tool also defines the service and addressing on LON. This is an overview description how to configure the network variables for 670IEDs. Configuration of LON network variables Configure the Network variables according to your application from the LON network Tool. For more details see LNT 505 in Operators manual. The following is an example of how to configure network variables concerning e.g. interlocking between two 670IEDs.
LON BAY E1 BAY E3 BAY E4
MT07
CM09
CM09
en05000718.vsd
Figure 304:
The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From LNT window select Connections -> NVConnections -> New
612
RED 670
en05000719.vsd
Figure 305:
There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either you use the drag-anddrop method where you select all nodes in the device window, drag them to the Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there. Or the traditional menu selection, Configuration -> Download...
RED 670
613
en05000720.vsd
Figure 306:
Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the Main Processing Module (NUM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available depending on type of fiber. The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
Table 344:
Name BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD Table continued on next page
SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control
Function block SCSWI01 SCSWI02 SCSWI02 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09 SPA address 1 I 5115 1 I 5139 1 I 5161 1 I 5186 1 I 5210 1 I 5234 1 I 5258 1 I 5283 1 I 5307 Description SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command
614
RED 670
RED 670
615
616
RED 670
SCSWI02 SCSWI03 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09 SCSWI10 SCSWI11 SCSWI12 SCSWI13 SCSWI14 SCSWI15 SCSWI16 SCSWI17 SCSWI18 SCSWI19 SCSWI20 SCSWI21 SCSWI22
1 I 5129 1 I 5151 1 I 5176 1 I 5200 1 I 5224 1 I 5248 1 I 5273 1 I 5297 1 I 5321 1 I 5345 1 I 5369 1 I 5393 1 I 5417 1 I 5441 1 I 5465 1 I 5489 1 I 5513 1 I 5535 1 I 5561 1 I 5584 1 I 5609
SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
RED 670
617
SCSWI02 SCSWI02 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09 SCSWI10 SCSWI11 SCSWI12
1 I 5130 1 I 5152 1 I 5177 1 I 5201 1 I 5225 1 I 5249 1 I 5274 1 I 5298 1 I 5322 1 I 5346 1 I 5370
SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
618
RED 670
Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Table continued on next page
RED 670
619
620
RED 670
Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Table continued on next page
RED 670
621
622
RED 670
RED 670
623
624
RED 670
16.3.3
Setting parameters
Table 345:
Parameter Operation
Table 346:
Parameter Operation TimerClass
RED 670
625
16.4
16.4.1
16.4.2
Principle of operation
The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data bits + even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. Recommended baud rate for each type of terminal will be found in the Technical reference manual. Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.
The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated need to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves and, consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data to the slave. Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced polling (e.g. for event information) or only on demand. The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information to the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common a broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit and receive lines is a logical "1".
SPA protocol
The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data to an IED 670 with the SPA communication protocol implemented. The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MI03-MI16) are found in table348
626
RED 670
Table 348:
Function block MI03-CH1 MI03-CH2 MI03-CH3 MI03-CH4 MI03-CH5 MI03-CH6 MI04-CH1 MI04-CH2 MI04-CH3 MI04-CH4 MI04-CH5 MI04-CH6 MI05-CH1 MI05-CH2 MI05-CH3 MI05-CH4 MI05-CH5 MI05-CH6 MI06-CH1 MI06-CH2 MI06-CH3 MI06-CH4 MI06-CH5 MI06-CH6 MI07-CH1 MI07-CH2 MI07-CH3 MI07-CH4 MI07-CH5 MI07-CH6 MI08-CH1 MI08-CH2 MI08-CH3 MI08-CH4 MI08-CH5 MI08-CH6 MI09-CH1 MI09-CH2
RED 670
627
628
RED 670
The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PC01 PC16 are found in table 349
Table 349:
Function block PC01-CNT_VAL PC02-CNT_VAL PC03-CNT_VAL PC04-CNT_VAL PC05-CNT_VAL PC06-CNT_VAL PC07-CNT_VAL PC08-CNT_VAL PC09-CNT_VAL PC10-CNT_VAL PC11-CNT_VAL PC12-CNT_VAL PC13-CNT_VAL PC14-CNT_VAL PC15-CNT_VAL PC16-CNT_VAL
I/O modules To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function block are used, i.e. the addresses for BI1 BI16. The SPA addresses are found in a separate document, refer to section "Related documents". Storage of settings in FLASH Settings that do not belong to a setting group are usually written to FLASH on command. One example is for the limits of the mA-input modules (MIxx), where 0 value must be written to the 10V43 address. Addresses for other settings that must be stored on
RED 670
629
command, can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Related documents". Single command function The IEDs may be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation automation system or from the local human-machine interface, HMI. That receiving function block has 16 outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used. The single command function consists of three function blocks; CD01 CD03 for 16 binary output signals each. The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. The SPA addresses for the single command function (CD) are shown in Table 3. For the single command function block, CD01 to CD03, the address is for the first output. The other outputs follow consecutively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the CD02 function block has the 70O718 address. The SPA addresses for the single command functions CD01 CD03 are found in table 350
Table 350:
Function block CD01-CmdInput1 CD01-CmdInput2 CD01-CmdInput3 CD01-CmdInput4 CD01-CmdInput5 CD01-CmdInput6 CD01-CmdInput7 CD01-CmdInput8 CD01-CmdInput9 CD01-CmdInput10 CD01-CmdInput11 CD01-CmdInput12 CD01-CmdInput13 CD01-CmdInput14 CD01-CmdInput15 CD01-CmdInput16 CD02-CmdInput1 CD02-CmdInput2 CD02-CmdInput3 CD02-CmdInput4 Table continued on next page
630
RED 670
Table 350 SPA addresses for the controllable signals on the single command functions Figure 307 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way, connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection terminal for control of a circuit breaker. A pulse via the binary outputs of the terminal normally performs this type of command control. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in CD01 are shown in table 350
RED 670
631
Figure 307:
Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of a circuit breaker.
The MODE input defines if the output signals from CD01 shall be steady or pulsed signals (1 = steady, 2 = pulsed). Event function This event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (e.g. operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented in an event list. The events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input channels, and all of them must be tied to the 6 DR function blocks. All internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module. The events are produced according to the set event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA channels. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears. Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the terminal, Terminal Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51). The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under EVENT MASKS/Binary Events as: No events (event mask 0) OnSet, at pick-up of the signal (event mask 1) OnReset, at drop-out of the signal (event mask 2) OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal (event mask 3)
Double indications are used to handle a combination of two inputs at a time, for example, one input for the open and one for the close position of a circuit breaker or disconnector. The double indication consists of an odd and an even input number. When the odd input is defined as a double indication, the next even input is considered to be the other input. The odd inputs has a suppression timer to suppress events at 00 states. To be used as double indications the odd inputs are individually set from the PST under EVENT MASKS/Binary Events as:
632
RED 670
Double indication (event mask 4) Double indication with midposition suppression (event mask 5)
Here, the settings of the corresponding even inputs have no meaning. These states of the inputs generate events. The status is read by the station HMI on the status indication for the odd input: 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0 01 generates a close event with the read status 1 10 generates an open event with the read status 2 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3
No analog events are available for SPA. The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 351
RED 670
633
Table 351:
Event block
EV01 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16 EV01 3)
2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 2215 2216
22E33 22E35 22E37 22E39 22E41 22E43 22E45 22E47 22E49 22E51 22E53 22E55 22E57 22E59 22E61 22E63
22E32 22E34 22E36 22E38 22E40 22E42 22E44 22E46 22E48 22E50 22E52 22E54 22E56 22E58 22E60
1) These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked 0, 1, 2 or 3. 2) These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked 4 or 5. 3) This status value contains a value with all the 16 inputs combined to a hex-value (0-FFF). Example The master requests the slave (no. 2) for latest events by addressing data category L:>2RL:CCcr
634
RED 670
The slave sends the recent events from the buffer starting from the oldest event. If all recent events do not fit into one message, rest of recent events will not be sent until during the next request. When events are requested from the slave and the buffer of the slave is empty, the slave responds with an empty data message: If<2D::CCcrlf. Connection of signals as events Signals coming from different protection and control functions and shall be sent as events to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the Event function block according to figure 308
Figure 308:
Note that corresponding Event mask must be set to an applicable value via the Parameter Setting Tool (PST).
RED 670
635
16.4.3
Design
When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) in the station, using the rear SPA port, the only hardware needed for a station monitoring system is: Optical fibres Opto/electrical converter for the PC PC
When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port, the same hardware is needed plus telephone modems. The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM 600. When communicating between the LHMI and a PC, the only hardware required is a front-connection cable.
16.4.4
Setting parameters
Table 352:
Parameter SlaveAddress BaudRate
636
RED 670
Table 353:
Parameter SlaveAddress BaudRate
Table 354:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress
16.4.5
Technical data
Table 355:
Function Protocol Communication speed Slave number
16.5
16.5.1
16.5.2
16.5.2.1
Principle of operation
General
The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point
RED 670
637
principle. The master must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol implementation in IED 670 consists of these functions: Event handling Report of analog service values (measurements) Fault location Command handling Autorecloser ON/OFF Teleprotection ON/OFF Protection ON/OFF LED reset Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC60870 standard part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment.
IEC 60870-5-103
The tables in the following sections specify the information types supported by the IED 670 products with the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented. To support the information, corresponding functions must be included in the protection and control IED. Commands in control direction Terminal commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD Command block in control direction with defined terminal signals. Number of instances: 1 Command block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.
Info. no 19 23 24 25 26 Message LED Reset Activate setting group 1 Activate setting group 2 Activate setting group 3 Activate setting group 4 Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD 638 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670
Function command block in control direction with defined output signals. Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.
Info. no. 16 17 18 Message Auto-recloser on/off Teleprotection on/off Protection on/off Supported Yes Yes Yes
Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103UserCMD Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals. Number of instances: 4 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined in private range 1 - 4. One for each instance. INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.
Info. no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Message Output signal 01 Output signal 02 Output signal 03 Output signal 04 Output signal 05 Output signal 06 Output signal 07 Output signal 08 Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Status Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined terminal functions. Number of instances: 1 Indication block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signals.
RED 670
639
Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103UserDef Function indication blocks in monitor direction with user-defined input signals. Number of instances: 20 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined in private range 5 - 24. One for each instance. INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each input signal. Default values are defined in range 1 - 8
Info. no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Message Input signal 01 Input signal 02 Input signal 03 Input signal 04 Input signal 05 Input signal 06 Input signal 07 Input signal 08 Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103Superv Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions. Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for output signals.
Info. no. 32 33 37 38 46 47 Message Measurand supervision I Measurand supervision U I>>back-up operation VT fuse failure Group warning Group alarm Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
640
RED 670
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDis Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions. The instance type is suitable for distance protection function. FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal. Number of instances: 1
Info. no. 64 65 66 67 84 69 70 71 68 74 75 78 79 80 81 82 76 77 73 Message Start L1 Start L2 Start L3 Start IN General start Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 General trip Fault forward/line Fault reverse/busbar Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Signal transmitted Signal received SCL, Fault location in ohm Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
RED 670
641
Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions. Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signal.
642
RED 670
Measurands Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXU. Measurands in public range, I103Meas Number of instances: 1 The IED will report all valid measuring types depending on connected signals. Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value. Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.
Info. no. 148 144, 145, 148 148 147 148 148 148 145, 146 147 146, 148 146, 148 148 Message IL1 IL2 IL3 IN, Neutral current UL1 UL2 UL3 UL1-UL2 UN, Neutral voltage P, active power Q, reactive power f, frequency Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Measurands in private range, I103MeasUsr Number of instances: 3 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined in private range 25 27. One for each instance. INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each block. Default value 1.
Info. no. Message Meas1 Meas2 Meas3 Supported Yes Yes Yes
RED 670
643
Disturbance recordings The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units) defined in the standard. Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified. Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with: IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block DRA1 IL2 connected to channel 2 on disturbance function block DRA1 IL3 connected to channel 3 on disturbance function block DRA1 IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block DRA1 VL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block DRA1 VL2E connected to channel 6 on disturbance function block DRA1 VL3E connected to channel 7 on disturbance function block DRA1 VEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block DRA1
Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private range 64 to 95. Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION TYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER. Disturbance Upload All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder will be reported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the master) will not be reported to the master again. When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded disturbances will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances will be sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list. I.e. when a disturbance is deleted (by other client e.g. SPA) or when a new disturbance has been recorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance. Deviations from the standard
644
RED 670
Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however, some of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in Rex67x. This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard. ASDU23 In list of recorded disturbances (ASDU23) an information element named SOF (status of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates whether: Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or test mode. Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event than start/pick-up
The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information is always set (hard coded) to:
TP TM OTEV Recorded fault with trip. [1] Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0] Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]
Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to the standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes action. In Rex67x FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for each disturbance. ASDU26 When a disturbance has been selected by the master; (by sending ASDU24), the protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information element named NOF (number of grid faults). This number should indicate fault number in the power system, i.e. a fault in the power system with several trip and auto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN should be incremented). NOF is in Rex67x, just as FAN, equal to disturbance number. To get INF and FUN for the recorded binary signals there are parameters on the disturbance recorder for each input. The user must set these parameters to whatever he connects to the corresponding input.
RED 670
645
646
RED 670
Selection of basic application functions Test mode Blocking of monitoring direction Disturbance data Private data Generic services No Yes Yes Yes No
16.5.2.2
Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available depending on type of fiber. The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
16.5.3
Function block
BLOCK ICMAI103IEDCMD 19-LEDRS 23-GRP1 24-GRP2 25-GRP3 26-GRP4 en05000689.vsd
RED 670
647
BLOCK
ICM1I103UserCMD OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 en05000693.vsd
IS01I103UsrDef BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 en05000694.vsd
648
RED 670
IZ01I103FltDis BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 78_ZONE1 79_ZONE2 80_ZONE3 81_ZONE4 82_ZONE5 76_TRANS 77_RECEV 73_SCL FLTLOC ARINPROG en05000686.vsd
IFL1I103FltStd BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 85_BFP 86_MTRL1 87_MTRL2 88_MTRL3 89_MTRN 90_IOC 91_IOC 92_IEF 93_IEF ARINPROG en05000687.vsd
RED 670
649
IMM1I103Meas BLOCK IL1 IL2 IL3 IN UL1 UL2 UL3 UL1L2 UN P Q F en05000690.vsd
IMU1I103MeasUsr BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 en05000691.vsd
16.5.4
Table 357:
Signal BLOCK
Table 358:
Signal BLOCK
Table 359:
Signal BLOCK 19_LEDRS 23_GRP1
650
RED 670
Table 360:
Signal BLOCK
Table 361:
Signal BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8
Table 362:
Signal BLOCK 32_MEASI 33_MEASU 37_IBKUP 38_VTFF 46_GRWA 47_GRAL
Table 363:
Signal BLOCK 51_EFFW 52_EFREV
RED 670
651
Table 364:
Signal BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 78_ZONE1 79_ZONE2 80_ZONE3 81_ZONE4 82_ZONE5 76_TRANS 77_RECEV 73_SCL FLTLOC ARINPROG
Table 365:
Signal BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 85_BFP
652
RED 670
Table 366:
Signal BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9
Table 367:
Signal BLOCK IL1 IL2 IL3 IN UL1 UL2 UL3 UL1L2 UN P Q F
RED 670
653
Table 368:
Signal 16-AR 17-DIFF 18-PROT
Table 369:
Signal 19-LEDRS 23-GRP1 24-GRP2 25-GRP3 26-GRP4
Table 370:
Signal OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8
16.5.5
Setting parameters
Table 371:
Parameter SlaveAddress BaudRate RevPolarity CycMeasRepTim e
654
RED 670
Table 372:
Parameter SlaveAddress BaudRate RevPolarity CycMeasRepTim e
Table 373:
Parameter FUNTYPE
Table 374:
Parameter FUNTYPE
Table 375:
Parameter PULSEMOD
T FUNTYPE INFNO_1
0.001 1 1
0.400 1 1
s FunT InfNo
INFNO_2
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_3
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_4
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_5
1 - 255
InfNo
RED 670
655
INFNO_7
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_8
1 - 255
InfNo
Table 376:
Parameter RatedIL1 RatedIL2 RatedIL3 RatedIN RatedUL1 RatedUL2 RatedUL3 RatedUL1-UL2
kV MW MVA Hz FunT
656
RED 670
Table 377:
Parameter FUNTYPE INFNO
RatedMeasur1
0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur2
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur3
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur4
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur5
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur6
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur7
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur8
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur9
0.05
1000.00
Table 378:
Parameter FUNTYPE
Table 379:
Parameter FUNTYPE
RED 670
657
Table 380:
Parameter FUNTYPE
Table 381:
Parameter FUNTYPE
Table 382:
Parameter FUNTYPE INFNO_1
INFNO_2
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_3
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_4
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_5
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_6
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_7
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_8
1 - 255
InfNo
16.5.6
Technical data
658
RED 670
Table 383:
Function Protocol
Communication speed
16.6
16.6.1
16.6.2
Principle of operation
The single command function consists of a function block CD for 16 binary output signals. The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13 characters from the CAP configuration tool. The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration setting is done via the LHMI or PCM 600 and is common for the whole function block. The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode the function block has a memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK input is available used to block the updating of the outputs. The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.
RED 670
659
16.6.4
660
RED 670
Table 385:
Signal BLOCK
16.6.5
Setting parameters
Table 386:
Parameter Mode
RED 670
661
16.7
16.7.1
16.7.2
Principle of operation
Two multiple transmit function blocks MT01-MT02 and 8 slow multiple transmit function blocks MT03-MT10 are available in IED 670. Sixteen signals can be connected and they will then be sent to the multiple command block in the other IED. The connections are set with the LON Network Tool (LNT). Twelve multiple command function block CM12 with fast execution time and 48 multiple command function blocks CM13-CM60 with slower execution time are available in the IED 670s. The multiple command function block has 16 outputs combined in one block, which can be controlled from other IEDs. The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the terminal. The command function also has a supervision function, which sets the output VALID to 0 if the block did not receive data within set maximum time.
16.7.3
16.7.3.1
Design
General
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting is done on the MODE settings, common for the whole block, from the PCM 600 setting tool. 0 = Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway. 1 = Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent from the station level. 2 = Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sent from the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic RED 670
662
connected to the command function blocks may not have a cycle time longer than the execution cycle time for the command function block.
16.7.4
Function block
CM01MultiCmd BLOCK ERROR NEWDATA OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 OUTPUT9 OUTPUT10 OUTPUT11 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT13 OUTPUT14 OUTPUT15 OUTPUT16 VALID en06000007.vsd
Figure 309:
CM function block
MT01MultiTransm BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 ERROR
en06000008.vsd
Figure 310:
MT function block
16.7.5
RED 670
663
Table 388:
Signal BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16
Table 389:
Signal ERROR NEWDATA OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 OUTPUT9 OUTPUT10 OUTPUT11 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT13 OUTPUT14
664
RED 670
Table 390:
Signal ERROR
16.7.6
Setting parameters
Table 391:
Parameter tMaxCycleTime
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
Mode tPulseTime
0.001
Steady 0.200
Table 392:
Parameter tMaxCycleTime
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
RED 670
665
666
17.1
17.1.1
Introduction
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current values together with maximum 8 binary signals in the line differential protection in RED670, or for transmission of only binary signals, up to 192 signals, in the other 600 series IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable and can thus be used for any purpose e.g. communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other binary signals between IEDs. Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with an LDCMs (Line Data Communication Module). The LDCMs are then interfaces to a 64 kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs. Each IED can be equipped with up to four LDCMs, thus enabling communication with four remote IEDs.
17.1.2
Principle of operation
The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s channels. It is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms (same in 50 Hz and 60 Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format used is C37.94 and one telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be transmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated with C37.94).
RED 670
667
Information n x 16 bits
CRC 16 bits
en01000134.vsd
Figure 311:
The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in the HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition. The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressing is included in the data field. The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mixe the messages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC function detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation. When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eight binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are represented as sampled values. When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacity of the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives the capacity of 192 signals.
17.1.3
Function block
The function blocks are not represented in CAP 531 configuration tool. The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a LDCM is included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMBI) of the IED670 and used internally in the configuration.
668
RED 670
CRM1LDCMRecBinStat COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL en07000043.vsd
CRM2LDCMRecBinStat COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL en07000044.vsd
Figure 312:
CRB1LDCMRecBinStat COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGT HERR CRCERROR REMCOMF LOWLEVEL en05000451.vsd
Figure 313:
17.1.4
RED 670
669
Table 394:
Signal COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL
Table 395:
Signal COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR REMCOMF LOWLEVEL
670
RED 670
TerminalNo
0 - 255
RemoteTermNo DiffSync
1 -
0 - 255 Echo
GPSSyncErr
Block
CommSync
Slave Master LowPower HighPower CT-GRP1 CT-GRP2 CT-SUM CT-DIFF1 CT-DIFF2 5 - 500
Slave
OptoPower
LowPower
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
ComFailAlrmDel
100
ms
Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Time delay before switching in redundant channel Time delay before switching back from redundant channel Asymmetric delay when communication use echo synch. Max allowed transmission delay Compression range
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
100
ms
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
100
ms
AsymDelay
-20.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
ms
MaxTransmDelay CompRange
1 -
20 0-25kA
ms -
RED 670
671
Table 397:
Parameter ChannelMode
TerminalNo
0 - 255
RemoteTermNo DiffSync
1 -
0 - 255 Echo
GPSSyncErr
Block
CommSync
Slave Master LowPower HighPower CT-GRP1 CT-GRP2 CT-SUM CT-DIFF1 CT-DIFF2 RedundantChann el 5 - 500
Slave
OptoPower
LowPower
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
ComFailAlrmDel
100
ms
Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Time delay before switching in redundant channel Time delay before switching back from redundant channel
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
100
ms
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
100
ms
672
RED 670
MaxTransmDelay CompRange
1 -
20 0-25kA
ms -
1 1 -
us us -
Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up Deadband for t Diff Invert polarization for X21 communication
Table 398:
Parameter ChannelMode
TerminalNo
0 - 255
RemoteTermNo CommSync
1 -
0 - 255 Slave
OptoPower
LowPower
ComFailAlrmDel
100
ms
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
100
ms
InvertPolX21
Off On
Off
RED 670
673
674
Section 18 Hardware
Section 18 Hardware
About this chapter
This chapter includes descriptions of the different hardware modules. It includes diagrams from different elevations indicating the location of connection terminals and modules.
18.1
18.1.1
Overview
Variants of case- and HMI display size
xx04000458.eps
Figure 314:
RED 670
675
Section 18 Hardware
xx04000459.eps
Figure 315:
Figure 316:
xx05000763.eps
Figure 317:
676
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
xx04000460.eps
Figure 318:
xx04000461.eps
Figure 319:
18.1.2
RED 670
677
Section 18 Hardware
Table 399:
Module PSM BIM, BOM or IOM GSM SLM LDCM LDCM OEM LDCM LDCM TRM
Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X51 and X52 X51 X301:A, B, C, D X302:A, B X303:A, B X311:A, B, C, D X312:A, B X313:A, B X401
Table 400:
Module PSM BIM, BOM, IOM or MIM GSM SLM LDCM LDCM OEM LDCM LDCM TRM
Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X101 and X102 X101 X301:A, B, C, D X302:A, B X303:A, B X311:A, B, C, D X312:A, B X313:A, B X401
678
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Table 401:
Module PSM BIM, BOM, IOM or MIM GSM SLM LDCM LDCM OEM LDCM LDCM TRM
Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X71 and X72 X71 X301:A, B, C, D X302:A, B X303:A, B X311:A, B, C, D X312:A, B X313:A, B X401, 411
Table 402:
Module PSM BIM, BOM or IOM MIM GSM SLM LDCM LDCM OEM LDCM LDCM TRM
Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X161 and X162 X31, X41, etc. or X161 X161 X301:A, B, C, D X302:A, B X303:A, B X311:A, B, C, D X312:A, B X313:A, B X401
RED 670
679
Section 18 Hardware
Table 403:
Module PSM BIM, BOM or IOM MIM GSM SLM LDCM LDCM OEM LDCM LDCM TRM 1 TRM 2
Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X131 and X132 X31, X41, etc. or X131 X131 X301:A, B, C, D X302:A, B X303:A, B X311:A, B, C, D X312:A, B X313:A, B X401 X411
18.2
18.2.1
Hardware modules
Overview
Table 404:
Module Combined backplane module (CBM)
Module for overall application control. All information is processed or passed through this module, such as configuration, settings and communication. The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push button keyboard and an ethernet connector used to connect a PC to the IED. Transformer module that galvanically separates the internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has 12 analog inputs. Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.
680
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Table 405:
Module
Binary input module (BIM) Binary output module (BOM) Binary I/O module (IOM) Line data communication modules (LDCM), short range, medium range, longrange, X21 Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103 communication modules (SLM) Optical ethernet module (OEM) mA input module (MIM) GPS time synchronization module (GSM)
18.2.2
18.2.2.1
18.2.2.2
Functionality
The Compact PCI makes 3.3V or 5V signaling in the backplane possible. The CBM backplane and connected modules are 5V PCI-compatible. Some pins on the Compact PCI connector are connected to the CAN bus, to be able to communicate with CAN based modules. If a modules self test discovers an error it informs other modules using the Internal Fail signal IRF.
18.2.2.3
Design
There are two basic versions of the CBM: with 3 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and two are
RED 670
681
Section 18 Hardware
used by other PCI modules, for example two ADMs in IEDs with two TRMs. See figure 321 with 2 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and one is used by for example an ADM in IEDs with one TRM. See figure 320
Each PCI connector consists of 2 compact PCI receptacles. The euro connectors are connected to the CAN bus and used for I/O modules and power supply.
2
en05000516.vsd
Figure 320:
Pos Description 1 2 CAN slots CPCI slots
2 en05000755.vsd
Figure 321:
Pos Description 1 CAN slots
682
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
CPCI slots
en05000756.vsd
Figure 322:
Pos Description 1 CBM
18.2.3
18.2.3.1
18.2.3.2
Functionality
The Universal Backplane Module connects the CT and VT analogue signals from the transformer input module to the analogue digital converter module. The Numerical processing module (NUM) is also connected to the UBM. The ethernet contact on the front panel as well as the internal ethernet and D-sub contacts are connected to the UBM which provides the signal path to the NUM board.
18.2.3.3
Design
It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).
RED 670
683
Section 18 Hardware
The UBM exists in 2 versions. for IEDs with two TRM and two ADM. It has four 48 pin euro connectors and one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 324 for IEDs with one TRM and one ADM. It has two 48 pin euro connectors and one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 325.
The 96 pin euro connector is used to connect the NUM board to the backplane. The 48 pin connectors are used to connect the TRM and ADM.
TRM
ADM
NUM
AD Data
X1 X2 X4
X3
Front port
Ethernet
LHMI connection
Ethernet X5
en05000489.vsd
Figure 323:
en05000757.vsd
Figure 324:
684
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
en05000758.vsd
Figure 325:
en05000759.vsd
Figure 326:
Pos Description 1 UBM
18.2.4
18.2.4.1
RED 670
685
Section 18 Hardware
18.2.4.2 Design
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC input voltage ranges see table 406. The power supply module contains a built-in, selfregulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery system.
Block diagram
Input connector
Filter
Power supply
Supervision
99000516.vsd
Figure 327:
18.2.4.3
Technical data
Table 406:
Quantity Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input) Power consumption Auxiliary DC power in-rush
18.2.5
18.2.5.1
686
Backplane connector
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high speed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM is the compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and receives interrupts.
18.2.5.2
Functionality
The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, standard off-the-shelf compact-PCI CPU module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is via two compact PCI connectors and an euro connector. The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PCMIP slots onto which mezzanine cards such as OEM or LDCM can be mounted. To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC slot and external PCI accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge. The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flash file system. During power up the application code is moved to and then executed from the DRAM. The code is stored in the flash memory because it is nonvolatile and executed in DRAM because of the higher performance of DRAM. The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup of the real time clock. No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power dissipation.
RED 670
687
Section 18 Hardware
18.2.5.3 Block diagram
Compact Flash
Logic
Memory
Ethernet
CPU
Figure 328:
18.2.6
18.2.7
18.2.7.1
688
UBM connector
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
18.2.7.2 Design
The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of the module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers. Basic versions: 6 current channels and 6 voltage channels 9 current channels and 3 voltage channels 12 current channels 6 current channels
The rated values of the current inputs are selected at order. The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM via the UBM. Configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)".
18.2.7.3
Technical data
Table 407:
Quantity Current Operative range Permissive overload Burden Ac voltage Operative range Permissive overload Burden Frequency
*)
18.2.8
18.2.8.1
RED 670
689
Section 18 Hardware
OEM modules. The OEM card should always be mounted on the NUM board if only one card is needed. In cases where two cards are needed then the PCM slot on the ADM may be used for the second OEM. The UBM connects the ADM to the transformer input module (TRM).
18.2.8.2
Design
The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from the transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronic voltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate A\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is obtained with a 16 bit A\D converter. Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency. The A\D converted signals go through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz and are reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
690
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
AD1 AD2
1.2v
AD3 AD4
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12
PMC
level shift
PC-MIP
2.5v
en05000474.vsd
Figure 329:
RED 670
691
18.2.9.2
Design
The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level of the binary input is selected at order. For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)". A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it possible to use the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set. Figure 330 shows the operating characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage levels. The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required.
692
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
[V] 300
176 144 88 72 38 32 19 18 24/30V RL24 48/60V RL48 110/125V RL110 220/250V RL220
xx99000517.vsd
Figure 330:
This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM) via the CAN-bus on the backplane. The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is shown in figure 331 and 332.
RED 670
693
Section 18 Hardware
[mA] 30
1 35 70 [ms]
en03000108.vsd
Figure 331:
Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of BIM.
[mA] 30
Figure 332:
Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with enhanced pulse counting capabilities.
694
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Process connector
Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input
Microcontroller
Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input
99000503.vsd
Figure 333:
18.2.9.3
Technical data
Table 408:
Quantity Binary inputs DC voltage, RL
Power consumption RL24 = (24/40) V RL48 = (48/60) V RL110 = (110/125) V RL220 = (220/250) V Counter input frequency Oscillating signal discriminator
Backplane connector
-
RED 670
Process connector
Memory
695
Section 18 Hardware
Table 409:
Quantity Binary inputs DC voltage, RL
Power consumption RL24 = (24/40) V RL48 = (48/60) V RL110 = (110/125) V RL220 = (220/250) V Counter input frequency Balanced counter input frequency Oscillating signal discriminator
18.2.10
18.2.10.1
18.2.10.2
Design
The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each pair of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 334. This should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the back of the IED. The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker trip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is required. For configuration of the output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)".
696
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Output module
3
xx00000299.vsd
Figure 334:
1 2 3
Output connection from relay 1 Output signal power source connection Output connection from relay 2
RED 670
697
Section 18 Hardware
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Process connector
Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay
Relay
Trip and Signal relays 24 250 V AC, DC 1000 V rms 8A 10 A
Microcontroller
Memory
99000505.vsd
Figure 335:
18.2.10.3
Technical data
Table 410:
Binary outputs Max system voltage Test voltage across open contact, 1 min Current carrying capacity Continuous 1s Table continued on next page
BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity
698
Backplane connector
Process connector
CAN
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Function or quantity Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms Trip and Signal relays 30 A 10 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A
18.2.11
18.2.11.1
18.2.11.2
Design
Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase the disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved with a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure 331. Inputs are debounced by software. Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery supply earth faults, see figure 330. The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering. I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and stored by the event recorder if present. The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays. One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts are connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the other group has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, see figure 336. The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay is connected in parallel to the standard output relay. For configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to sections "Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)" and "Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)".
RED 670
699
Section 18 Hardware
Figure 336:
Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds to rear position X31, X41, etc. and output contacts named XB to rear position X32, X42, etc.
18.2.11.3
Technical data
700
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Table 411:
Quantity Binary inputs DC voltage, RL
Power consumption RL24 = (24/40) V RL48 = (48/60) V RL110 = (110/125) V RL220 = (220/250) V
Table 412:
IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Trip and signal relays 10 250 V AC, DC 1000 V rms Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay) 2 250 V AC, DC 800 V DC
Function or quantity Binary outputs Max system voltage Test voltage across open contact, 1 min Current carrying capacity Continuous 1s Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s Breaking capacity for AC, cos > 0.4 Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms
8A 10 A
8A 10 A
0.4 A 0.4 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A 10 nF
18.2.12
18.2.12.1
RED 670
701
Section 18 Hardware
Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm single mode) and Short range (900 nm multi mode) are available. Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes. Never look into the laser beam.
18.2.12.2
Design
The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be mounted on: the ADM the NUM
ID
ST
IO-connector
ST
32,768 MHz
16.000 MHz
en05000473.vsd
Figure 337:
The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI connectors and one I/O ST type connector
X1
ADN 2841 2.5V ID
DS 3904
DS 3904
PCI9054 TQ176
MAX 3645
3 2
en06000393.vsd
Figure 338:
The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector
702
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
18.2.12.3 Technical data
Table 413:
Characteristic Type of LDCM Type of fibre
Wave length Optical budget Graded-index multimode 62.5/125 mm, Graded-index multimode 50/125 mm
Type FC/PC C37.94 implementation **) Synchronous 64 kbit/s Internal or derived from received signal
Type FC/PC C37.94 implementation **) Synchronous 64 kbit/s Internal or derived from received signal
*) depending on optical budget calculation **) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as C37.94
18.2.13
18.2.13.1
18.2.13.2
Design
The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM module. Three variants of the SLM is available with different combinations of optical fibre connectors, see figure 339. The plastic fibre connectors are of snap-in type and the glass fibre connectors are of ST type.
RED 670
703
Section 18 Hardware
Figure 339:
A Snap in connector for plastic fibre B ST connector for glass fibre 1 2 LON port SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port
Figure 340:
1 Receiver, LON
704
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
18.2.13.3 Technical data
Table 414:
Quantity Optical connector Fibre, optical budget Fibre diameter
Table 415:
Quantity Optical connector
18.2.14
18.2.14.1
18.2.14.2
Functionality
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems according to IEC6185081 have been implemented. Refer to section "Line data communication module (LDCM)" for further information.
18.2.14.3
Design
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PCM card and mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM. If a second OEM is needed it is mounted on the NUM. The OEM is a 100base Fx module and available as a single channel or double channel unit.
RED 670
705
Section 18 Hardware
en04000472.vsd
Figure 341:
ID chip
LED
25MHz oscillator
Ethernet cont.
Transmitter
Receiver
Ethernet cont.
Transmitter
25MHz oscillator
en05000472.vsd
Figure 342:
18.2.14.4
Technical data
Quantity Number of channels Standard Type of fibre Wave length Optical connector Communication speed Rated value 1 or 2 IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX 62.5/125 mm multimode fibre 1300 nm Type ST Fast Ethernet 100 MB
706
RED 670
PCI bus
LED
IO bus
Receiver
18.2.15.2
Design
The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module. For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)". The analog inputs measure DC and low frequency currents in the range of +/- 20mA. The A/D converter has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a non-volatile memory on the module. The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range. The module communicates, like the other I/O-modules on the serial CAN-bus.
RED 670
707
Section 18 Hardware
Process connector
Optoisolation DC/DC
Optoisolation DC/DC
Optoisolation DC/DC
Memory
Microcontroller
99000504.vsd
Figure 343:
18.2.15.3
Technical data
Table 416:
Quantity: Input range Input resistance Power consumption each mA-board each mA input
708
Backplane connector
CAN
RED 670
18.2.16.2
Design
The GPS time synchronization module is 6U high and occupies one slot. The slot closest to the NUM shall always be used. The GSM consists of CAN carrier module (CCM) GPS clock module (GCM) GPS receiver unit
The CCM is a carrier board for the GCM mezzanine PCM card and GPS unit, see figure 345. There is a cable between the external antenna input on the back of the GCM and the GPS-receiver. This is a galvanic connection vulnerable to electromagnetic interference. The connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded plate to reduce the risk. The second cable is a flat cable that connects the GPS and the GCM. It is used for communication between the GCM and the GPS-receiver. All communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the CAN-bus. The CMPPS signal is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide 1s accuracy at sampling level.
PMC GPS antenna GPS receiver GPS clock module
CMPPS
CAN controller
CAN
en05000675.vsd
Figure 344:
RED 670
709
Section 18 Hardware
xx05000471.vsd
Figure 345:
1 GPS receiver
2 GPS Clock module (GCM) 3 CAN carrier module (CCM) 4 Antenna connector
18.2.16.3
Technical data
Table 417:
Function Receiver Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new position or after power loss longer than 1 month Time to reliable time reference after a power loss longer than 48 hours Time to reliable time reference after a power loss shorter than 48 hours
710
RED 670
GPS antenna
Introduction
In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna with applicable cable must be used.
18.2.17.2
Design
The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or on an antenna mast. See figure 346
1 6
2 3
xx04000155.vsd
Figure 346:
where: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
GPS antenna TNC connector Console, 78x150 mm Mounting holes 5.5 mm Tab for securing of antenna cable Vertical mounting position Horizontal mounting position
Always position the antenna and its console so that a continuous clear line-of-sight visibility to all directions is obtained, preferably more than 75%. A minimum of 50% clear line-of-sight visibility is required for un-interrupted operation.
RED 670
711
Section 18 Hardware
99001046.vsd
Figure 347:
Antenna line-of-sight
Antenna cable Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a male SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GSM. Choose cable type and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz. Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to the antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna cable with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna. When the antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the receiver. REx670 must be switched off when the antenna cable is connected.
18.2.17.3
Technical data
Table 418:
Function Max antenna cable attenuation Antenna cable impedance Lightning protection Antenna cable connector
712
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
18.3
18.3.1
Case dimensions
Case without rear cover
D A
F
C
xx04000448.vsd
G H
Figure 348:
xx04000464.vsd
Case size A 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19 265.9 265.9 265.9
H 465.1
K 482.6 (mm)
18.3.2
RED 670
713
Section 18 Hardware
K
D A
G
C
xx05000501.vsd
J
xx05000502.vsd
Figure 350:
Figure 351:
xx05000503.vsd
Figure 352:
H 465.1
K 482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit. All dimensions are in millimeters.
714
RED 670
A B
E D
xx04000465.vsd
Figure 353:
Flush mounting
Cut-out dimensions (mm) B +/-1 210.1 322.4 434.7 C 254.3 254.3 254.3 D 4.0-10.0 4.0-10.0 4.0-10.0 12.5 12.5 12.5
Case size Tolerance A +/-1 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19
E = 188.6 mm without rear protection cover, 229.6 mm with rear protection cover
RED 670
715
xx06000182.vsd
Figure 354:
A
G
C
xx05000505.vsd
Figure 355:
716
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Case size (mm) Tolerance 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19
18.3.5
A B E
en04000471.vsd
Figure 356:
Wall mounting
RED 670
717
[0.33]
[18.31] [18.98]
[0.79]
[7.68]
Dimension mm [inches]
xx06000232.eps
Figure 357:
[1.50]
[10.47]
[7.50]
[0.33]
[18.31] [18.98]
[0.79]
[7.68]
[inches]
en06000234.eps
Figure 358:
718
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
18.4
18.4.1
18.4.1.1
Mounting alternatives
Flush mounting
Overview
All IED sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19 and 1/1 x 19 and RHGS6 6U 1/4 x 19, cases, can be flush mounted. Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class IP54 protection. The flush mounting kit are utilized for IEDs of sizes: 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19 and 1/1 x 19 and are also suitable for mounting of RHGS6, 6U 1/4 x 19 cases. Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs when IP54 class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained when mounting two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.
To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealing must be ordered when ordering the IED.
RED 670
719
Section 18 Hardware
18.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting
1 7
2 6 3 4 5
xx06000246.vsd
Figure 359:
PosNo 1
2 3 4 5 6 7
4 4 4
2,9x9,5 mm M5x25
18.4.2
18.4.2.1
720
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
for the angles. The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 either to the left or right side of the cubicle. Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-byside mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to be selected so that the total size equals 19.
When mounting the mounting angles, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
18.4.2.2
1a
1b
xx04000452.vs d
Figure 360:
PosNo 1a, 1b 2
Description Mounting angels, which can be mounted, either to the left or right side of the case. Screw
RED 670
721
Wall mounting
Overview
All case sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19 and 1/1 x 19, can be wall mounted. It is also possible to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle. When mounting the side plates, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall mounting is therefore not recommended for communication modules with fiber connection; Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication module (SLM), Optical Ethernet module (OEM) and Line data communication module (LDCM).
18.4.3.2
5 6 xx04000453.vs d
Figure 361:
722
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
PosNo 1 2 3 4 5 6
Quantity 4 8 4 2 6 2
18.4.3.3
80 mm
en06000135.vsd
Figure 362:
PosNo 1 2 3
RED 670
723
18.4.4.2
xx04000456.vsd
Figure 363:
PosNo 1 2, 3 4
18.4.4.3
724
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
xx06000180.vsd
Figure 364:
IED 670 (1/2 x 19) mounted with a RHGS6 case containing a test switch module equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminal base.
18.4.5
18.4.5.1
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
RED 670
725
Section 18 Hardware
18.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting
1 2
3 4
xx06000181.vsd
Figure 365:
PosNo 1 2, 3 4
18.5
18.5.1
Technical data
Enclosure
Table 419:
Material Front plate Surface treatment Finish
Case
Steel sheet Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI Aluzink preplated steel Light grey (RAL 7035)
726
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Table 420:
Front
Table 421:
Case size 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19
Weight
Weight 10 kg 15 kg 18 kg
18.5.2
Connection system
Table 422:
Connector type Terminal blocks of feed through type
Table 423:
Connector type
18.5.3
Influencing factors
Table 424:
Parameter Ambient temperature, operate value Relative humidity Operative range Storage temperature
RED 670
727
Section 18 Hardware
Table 425:
Dependence on
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage Operative range Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate value Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage Interruption interval 050 ms 0 s Restart time
Table 426:
Dependence on
Frequency dependence, operate value Harmonic frequency dependence (20% content) Harmonic frequency dependence for distance protection (10% content)
18.5.4
Electromagnetic compatibility
Type test values 2.5 kV 2.5 kV 15 kV air discharge 8 kV contact discharge 8 kV contact discharge 4 kV 1-2 kV, 1.2/50 ms high energy 150-300 V, 50 Hz 1000 A/m, 3 s 20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz 20 V/m, 80-2500 MHz 35 V/m 26-1000 MHz Reference standards IEC 60255-22-1, Class III IEC 61000-4-12, Class III IEC 60255-22-2, Class IV IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV IEC 60255-22-4, Class A IEC 60255-22-5 IEC 60255-22-7, Class A IEC 61000-4-8, Class V IEC 60255-22-3 EN 61000-4-3 IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
728
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Test Conducted electromagnetic field disturbance Radiated emission Conducted emission Type test values 10 V, 0.15-80 MHz 30-1000 MHz 0.15-30 MHz Reference standards IEC 60255-22-6 IEC 60255-25 IEC 60255-25
Table 428:
Test Dielectric test
Insulation
Type test values 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J >100 MW at 500 VDC Reference standard IEC 60255-5
Table 429:
Test Cold test Storage test Dry heat test
Environmental tests
Type test value Test Ad for 16 h at -25C Test Ad for 16 h at -40C Test Bd for 16 h at +70C Test Ca for 4 days at +40 C and humidity 93% Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55 C and humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle = 24 hours) Reference standard IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-2 IEC 60068-2-3 IEC 60068-2-30
Table 430:
Test Immunity Emissivity
CE compliance
According to EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-4 EN 50178
Table 431:
Test Vibration Shock and bump Seismic
Mechanical tests
Type test values Class I Class I Class I Reference standards IEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3
RED 670
729
730
Section 19 Labels
Section 19 Labels
About this chapter
This chapter includes descriptions of the different labels and where to find them on the IED.
19.1
Different labels
1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7
xx06000574.eps
RED 670
731
Section 19 Labels
1 2 3 4 5 6
Product type, description and serial number Order number, dc supply voltage and rated frequency Optional, customer specific information Manufacturer Transformer input module, rated currents and voltages Transformer designations
732
RED 670
Section 19 Labels
1 2 3
4
en06000573.eps
1 2 3
Warning label
RED 670
733
734
RED 670
735
736
RED 670
RED 670
737
738
RED 670
RED 670
739
740
RED 670
RED 670
741
742
RED 670
RED 670
743
744
RED 670
RED 670
745
746
RED 670
RED 670
747
748
RED 670
21.1
Application
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections in different points in the network different time delays for the different relays are normally used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time delay. In more sophisticated applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections connected in series.
I>
Figure 366:
I>
I>
xx05000129.vsd
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
en05000130.vsd
Figure 367:
RED 670
749
Time
Figure 368:
The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time and still assure the selectivity between protections. To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following factors, in a simple case with two protections in series: Difference between pick-up time of the protections to be co-ordinated Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault Reset time of the protection Margin dependent of the time-delay inaccuracy of the protections
Feeder
I>
I>
Time axis
t=0
t=t1
t=t2
t=t3
en05000132.vsd
Figure 369:
where: t=0 t=t1 t=t2
750
RED 670
t=t3
is Protection A1 resets
In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous). When the fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault current. After the time t1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences between the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker. At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults. The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active. At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, i.e. the timer is stopped. In most applications it is required that the delay times shall reset as fast as possible when the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following applications: If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current relay, close to the faults, starts and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system. Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic reclosing to a permanent fault. Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the release function.
21.2
21.2.1
Principle of operation
Mode of operation
The function can operate in a definite time delay mode or in a current dependent inverse time delay mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard curves are available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the component inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr. Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen. If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signal startValue), a timer, according to the selected operate mode, is started. The component
RED 670
751
always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current level used in timing calculations. In case of definite time the timer will run constantly until the trip time is reached or until the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the hysteresis) and the reset time has elapsed. For definite time delay curve index no 5 (ANSI/IEEE Definite time) or 15 (IEC Definite time) are chosen. The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 109.
A t[ s ] = + Bk i p -C in >
where: p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type, in> k i is the set start current for step n, is set time multiplier for step n and is the measured current.
(Equation 109)
For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set start level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:
(top - B k )
i p - C = Ak in >
(Equation 110)
The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to equation 111, in addition to the constant time delay:
i p - C dt A k in > 0
t
(Equation 111)
For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.
752
RED 670
Dt
i( j ) p - C A k j =1 in >
n
(Equation 112)
where: j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected, i.e. when
i in >
Dt n i (j)
>1
is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the protection algorithm, is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time equation is fulfilled, i.e. when a trip is given and is the fault current at time j
For inverse time operation, the inverse-time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse-time characteristics are supported. The list of characteristics in table 432 matches the list in the IEC 61850-7-4 spec.
Table 432:
Curve name Curve name ANSI Extremely Inverse ANSI Very Inverse ANSI Normal Inverse ANSI Moderately Inverse ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse ANSI Long Time Very Inverse IEC Normal Inverse IEC Very Inverse IEC Inverse IEC Extremely. Inverse IEC Short Time Inverse IEC Long Time Inverse
For the ANSI/IEEE characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according to table 433:
RED 670
753
Table 433:
Parameter/operationMode 1 = ANSI Extremely inverse 2 = ANSI Very inverse 3 = ANSI Inverse 4 = ANSI Moderately inverse 6 = ANSI Long-time extremely inverse 7 = ANSI Long-time very inverse 8 = ANSI Long-time inverse
For the IEC characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according to table 434:
Table 434: Inverse time curves for IEC characteristics
A(b) 0.14 13.5 0.14 80.0 0.05 120 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 1 1 1 1 1 1 p (a) 0.02 1.0 0.02 2.0 0.04 1.0
Parameter/operationMode 9 = IEC Normal inverse 10 = IEC Very inverse 11 = IEC Inverse 12 = IEC Extremely inverse 13 = IEC Short-time inverse 14 = IEC Long-time inverse
For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time delay of operation, see figure 370.
754
RED 670
Operate time
tnMin
Current
en05000133.vsd
Figure 370:
In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two additional curves available; the 18 = RI time inverse and the 19 = RD time inverse. The 18 = RI time inverse curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA relay RI. The curve is described by equation 114:
(Equation 114)
The 19 = RD time inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual earth fault current protection, with ability to detect high resistive earth faults. The curve is described by equation 115:
RED 670
755
t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 ln
i k in >
(Equation 115)
where: in> k i is the set start current for step n, is set time multiplier for step n and is the measured current
If the curve type is chosen as 17 the user can make a tailor made inverse time curve according to the general equation 116.
A t[ s ] = + Bk p i -C in >
(Equation 116)
Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. We have the possibility to choose between three different reset type delays. Available alternatives are listed in table 435.
Table 435:
Curve name Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI Reset
If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis. If IEC reset is chosen the timer is reset the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis. If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault clearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the hysteresis). The timer will reset according to equation 117.
756
RED 670
tr t[ s ] = i 2 -1 in >
where: The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.
(Equation 117)
The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the choice of time delay characteristic. For the independent time delay characteristics (type 5 and 15) the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset). For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics (type 1 - 4 and 6 - 8) all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). For IEC inverse time delay characteristics (type 9 - 14) the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset). For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given, see equation 118:
tr t[ s ] = i pr - cr in >
(Equation 118)
For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics (type 18 and 19) the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
21.3
Inverse characteristics
RED 670
757
Table 436:
Function
Operate characteristic:
t =
A P ( I - 1)
+ B k
Reset characteristic:
t = tr
2
(I
-1
I = Imeasured/Iset ANSI Extremely Inverse no 1 ANSI Very inverse no 2 ANSI Normal Inverse no 3 ANSI Moderately Inverse no 4 ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse no 6 ANSI Long Time Very Inverse no 7 ANSI Long Time Inverse no 8 A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0, tr=29.1 A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0, tr=21.6 A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46 A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85 A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30 A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46 k=(0.01-1.20) in steps of 0.01 A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6 ANSI/IEEE C37.112, class 5 + 30 ms
Table 437:
Function
Operate characteristic:
t =
A P k ( I - 1)
I = Imeasured/Iset Time delay to reset, IEC inverse time IEC Normal Inverse no 9 IEC Very inverse no 10 IEC Inverse no 11 IEC Extremely inverse no 12 IEC Short-time inverse no 13 IEC Long-time inverse no 14 Table continued on next page (0.000-60.000) s A=0.14, P=0.02 A=13.5, P=1.0 A=0.14, P=0.02 A=80.0, P=2.0 A=0.05, P=0.04 A=120, P=1.0 0.5% of set time 10 ms IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms
758
RED 670
t =
A P (I - C )
+ B k
Reset characteristic:
t = TR
PR
(I
- CR
0.339 -
0.236 I
k
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
RED 670
759
Table 438:
Function Type A curve:
Inverse time characteristics for Two step undervoltage protection (PUVM, 27)
Range or value k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 Accuracy Class 5 +40 ms
t =
U < -U
U<
t =
k 480
+ 0.055
U< = Uset U = Umeasured Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
kA +D t = P U < -U -C B U <
U< = Uset U = Umeasured
760
RED 670
Table 439:
Function Type A curve:
t =
Inverse time characteristics for Two step overvoltage protection (POVM, 59)
Range or value k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 Accuracy Class 5 +40 ms
U -U > U>
k 480
2.0
- 0.035
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
Type C curve:
t =
k 480
3.0
- 0.035
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
Programmable curve:
t = kA +D
B U - U > U >
-C
RED 670
761
Table 440:
Function Type A curve:
t =
Inverse time characteristics for Two step residual overvoltage protection (POVM, 59N)
Range or value k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 Accuracy Class 5 +40 ms
U -U > U>
- 0.035
Type C curve:
t =
- 0.035
Programmable curve:
t =
kA
B U - U > U >
-C
+D
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
762
RED 670
100
10
k= 15 10 7 5 3 2
0.1
0.5
0.01
10
100
I/I>
xx05000764.vsd
Figure 371:
RED 670
763
100
10
k= 15 10
7 5 3 2 1
0.1
0.5
0.01
10
100
I/I>
xx05000765.vsd
Figure 372:
764
RED 670
100
10
k= 15 10
7 5 3 2 1
0.1
0.5
0.01
10
100
I/I>
xx05000766.vsd
Figure 373:
ANSI Inverse
RED 670
765
100
k=
10
15 10 7 5 3 2
1 0.5
0.1
0.01
10
100
I/I>
xx05000767.vsd
Figure 374:
Moderately inverse
766
RED 670
100
10
0.1
0.05
0.01
10
100 I/I>
xx05000768.vsd
Figure 375:
RED 670
767
100
10
1
k= 1.1 0.9 0.7 0.5 0.3
0.1
0.01
10
100
I/I>
xx05000769.vsd
Figure 376:
Very inverse
768
RED 670
100
10
k=
0.1
0.01
10
0.1 0.05
100
I/I>
xx05000770.vsd
Figure 377:
Extremely inverse
RED 670
769
770
Section 22 Glossary
Section 22 Glossary
About this chapter
This chapter contains a glossary with terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical documentation.
22.1
Glossary
AC A/D converter ADBS ADM ANSI AR ArgNegRes ArgDir ASCT ASD AWG BBP BFP BIM BOM BR BS BSR BST C37.94 CAN CAP 531 Alternating current Analog to digital converter Amplitude dead -band supervision Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization American National Standards Institute Autoreclosing Setting parameter/ZD/ Setting parameter/ZD/ Auxiliary summation current transformer Adaptive signal detection American Wire Gauge standard Busbar protection Breaker failure protection Binary input module Binary output module External bi-stable relay British standard Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals between IEDs Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial communication Configuration and programming tool 771
RED 670
Section 22 Glossary
CB CBM CCITT
Circuit breaker Combined backplane module Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A United Nations sponsored standards body within the International Telecommunications Union. CAN carrier module Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI Combined mega pulses per second Close-open cycle Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both directions Standard format according to IEC 60255-24 Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four twisted pairs of with two are used for transmitting data in both directions, and two pairs for transmitting clock signals Central processor unit Carrier receive Cyclic redundancy check Carrier send Current transformer Capacitive voltage transformer Delayed auto-reclosing Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.) Dead bus dead line Dead bus live line Direct current Discrete Fourier transform Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board Dead line live bus Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE/ANSI Std. 1379-2000 Disturbance recorder Dynamic random access memory Disturbance report handler RED 670
COMTRADE Contra-directional
CPU CR CRC CS CT CVT DAR DARPA DBDL DBLL DC DFT DIP-switch DLLB DNP DR DRAM DRH 772
Section 22 Glossary
DSP DTT EHV network EIA EMC EMF EMI EnFP ESD FOX 20 FOX 512/515 FOX 6Plus G.703
Digital signal processor Direct transfer trip scheme Extra high voltage network Electronic Industries Association Electro magnetic compatibility Electro motive force Electro magnetic interference End fault protection Electrostatic discharge Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data and protection signals Access multiplexer Compact, time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced and unbalanced lines Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module General interrogation command Gas insulated switchgear Generic object oriented substation event Global positioning system GPS time synchronization module High level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard Plastic fiber connector Human machine interface High speed auto reclosing High voltage High voltage direct current Integrating dead band supervision International Electrical Committee IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6: Requirements for protective current transformers for transient performance
GCM GI GIS GOOSE GPS GSM HDLC protocol HFBR connector type HMI HSAR HV HVDC IDBS IEC IEC 60044-6
RED 670
773
Section 22 Glossary
Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication Substation Automation communication standard Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-pair or optical fiber cable PCI Mezzanine card (PMC) standard for local bus modules. References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common mezzanine card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for the electrical EMF Electro Motive Force. Intelligent electronic device Intelligent gas insulated switchgear Binary input/output module When several occurrences of the same function are available in the IED they are referred to as instances of that function. One instance of a function is identical to another of the same kind but will have a different number in the IED user interfaces. The word instance is sometimes defined as an item of information that is representative of a type. In the same way an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type of function. 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless, best-effort packet switching protocol. It provides packet routing, fragmentation and re-assembly through the data link layer. 2. Ingression protection according to IEC standard Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 54 Internal fail signal InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B, standard 200 International Telecommunications Union Local area network High voltage software module Liquid crystal display Line differential communication module Local detection device RED 670
IP
IP 20 IP 40 IP 54 IRF IRIG-B: ITU LAN LIB 520 LCD LDCM LDD 774
Section 22 Glossary
LED LNT LON MCB MCM MIM MPM MVB NCC NUM OCO cycle OCP OEM OLTC OV Overreach
Light emitting diode LON network tool Local operating network Miniature circuit breaker Mezzanine carrier module Milli-ampere module Main processing module Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed for use in trains. National Control Centre Numerical module Open-close-open cycle Overcurrent protection Optical ethernet module On load tap changer Over voltage A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For example a distance relay is over-reaching when the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set reach. The relay sees the fault but perhaps it should not have seen it. Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus Pulse code modulation Protection and control IED manager Mezzanine card standard Process interface for sensors & actuators PCI Mezzanine card Permissive overreach transfer trip Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the measured and/or controlled components Power supply module Parameter setting tool Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio Permissive underreach transfer trip Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX 775
PCI PCM PCM 600 PC-MIP PISA PMC POTT Process bus PSM PST PT ratio PUTT RASC RED 670
Section 22 Glossary
RCA REVAL RFPP RFPE RISC RMS value RS422 RS485 RTC RTU SA SC SCS SCT SLM SMA connector SMS SNTP
Relay characteristic angle Evaluation software Resistance for phase-to-phase faults Resistance for phase-to-earth faults Reduced instruction set computer Root mean square value A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-to-point connections Serial link according to EIA standard RS485 Real time clock Remote terminal unit Substation Automation Switch or push-button to close Station control system System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850 Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IEC communication. Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant impedance. Station monitoring system Simple network time protocol is used to synchronize computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the required accuracy. Strmberg protection acquisition, a serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication Switch for CB ready condition Switch or push-button to trip Neutral point of transformer or generator Static VAr compensation Trip coil Trip circuit supervision Transmission control protocol. The most common transport layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet. Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD RED 670
Section 22 Glossary
Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for internet working and encompasses both network layer and transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP. TEF TNC connector TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Underreach Time delayed earth-fault protection function Threaded Neill Concelman, A threaded constant impedance version of a BNC connector Current transformer class according to IEC A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For example a distance relay is under-reaching when the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set reach. The relay does not see the fault but perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach. Process interface components that deliver measured voltage and current values Coordinated universal time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth"s orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth"s irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane and ship navigation, where it also sometimes known by the military name, "Zulu time". "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet stands for "Z" which stands for longitude zero. Undervoltage Weak end infeed logic Voltage transformer A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom equipment Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as the residual or the earth-fault current Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage
U/I-PISA UTC
RED 670
777
778